JP2022111823A - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To increase the interest of a game.SOLUTION: A game machine includes display means (display device 41) and performance control means (performance control device 300) for controlling display of the display means. The performance control means displays a decorative game in which a plurality of pieces of identification information is variably displayed correspondingly to the game, on the display means. While a specific performance is not executed, the decorative game is displayed in the display mode in which each of the identification information includes a number part (character part 87b) and a decoration part 87c attached to the number part. While the specific performance is executed, performance display using each of the identification information is executed. While a first specific performance of the specific performance is executed, the identification information in the performance display is displayed in the number part and the decoration part 87c. While a second specific performance of the specific performance is executed, the identification information in the performance display is displayed in the number part.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 55

Description

TECHNICAL FIELD The present invention relates to a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and that can generate a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result.

Pachinko machines are typical examples of game machines. In this pachinko machine, a plurality of pieces of identification information (designs, symbols, etc.) are displayed on a variable display device provided in the game area based on the winning of a game ball in a starting hole provided in the game area (start winning). ) is executed, and when the result of the variable display game is a special result, a special game state is entered in which the special variable prize winning device is released (see Patent Document 1, for example).

JP 2015-180269 A

However, there was no change in the display mode of the identification information itself, and it lacked interest.
An object of the present invention is to improve the amusement of games.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1,
A gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generating a state advantageous to a player when the result of the game is a special result,
display means for displaying information about games;
and a production control means for controlling the display of the display means,
The production control means is
configured to display, on the display means, a decoration game that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information corresponding to the game;
when the specific effect is not being executed, the decoration game is displayed in a display mode in which each of the identification information includes a number portion and a decoration portion attached to the number portion;
When the specific effect is being executed, the effect display is performed using each of the identification information,
During execution of a first specific effect of the specific effects, the identification information in the effect display is displayed by the number part and the decoration part,
During execution of a second specific effect among the specific effects, the identification information in the effect display is displayed by the number portion.

According to the present invention, it is possible to improve the amusement of the game.

BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a figure explaining a prize-winning device. It is a figure explaining the detail of a batch display. It is a figure explaining the detail of the production|presentation operation part. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. 4 is a flowchart for explaining main processing; 4 is a flowchart for explaining main processing; 4 is a flowchart for explaining timer interrupt processing; It is a flow chart explaining special figure game processing. It is a flow chart explaining a start opening switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure starting mouth switch common processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure reservation information determination process. It is a flow chart explaining a look-ahead big hit determination process. It is a flow chart for explaining a big winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart for explaining the special figure usual processing. (a) is a flowchart for explaining the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing, (b) is a flowchart for explaining the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing. It is a flowchart explaining big-hit determination processing. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure 1 stop design setting process. It is a flow chart for explaining a special figure 2 stop design setting process. 10 is a flowchart for explaining fluctuation start information setting processing; It is a flow chart explaining processing during special figure fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining processing during special figure display. 10 is a flowchart for explaining fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing 1; 10 is a flowchart for explaining fanfare/during-interval processing; It is a flow chart explaining jackpot end processing. (a) is a flow chart for explaining a big hit end setting process 1, and (b) is a flow chart for explaining a big hit end setting process 2. FIG. It is a flow chart explaining big hit end setting processing 3. It is a flow chart explaining the main processing in the production control device. 9 is a flowchart for explaining received command check processing; 9 is a flowchart for explaining received command analysis processing; FIG. 3 is a diagram showing an example of a data configuration of a virtual drawing space (frame buffer); FIG. 11 is a flowchart for explaining single-shot command processing; FIG. FIG. 11 is a flow chart for explaining variable command processing; FIG. It is a flow chart explaining change production setting processing. 10 is a flow chart for explaining an advance notice effect setting process 1; It is a figure explaining an example of a display with a display. It is a figure explaining an example of a step-up notice. It is a figure explaining another example of a temporary image. FIG. 5 is a diagram illustrating an example of a storage position of temporary image data; It is a figure explaining the execution ratio of suggestion production|presentation. 10 is a flowchart for explaining suggestion effect setting processing; It is a figure explaining the limitation period at the time of a power failure occurrence. FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining a limited period setting process; FIG. It is a flow chart explaining the look-ahead pattern system command processing. FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining look-ahead variation command processing; FIG. 10 is a flowchart for explaining limited period management processing; It is a figure explaining an example of the production|presentation using a standby alerting|reporting display. It is a figure explaining an example of the production|presentation using a standby alerting|reporting display. It is a figure explaining another example of the production|presentation using a standby alerting|reporting display. It is a figure explaining another example of the production|presentation using a standby alerting|reporting display. It is a figure explaining another example of the production|presentation using a standby alerting|reporting display. It is a figure explaining another example of the production|presentation using a standby alerting|reporting display. It is a figure explaining an example of the 1st specific production. It is a figure explaining an example of the 1st specific production. It is a figure explaining another example of the 1st specific production. It is a figure explaining another example of the 1st specific production. It is a figure explaining an example of the 2nd specific production. It is a figure explaining another example of the 2nd specific production. It is a figure explaining the display mode and change production of a decoration special figure starting memory display and a memory display during execution. It is a figure explaining an example of change production. It is a figure explaining an example of the table which selects the change of a decoration special figure starting memory display. FIG. 10 is a diagram illustrating an example of a table for selecting changes in the display of stored in-execution; It is a front view of the game board of the first modification. It is a figure explaining the 1st special figure fluctuation winning device of the 1st modification. It is a figure explaining the various probabilities of a 1st modification, and the opening mode of a special variable prize-winning device. It is a figure explaining the transition of the game state of a 1st modification. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of the game machine of a 1st modification. It is a flow chart explaining the special figure game processing of the first modification. FIG. 12 is a flowchart for explaining specific area switch monitoring processing of the first modified example; FIG. It is a flow chart explaining small hit residual sphere processing of the 1st modification. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device. It is a diagram for explaining a special figure variation display game on the collective display device and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device.

<First embodiment>
Preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described below with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to one embodiment of the present invention.

The gaming machine 10 of this embodiment includes a front frame 12, which is attached to an outer frame (support frame) 11 via hinges 13 so as to be openable and rotatable. A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a housing (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12 . In addition, the front frame (body frame)
12 includes a glass frame 15 having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30.
(transparent plate holding frame) is attached.

Further, on the upper part of the glass frame 15, a lighting device (moving light) 16 having a built-in lamp and a motor and a lamp (LED) 17 for announcing abnormal payout are provided. In addition, on the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, a frame decoration device 18 that incorporates a lamp or the like and emits light for decoration and presentation, and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a that emits sound (for example, sound effect) are provided. there is Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided on the lower portion of the front frame 12. As shown in FIG.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (
a storage tray), an upper tray ball outlet 22 through which game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the game machine 10 flow out, and game balls paid out when the upper tray 21 is full. A storage lower tray (receiving tray) 23, an operation section 24 of a ball shooting device, and the like are provided. Furthermore, the upper plate 21
A performance operating section 550 for receiving an operation input from the player is provided on the upper edge of the.
This production operation unit 550 is a production button 25 that incorporates a production button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player, and furthermore, the upper surface (pressing surface) of the production button 25
is provided with a touch panel 29 for receiving contact operation input from the player. A key 26 for opening or locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12 .
In this embodiment, the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25, but the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided near the effect button 25, A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

In addition, on the front surface of the glass frame 15 above the upper tray 21, there is a ball lending button 27 operated by the player when receiving a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a prepaid card for ejecting a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A discharge button 28 for direct operation, a balance display section (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation portion 24, the batted ball shooting device shoots the game ball supplied from the upper tray 21 toward the game area 32 on the front side of the game board 30. fire. Also, the player can
By operating 0, in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2), an effect or the like can be performed in which the player's operation is intervened.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of this embodiment.

A substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 is formed on the surface of the game board 30 . The game area 32 includes resin side cases 3 provided at the four corners of the game board 30.
3 and a guide rail 31. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect structure) 40 having a display device 41 is arranged substantially in the center. Display device 41
is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 40. - 特許庁That is, the center case 40 surrounds the display area of the display device 41 and protrudes forward from the display surface of the display device 41 to prevent game balls from jumping into the surrounding game area 32 .

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (cathode-ray tube). In the area where the image of the display screen can be displayed (display area), information related to the game such as multiple identification information (special symbols), characters that direct the special symbol fluctuation display game, and background images that enhance the performance effect are displayed. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game is performed. The display screen also displays images for effects based on the progress of the game (for example, a big win display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.).

Further, a board effect device 44 is provided in the upper right part of the center case 40 to effect a game effect by operating it. The board effect device 44 has two arms to which the sub-display device 42 is attached at the tip, and the sub-display device 42 is moved with respect to the display device 41 by rotating the arm around the base end. It is possible to convert between a state of overlapping in the front-rear direction and a state of not overlapping.
A board effect device 44 is also provided in front of the display device 41 in the center case 40 and near the lower end of the display area. This board effect device 44 can operate from a position near the lower end of the display area toward the center of the display area as indicated by the dotted line.
Further, a board decoration device 46 capable of producing effects by light emission is provided at a position in front of the display device 41 in the center case 40 and overlapping the left and right ends of the upper end of the display area.

On the lower right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is provided a normal pattern start gate (normal pattern start gate) 34 that provides a starting condition for the normal pattern fluctuation display game. A game ball that has won the normal figure starting gate 34 is detected by a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 6).
In addition, on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, three left-side general winning openings 35 are arranged, and on the lower right side of the center case 40 and below the normal figure start gate 34, one right side A general winning opening 35 is arranged. The game balls that have entered these general winning holes 35 are detected by a winning hole switch 35a (see FIG. 6).

The game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 can flow into the right general winning opening 35 provided below the normal pattern starting gate 34 . Only some of the game balls that have passed through the normal pattern start gate 34 are allowed to enter the normal pattern start gate 34 by a plurality of obstacle nails provided below the normal pattern start gate 34.
In addition, game balls that have not passed through the normal starting gate 34 are prevented from flowing into the right general winning port 35 provided below.

In addition, a first display section 621 capable of executing a first suggestion effect that suggests a probability set value is provided in front of the normal pattern starting gate 34 . The first suggestion effect can be executed based on the passage of the game ball to the normal pattern starting gate 34.例文帳に追加In addition, in front of the right general prize winning opening 35 located below the normal pattern start gate 34, there is a second display section 622 capable of executing a second suggestion effect suggesting the probability setting value.
is provided. The second suggestive effect can be executed based on the passage of the game ball to the general winning hole 35.例文帳に追加

In addition, on the left side of the normal figure start gate 34, there is provided a normal variation winning device 37 (start winning opening, starting winning area) that provides the conditions for starting the second special figure variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game). ing.
The normal variable winning device 37 includes a movable member 37b that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls to the right and can be converted into a state where game balls can easily flow in, and a partition wall 37d that regulates the inflow of game balls. ing. The movable member 37b normally stands up so that the distance from the partition wall 37d is less than the diameter of the game ball, that is, the closed state (disadvantageous state for the player) in which the game ball cannot enter. Then, when the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 6) as a driving device opens the game balls to easily flow into the normal fluctuation winning device 37. It can be changed to a state (a state advantageous to the player). The game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 is the starting port 2 switch 37
a (see FIG. 6).

Furthermore, below the normal variable winning device 37, there is a special variable winning device (large winning opening) 3 that can be converted between a state in which game balls are not accepted and a state in which it is easy to accept game balls depending on the result of the special variable display game.
8 are provided.
The special variable prize winning device 38 has an attacker type open/close door 38c that can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls to the front side. From the closed state (unfavorable blocked state for the player) to the open state (
state advantageous to the player). That is, the special variable winning device 38, for example,
Opening and closing door 38c driven by big winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 6) as a driving device
During the special game state, the closed state of the big winning hole is changed to the open state to facilitate the inflow of game balls into the big winning hole, allowing the player to enter a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given. In addition, inside the large winning opening (winning area), a large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 6) is arranged as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the big winning opening. . In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, two large winning opening switches 38a are provided, and a game ball that has flowed into the large winning opening is detected by any of the large winning opening switches 38a. By providing a plurality of the large winning opening switches 38a in this way, it is possible to quickly detect the game ball that has flowed into the large winning opening.

In addition, below the center case 40, there are a first start prize opening 36 (start prize opening, start prize area) and a second special prize that provide conditions for starting the first special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game). A winning device 90 having a second starting winning opening 97 (starting winning opening, starting winning area) that provides a condition for starting a variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) is provided.
The winning device 90 includes a distributing member 92 for alternately distributing the game balls flowing into the upper inlet 90a to the first starting winning port 36 and the second starting winning port 97 (see FIG. 3). first
A game ball that has entered the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 6), and a game ball that has entered the second starting winning opening 97 is detected by the starting opening 3 switch 97a (see FIG. 6). be done.
In addition, below the prize winning device 90, an out port 30a is provided for recovering game balls that did not win a prize such as a prize winning port.

3(a) to 3(c) are front views of the winning device 90 of the present embodiment, showing a state in which the front cover member is removed.
As shown in FIG. 3(a), the winning device 90 has a sorting member 92 at a position directly below the inlet 90a. Also, at the lower left of the distribution member 92 is the first start winning opening 3
6 is arranged, and a second start winning opening 97 is arranged at the lower right side of the distribution member 92 .
Furthermore, a front cover member is provided so as to cover the front side of the distribution member 92 , the first start winning opening 36 and the second starting winning opening 97 . This front cover member is transparent or translucent so that the behavior of the game balls in the winning device 90 can be visually recognized.

The distribution member 92 is rotatable about a shaft pin 92a extending in the front-rear direction, and has an upper arm portion 92b extending upward from the position where the shaft pin 92a is arranged and a left arm portion 92c extending leftward. and a right arm portion 92d extending rightward. To the left of the upper arm portion 92b of the three arms is a left holding portion 92 for temporarily holding a game ball by the upper arm portion 92b and the left arm portion 92c.
e is formed, and a right holding portion 92f is formed on the right side of the upper arm portion 92b to temporarily hold a game ball by the upper arm portion 92b and the right arm portion 92d.
The distribution member 92 has a position where the left holding part 92e can receive a game ball flowing into the inflow port 90a as shown in FIG. As shown in c), the right holding portion 92f is rotatable between a position at which the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 90a can be received.

As shown in FIG. 3(b), when the left holding portion 92e is at a position capable of receiving the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 90a, the right holding portion 92f directs the game ball toward the second starting winning hole 97. It will be in a state of flowing down.
Further, as shown in FIG. 3(c), when the right holding portion 92f is in a position capable of receiving the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 90a, the left holding portion 92e is directed toward the first starting winning port 36 to play the game. It will be in a state where the ball is flowing down.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3( a ), a distribution member side magnet 96 a is attached to the rear side of the upper arm portion 92 b of the distribution member 92 . In addition, of the base member 93 to which the distribution member 92 is attached from the front, a base member side magnet 96b is attached at a position facing the distribution member side magnet 96a when the upper arm 92b is vertical. there is The sorting member-side magnet 96a and the base member-side magnet 96b are attached so that the poles on the opposing sides are the same.
Due to the repulsive forces of 6a and 96b, the distributing member 92 is urged to rotate left or right without remaining in a state in which the upper arm 92b is vertical. As a result, when the distribution member 92 stops rotating, either the left holding portion 92e or the right holding portion 92f can always receive the game ball flowing into the inlet 90a.

As shown in FIGS. 3(b) and 3(c), the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 90a is held by the left holding portion 92e.
and one holding portion of the right holding portion 92f facing toward the inflow port 90a and ready to receive. When a game ball is held by one holding portion, the distribution member 92 rotates toward the one holding portion due to the weight of the game ball, and the distribution member 92 rotates for the game ball held. It flows down toward the first starting winning port 36 or the second starting winning port 97 in the direction.

That is, as shown in FIG. 3B, when the left holding portion 92e receives the game ball that has flowed in, the distribution member 92 rotates to the left due to the weight of the game ball, and the game ball is sent to the first start winning opening 36. After guiding
As shown in FIG. 3(c), the right holding portion 92f stops in a state where the next game ball can be received. Then, as shown in FIG. 3(c), when the right holding portion 92f receives the game ball that has flowed in, the distribution member 92 rotates to the right due to the weight of the game ball, and the game ball is sent to the second start winning opening 97. After guiding, Fig. 3 (b)
), the left holding portion 92e stops in a state capable of accepting the next game ball.

It is highly probable that the game balls that have flowed down from the holding portions 92e and 92f will flow into the first start winning port 36 or the second starting winning port 97, but they may not flow in, and if they do not flow in, the winning device 9
It flows out of 0. In particular, if the momentum when flowing into the holding portions 92e and 92f is strong, there is a high possibility that the liquid will not flow into the first start prize winning port 36 or the second start prize winning port 97. It should be noted that it may be constructed so as to always win a prize in one of the starting prize openings.

Further, by rotating the distribution member 92, the other holding portion, which is not the holding portion holding the game ball, faces the inflow port 90a and becomes ready to receive the game ball. Then, the game ball received next time is guided to the winning opening on the side of the other holding portion. As a result, the inflow port 9
The game balls flowing into 0a are alternately distributed to the first starting prize winning port 36 and the second starting winning prize port 97. - 特許庁

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the area to the left of the center case 40 in the game area 32 where game balls flow down is the left area, and the area to the right of the center case 40 is the right area. ing. Then, the player can aim to win a prize in the prize winning device 90 by adjusting the shooting momentum and shooting the game ball to the left game area (so-called left-handed shot), and shoots the game ball to the right-hand game area (so-called right shot). By hitting), the normal figure start gate 34 and the normal fluctuation winning device 37
, and a prize to the special variable prize winning device 38 can be aimed at.

In addition, outside the game area 32 (here, the lower right part of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game that constitute the special figure fluctuation display game, and the normal figure start gate 34 A collective display device 50 is provided for displaying a normal figure variation display game triggered by winning and various information.

Collective display device 50, for example, as shown in FIG. 4 (a), special figure 1 indicator for special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display unit) 51 (A0 to A7) and special figure 2 variation Special figure 2 display for display game (second special figure fluctuation display unit) 52 (B0 to B7) and special figure 1 reservation indicator 53 (C0, C1 ) and a special figure 2 holding indicator 54 (C2, C3) for notifying the start memory number of the special figure 2 variable display game.

In addition, the collective display device 50 includes a round display section 55 (D0 to D3) that displays the number of rounds at the time of the big hit (the number of opening and closing times of the special variable winning devices 38 and 39), and a game state that displays the game state of the gaming machine 10. and a display unit 56 (C6, C7, D7). This game state display section 56
, the first game state display unit 56a (C6) that informs the player of the advantageous hitting method (playing method corresponding to the game state) between left hitting (normal hitting) and right hitting, time saving state (variation time shortening) The second game state display portion 56b (C7) for notifying that the function is activated), and the third game state display portion for notifying that the jackpot probability state is a high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is turned on. 56c
(D7) is provided.
In addition, the collective display device 50 is a general figure display device 57 (D4 to D6) for the general figure fluctuation display game
, and a normal pattern holding indicator 58 (C4, C5) for notifying the start memory number of the normal pattern fluctuation display game.

The special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display device 51 is the execution time of the special figure 1 variation display game (
During the fluctuation time), for example, as shown in FIG.
ED lamps A0, A2, A4, A6 are lit (LED lamps A1, A3, A5, A
7 is in the off state) and the state in which the LED lamps A1, A3, A5, and A7 are lit (the LED lamp A
0, A2, A4, and A6 are extinguished) alternately to indicate that it is changing. The switching cycle is set to 60 ms, for example. Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts, when the result of the game is "losing", the result mode of losing (for example, LED lamp A0 is turned on and LED lamp A1 ~A7 are turned off), and when the result of the game is "win", the winning result mode (special result mode) is a result mode other than the losing result mode (for example, at least one of the LED lamps A0 to A7 The game result is displayed in a mode in which three are lit. In addition, the special figure 1 indicator 51 may be configured by a 7-segment type indicator.

The special figure variation display game in the special figure 2 display device 52 is the execution time of the special figure 2 variation display game (
During the fluctuation time), for example, as shown in FIG.
ED lamps B0, B2, B4 and B6 are lit (LED lamps B1, B3, B5 and B
7 is in the off state) and the state in which the LED lamps B1, B3, B5, and B7 are lit (the LED lamp B
0, B2, B4, and B6 are extinguished) alternately to indicate that the current is fluctuating. The switching cycle is set to 60 ms, for example. Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts, if the result of the game is "losing", the result mode of losing (for example, LED lamp B0 is lit and LED lamp B1 to B7 are turned off), and when the result of the game is "win", the winning result mode (special result mode) is a result mode other than the losing result mode (for example, at least one of the LED lamps B0 to B7). The game results are displayed in a mode in which three are lit. In addition, the special figure 2 indicator 52 may be composed of a 7-segment type indicator.

The special figure 1 pending indicator 53 is the first start winning opening 36 which is the condition for starting the fluctuation of the special figure 1 indicator 51
The number of undigested balls out of the number of winning balls (number of starting memories = number of reservations), for example, as shown in FIG. indicate. The blink period is set to 128 ms, for example.
The special figure 2 holding indicator 54 is the second start winning opening 97 that is the condition for starting the fluctuation of the special figure 2 indicator 52
, of the number of winning balls to the normal variable winning device 37, the number of undigested balls (the number of starting memories = the number of reservations), for example, as shown in FIG. off, on,
Displayed by blinking. The blink period is set to 128 ms, for example.

When the round display unit 55 is not in the special game state, all the LEDs (LED lamp D
0 to D3) are turned off, and during the special game state, LEDs are turned on corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the result, as shown in FIG. The round display section 55 may be configured with a 7-segment type display.

For example, as shown in FIG. 4(f), the first game state display unit 56a turns off the LED when the game state is such that left-handed hitting is more advantageous for the player than right-handed hitting (during normal hitting). When the game state is such that right-handed hitting is more advantageous for the player than left-handed hitting (during right-handed hitting), the LED is turned on.
For example, as shown in FIG. 4(f), the second game state display unit 56b turns the LED on when it is in the time saving state, and turns the LED off when it is not in the time saving state.
For example, as shown in FIG. 4(f), the third game state display unit 56c turns on the LED when the power is turned on in the high probability state, and turns off the LED when it is not in the high probability state.

The general pattern fluctuation display game on the general pattern display device 57 is, during the fluctuation display of the general pattern fluctuation display game,
For example, as shown in FIG. 4(g), by alternately changing the pattern number for variation, alternately switching between a mode in which the LED lamp D5 is lit and a mode in which the LED lamps D4 and D6 are lit. Display that it is changing. The switching cycle is set to 60 ms, for example.
If the result is "hit", one of the plurality of LEDs (for example, the LED lamp D4) is turned on to indicate the hit, and if the result is "miss", a plurality of LEs
Any one of D (for example, LED lamps D5 and D6) is turned on to indicate that it is out of order.
The general pattern holding display 58 indicates the number of undigested balls (normal pattern starting memory number = number of reservations) among the number of passing balls of the normal pattern starting gate 34, which is the condition for starting the fluctuation of the general pattern display 57. For example, FIG. As shown in (h), a plurality of LEDs (LED lamps C4 and C5) are displayed by extinguishing, lighting, and blinking.

FIG. 5 shows the details of the effect operation unit 550. As shown in FIG.
FIG. 5(a) is a plan view of the effect operation unit 550. FIG. The effect operation unit 550 of the present embodiment is
As shown in FIG. 5( a ), it is composed of a production button (push button) 25 and a touch panel 29 provided on the upper surface of the production button (push button) 25 . That is, the effect operation unit 550 has a touch sensor function (touch panel function) in addition to the physical push button function.

Then, from the production control board (production control device) 300 to the production operation unit 550, sensitivity setting data, LED brightness data, etc. are transmitted, and from the production operation unit 550 to the production control board (production control device) 300, production buttons A push button signal (press detection signal) from the effect button switch (push sensor) 25a provided in the (push button) 25 and a touch ON/OFF signal (contact/non-contact detection signal) from the touch sensor 29a provided in the touch panel 29 are output. configured to be

In the case of this embodiment, the production button switch (
Push sensor) 25a presses the upper surface of the production operation unit 550 (production operation unit 55
0 to push down the effect operation unit 550) is detected. In addition, the production operation unit 5
A plurality of points are provided on the upper surface of 50 , and a touch sensor included in touch panel 29 detects a contact operation with respect to the points provided on the upper surface of effect operation unit 550 .

Specifically, as shown in FIG. 5B, as a plurality of points, "TSW1" to "TSW
Nine points, a W8” point and a “Pa” point, are provided. More specifically, the “TSW4” point provided in the center of the upper surface of the effect operation unit 550 and the “TSW4” point
A "TSW1" point provided on the left side of the "TSW4" point, a "TSW3" point provided on the far side (game board 30 side) of the "TSW4" point, and a "TSW3" point provided on the right side of the "TSW4" point. The TSW6 point, the TSW8 point provided on the nearer side (player side) than the TSW4 point, the TSW2 point provided between the TSW1 point and the TSW3 point, "TSW5" point provided between "TSW3" point and "TSW6" point, "TSW6" point and "TSW8"
"TSW7" point provided between points, "TSW8" point and "TSW
A "Pa" point provided between the "1" point and the "Pa" point are provided. Note that the number of points is not limited to nine, and can be changed arbitrarily. Moreover, FIG.
), for convenience, points “TSW1” to “TSW8” are assigned “TSW1” to “
TSW8” is written, but the effect operation unit 550 of the present embodiment does not have such a notation, as shown in FIG. 5(a).

The point at which the touch operation can be detected by the touch sensor of the touch panel 29 is "TSW
1” to “TSW8” points, and no contact operation is detected at the “Pa” point. Of course, the contact operation may also be detected at the "Pa" point. Also, at each of the nine points "TSW1" to "TSW8" and "Pa", an independent system of LEDs (in this embodiment, full-color LEDs) is arranged.

The "Pa" point can be obtained, for example, by using the "Pa" point LED as a notification lamp for a one-shot announcement, or by sequentially lighting the LEDs of each point on the upper surface of the effect operation unit 550 like a roulette. LEDs can be used for certain effects, such as using the "Accuracy (or probability variable confirmation)" point, and using the "Pa" point LED for predictive accuracy effects.

Here, an LED (specifically, “TSW1”) for lighting the upper surface of the effect operation unit 550
The lighting brightness of the LEDs arranged at the "TSW8" point, the "Pa" point, etc.) is excluded from brightness adjustment (both hall setting and player adjustment). That is, the L
The lighting luminance of the ED is constant without being affected by the luminance adjustment. In addition, the touch sensor has a function to forcibly turn off the touch when the touch ON state (contact state) continues for a predetermined time (for example, about 35 seconds (basic setting)). signal output function). That is, the touch sensor (touch detection IC) is configured so as not to be able to detect continuous contact operations for a predetermined period of time or longer.

The player's operation detected by the effect operation unit 550 includes, for example, the operation shown in FIG. 5(c). A "single hit" is an operation of pressing the effect operation unit 550 once, and a "continuous hit" is an operation of pressing the effect operation unit 550 a plurality of times within a predetermined time interval. A “long press” is an operation of holding down the effect operation unit 550 for a predetermined time or longer, and a “touch” is an operation of touching the touch panel 29 . ""Pa" operation (TSW1 or 8) + long press"
Pa” point or two adjacent points, “TSW1” point and “TSW8” point
“Flick” is an operation of sliding the touch panel 29 while touching the touch panel 29 while touching one (or both) of the two points. Of course, the operations to be detected are not limited to these operations.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game ball (
A game is played by hitting a pachinko ball). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged in various places in the game area 32, and enters a normal figure start gate 34 and a general winning opening 35. , 1st start winning port 36
, second start winning port 97, ordinary variable winning device 37 or special variable winning device 38,
It flows into an out port 30 a provided at the bottom of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32 . Then, when the game ball wins the general winning port 35, the first starting winning port 36, the second starting winning port 97, the normal variable winning device 37 or the special variable winning device 38, the number corresponding to the type of the winning winning port Prize balls are discharged to the upper tray 21 or the lower tray 23 of the glass frame 15 from a payout unit controlled by a payout control device 200 (see FIG. 6).

On the other hand, in the normal pattern starting gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 6) consisting of a non-contact switch or the like for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal pattern starting gate 34 is provided. When the game ball hit into the area 32 passes through the normal pattern starting gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a and the normal pattern variation display game is performed. In addition, a state in which the normal pattern fluctuation display game cannot be started, for example, a state in which the normal pattern fluctuation display game has already been played and the normal pattern fluctuation display game has not been completed, or a normal fluctuation prize winning device when the normal pattern fluctuation display game wins 37 is converted to the open state, when the game ball passes through the normal pattern start gate 34, if it is less than the upper limit number (for example, 4) of the normal pattern start memory number, the normal pattern start memory number is added ( +1) and one general pattern starting memory is stored. The number of memory of this normal figure start winning prize is displayed on the normal figure reservation indicator 58 of the collective display device 50 . In addition, the normal pattern start memory stores a hit determination random value (hit random value) for determining the result of the normal pattern variation display game. to determine the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game. When the hit determination random number matches the determination value, the normal pattern variation display game becomes a hit and a specific result mode (normal pattern specific result) is derived.

The general figure variation display game is provided in the collective display device 50 and is displayed by the variation display unit (universal figure display device) 52 composed of LEDs, and the lighting mode and lighting color of this LED are normal. Makes identification information (normal pattern, normal pattern). In addition, the normal figure display 52 is configured with a display device,
For example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc. may be used as normal identification information, and may be configured to be displayed in a variable manner for a predetermined period of time and then stopped to display the results. If the stop display of this normal pattern fluctuation display game results in a normal pattern identification result, it becomes a hit in the normal pattern, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37
The movable member 37b is opened for a predetermined time. As a result, the normal variable winning device 3
A game ball is easily entered into the second start winning hole inside 7, and the number of times the second special figure variation display game is executed increases.

The winning ball to the first starting winning port 36, the winning ball to the second starting winning port 97, and the winning ball to the normal variable winning device 37 are respectively provided inside the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 3 It is detected by the switch 97a and the start port 2 switch 37a. The game ball that has won the first start prize opening 36 is detected as the start prize ball of the first special figure variation display game, and is stored as the first start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4), A game ball that has won the second start winning port 97 or the normal variable winning device 37 is detected as a starting winning ball of the second special figure variable display game, and is limited to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4) as a second start memory. stored in again,
When the start winning ball is detected, a jackpot random number value, a jackpot pattern random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted as starting memory information, respectively, and the extracted random number value is stored in the game control device 100 (
See FIG. 6) in the special figure storage area (a part of the RAM) as a special figure start memory each predetermined number of times (for example, up to 4 times) is stored to the limit. And, the number of memories of this special figure start memory is displayed on the storage display unit (special figure 1 reservation indicator 53, special figure 2 reservation indicator 54) for notifying the number of starting winnings of the collective display device 50, and the center The display device 41 of the case 40 is also displayed as a decoration special figure start memory display.

The game control device 100, based on the first start winning port 36, the second starting winning port 97, or the winning to the normal variable winning device 37, or their starting memory, the special figure 1 indicator 51a (fluctuation display device) Alternatively, the first or second special figure variation display game is performed with the special figure 2 display device 51b (variation display device). The first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game include a plurality of special symbols (special symbols,
identification information) is variably displayed, and then a predetermined result mode is stopped. again,
A display device (image display device) 41 executes a decorative special figure variation display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) are variably displayed. And, as a result of the special figure fluctuation display game, special figure 1 indicator 51a or special figure 2 indicator 51
When the display mode of b becomes a special result mode (special result), it becomes a big win and enters a special game state (so-called big win state). Also, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 corresponding to this is also the special result mode.

The decoration special symbol variation display game in the display device 41 is, for example, the decoration special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-described numbers etc. in the display device 41 is displayed in the left variation display area (first special symbol),
In each of the right variation display area (second special symbol) and the middle variation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is variably displayed (high-speed variation) at a speed at which identification is difficult. After a predetermined time, the changing patterns are sequentially stopped in the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area, and stopped in each of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area. It is performed by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result mode configured by the displayed identification information. In addition, the display device 41 performs a variable display game with decorative special symbols corresponding to the number of special symbol starting memories, and various effects such as the appearance of characters are performed to improve interest.

It should be noted that the special figure 1 indicator 51a and the special figure 2 indicator 51b may be separate indicators or the same indicator, but each independently and simultaneously each special figure fluctuation display A game is displayed. Also, the display device 41 may use separate display devices and separate display areas for the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game, or the same display device and display area may be used. However, the decorative special figure variation display games are displayed independently and not simultaneously. Also, the game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display device 51a and the special figure 2 display device 51b, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41.

In addition, in a state where the first special figure variation display game (second special figure variation display game) can be started and the number of starting memories is 0, the first start winning opening 36 (or the second starting winning opening 97 or normal variable winning device 37), the starting memory is stored with the generation of the starting right, the number of starting memories is incremented by 1, and immediately based on the starting memory, the first special A figure variation display game (second special figure variation display game) is started, and 1 is subtracted from the starting memory number at this time.
On the other hand, the state where the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) cannot be started immediately,
For example, if the first or second special figure variation display game has already been played and the special figure variation display game has not ended, or if it is in a special game state, the first start winning opening 36 (or When a game ball wins in the second starting winning port 97 or the normal variable winning device 37), if the starting memory number is less than the upper limit number, 1 is added to the starting memory number and one starting memory is stored. Then, in a state where the starting memory number is 1 or more, the state in which the first special figure fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) can be started (the end of the previous special figure fluctuation display game or the special game state end), the number of starting memories is decremented by 1, and the first
A special figure variation display game (second special figure variation display game) is started. In the following description, when the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as special figure variation display games.

In addition, although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36 in the first starting winning port 36
a, starting port 3 switch 97a in the second starting winning port 97, starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, gate switch 34a, winning port switch 35a, big winning port switch 3
8a uses a non-contact type magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) that detects a game ball by utilizing a phenomenon in which a magnetic field changes when a metal object approaches the coil and has a magnetic detection coil. ing. Further, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 and the main body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 or the like of the game machine 10 are microswitches having mechanical contacts. can be used.

FIG. 6 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for overall control of the game. an input unit 120 having an input port; an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver; and a data bus 140 connecting between the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120 and the output unit .

The CPU unit 110 is a gaming microcomputer called an amusement chip (IC).
CPU) 111, an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 that generates an operation clock for the CPU, a timer interrupt, a reference clock for a random number generation circuit, and the like. DC32V, DC12V, D
A DC voltage of a predetermined level, such as C5V, is supplied to enable operation.

The power supply device 400 is an AC-power supply that generates the DC 32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power supply.
A normal power supply unit 410 having a DC converter and a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V, DC5V from the voltage of DC32V, and the RAM inside the game microcomputer 111 When power failure, the power supply voltage is supplied. Backup power supply unit 420 to supply
And, it has a power failure monitoring circuit, and includes a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal that inform the game control device 100 of power failure occurrence and recovery.

In this embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, the main It may be configured to be provided on the substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply section 420 and the control signal generation section 430 are installed on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the present embodiment. By providing the , it is possible to remove it from the object of replacement and to reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be composed of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is the game microcomputer 11 of the game control device 100
1 (especially built-in RAM), and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power outage or after the power is cut off. In other words, the game control device 100 serves as backup storage means capable of retaining stored data even when the power is cut off. When the power is restored, the control can be restarted based on the data held by the backup storage means. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, and detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17 V, for example, and changes the power failure monitoring signal. to output Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, the reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time. The power outage monitoring signal is read repeatedly in the main loop of the main program executed by the game microcomputer 111 . A reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

The game microcomputer 111 has a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A.
, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B and an RA that can be read and written at any time
M (random access memory) 111C.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores immutable information (programs, fixed data, judgment values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C is a work area for the CPU 111A during game control and a storage area for various signals and random values. used as ROM 111B or RAM 11
As 1C, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the effect content, the presence or absence of the ready-to-win state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the starting memory to determine the fluctuation pattern. The variation pattern table includes a winning variation pattern table selected when the result is a win, a big hit variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables for determining the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state Tables for determining the first half variation pattern (first half variation group table, first half variation pattern selection table, etc.) are included.

Here, reach (reach state) means having a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. A game state (special game state) in which the game state is advantageous to the player when the special result mode is reached.
In the gaming machine 10, at a stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed
A display state in which a display result that has already been derived and displayed satisfies the conditions for becoming a special result mode. In other words, the ready-to-reach state means that even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, the display conditions for the special result mode are not met. It refers to a display mode that does not exist. And, for example, a state in which variable display is performed using a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are uniform (so-called all-rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. In addition, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It means a display state when at least some of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas that are present satisfy the conditions for the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes the plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After displaying, if the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the condition for the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas satisfy the condition for the special result mode (for example, the same A state that has become identification information,
However, excluding the special result mode) may be set as the ready-to-win state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from this ready-to-win state.

This ready-to-reach state includes a plurality of ready-to-reach effects, and as ready-to-reach effects with different possibilities of deriving special result modes (different expected values), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 Reach (SP2 Reach), Special 3
Reach (SP3 Reach) and Premier Reach are set. The expected value is no reach < normal reach < special 1 reach < special 2 reach < special 3 reach <
It becomes higher in order of premier reach. Further, this ready-to-win state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is lost). Therefore, the state in which the ready-to-win state occurs is a state with a higher possibility of winning a big hit than the case in which the ready-to-win state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, or to generate and output drive signals for solenoids and display devices, and output them to the game machine. 10 overall control. In addition, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates a jackpot random number for determining a hit in the special figure variation display game, a jackpot pattern random number for determining the jackpot pattern, and a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (
Random number generation for generating a variation pattern random number for determining the variable display game execution time etc. in various reach and variable display without reach, hit random numbers for determining the hit of the normal figure variation display game circuit, and a clock generator for generating a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) for the CPU 111A based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock for giving update timing to the random number generation circuit. ing.

In addition, the CPU 111A uses the ROM 111B in processing related to the special figure variation display game.
Any one variation pattern table is acquired from among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the . Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (hit (
(jackpot or small hit) or loss), the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current game state (normal probability state or high probability state), the operating state of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 as the current game state (time saving Based on the operating state), the number of starting memories, etc., any one variation pattern table is selected and acquired from among a plurality of variation pattern tables. where CPU
111A constitutes variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table from a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in ROM 111B when executing a special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor of the payout unit according to a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to release the prize balls. Perform control for paying out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball rental request signal from the card unit, and performs control for paying out the rental balls.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 includes a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the first starting winning port 36, and a normal variable winning device 37.
Inside the starting port 2 switch 37a, the starting port 3 switch 97a in the second starting winning port 97, the gate switch 34a in the normal starting gate 34, the winning port switch 35a, the special variable winning device 38
, and the high level supplied from these switches is 1.
An interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 is provided that receives a negative logic signal such as 1V and a low level of 7V and converts it into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. Proximity I/F12
1, by setting the input range to 7V-11V, the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch was improperly shorted, the sensor or switch was disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire was cut and left floating. Such an abnormal state can be detected, and an abnormality detection signal is output.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . In addition, the proximity I/F1
21, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the starting port 3 switch 97a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a and the big winning port switch 38a are input to the second input port 123. be. Also, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121,
A detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 and an abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or switch is detected are input to the third input port 124 .

Further, the third input port 124 receives the detection signal of the fraud detection magnetic sensor 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the game machine 10 or the like, or the glass frame open detection signal provided on the glass frame 15 of the game machine 10 or the like. A detection signal from the switch 63 and a detection signal from a body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 of the game machine 10 are also inputted. A vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the game machine so that the detection signal is input to the third input port 124 .

Further, the third input port 124 is provided with a set value change detecting means for detecting an operation in the operation unit for selecting from a plurality of set probability values to which a probability value for a special result in the special figure variation display game is assigned. Signals from the switch 151 and the setting key switch 152 are input.

The setting key switch 152 detects the operation of the setting key operating section forming the first operating section of the operating sections. The setting key operating section has a keyhole into which a setting key is inserted, and is configured such that the setting key can be turned from the first position to the second position only when the corresponding setting key is inserted. The setting key switch 152 is a sensor capable of detecting that it has been turned to the second position, and is turned on when it is turned to the second position.
It is turned off when it is not turned to the position.

The set value change switch 151 detects operation of a set value change button forming a second operation section of the operation section. The set value change button is a push button, and the set value change switch 151 is turned on when the set value change button is pressed.
When it is not pressed, it is turned off.

By operating these operation units, it is possible to select a probability setting value to which a special result probability value is assigned in the special figure fluctuation display game, and the probability value corresponding to the selected probability setting value is in the game. It's meant to be used. Here, three settings 1 to 3 are prepared as probability setting values. The probability value assigned to each probability setting value is 1/320 for setting 1, 1/300 for setting 2, and 1/280 for setting 3. This probability value is the probability value in the normal probability state, and the probability value in the high probability state is ten times the probability value in the normal probability state.

When selecting the probability set value, first, the front frame 12 is opened, and the power of the gaming machine is turned on with the setting key of the setting key operation section turned to the second position, thereby setting the probability set value. can be changed, and by pressing a set value change button in this probability set value change state, the probability set value can be changed. The selected probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153 .

In addition, when the power is turned on with the setting key of the setting key operation unit turned to the second position with the front frame 12 closed, or when the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned on after the game machine is turned on, the setting key of the setting key operation unit is turned on. When it is turned to the second position, the currently selected probability setting value is displayed on the probability setting value display device 153.
is displayed, but the probability setting value confirmation mode is set in which the probability setting value cannot be changed.

The probability setting value display device 153 is a 7-segment display, and the probability setting values are from 1 to
It is designed to be displayed with 6 numbers. Of course, the display mode is not limited to this, and any display mode may be used as long as the probability setting value can be recognized. Further, a display device of another type such as a liquid crystal display device may be used, or a set probability value may be indicated by the lighting mode or emission color of one or a plurality of LEDs. Alternatively, the probability setting value display device 153 may not be provided, and the probability setting value information may be displayed using the state display device 160 for displaying the calculated base value and character ratio.
In this case, while operating the probability setting value (probability setting value change state, probability setting value confirmation mode, etc.), the information of the probability setting value is displayed, otherwise the calculated base value and role ratio Give priority to display.

In addition, in this embodiment, the set value change button, the set key operation unit, and the probability set value display device 15
3 etc. are provided in the game control device 100, and the game control device 100 selects a probability set value to which a probability value used for a lottery of a special figure variation display game is assigned from a plurality of types of probability set values by operating the operation unit. It is intended to constitute a setting means to enable. The function of this setting means may be provided in the setting sub-board and connected to the game control device 100 . That is, the setting means may be provided separately from the game control device 100 . In this case, the operation signal of the setting value change switch 151 or the setting key switch 152 may be input to the game control device 100 to change the probability setting value in the game control device 100, or the setting sub board side change and determine the probability set value based on the operation of the set value change switch 151 or the setting key switch 152;
A determination result may be transmitted to the game control device 100 .

In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is
0 to a test-firing test apparatus (not shown) through a relay board 70. FIG.
Furthermore, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37
The detection signal a is configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123 .

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage of 5 V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It's becoming

The data held by the second input port 123 is processed by the enable signal CE when the game microcomputer 111 decodes the address assigned to the second input port 123.
It can be read by asserting 2 (changed to valid level). The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

The input unit 120 also receives a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payout control device 200 is ready to accept commands), abnormal payout status signal (status signal indicating abnormal payout), shoot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower tray 23 (filled)), touch switch signal (input of the touch switch provided in the operation unit 24 based signal), and an out-ball detection switch signal (a signal based on the detection of the out-switch for detecting all the game balls that have been shot into the game area 32 and have finished playing), and through the data bus 140, the game microcomputer 111 A first input port 122 is provided that feeds into the .

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like. It has the function of removing noise from
A power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 is once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving signals from the outside provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is
It is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and supplied to each port of the output section 130 . In addition, by outputting the reset signal RESET directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, the test-firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test-firing test apparatus is turned off. is configured as Also, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test-firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 . The reset signal RESET is applied to each port 122, 123,
124. The data set in each port of the output section 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input must be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the game microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200 . Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is made into the one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal to the game control apparatus 100 from the production control apparatus 300 side.

Furthermore, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a trial firing test device of a certification organization (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the big hit, etc. via the relay board 70. A buffer 133 for output is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in amusement arcades. A detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a starting switch, output from the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133 .

On the other hand, detection signals such as those from the magnetic sensor 61 and board radio wave sensor 62, which cannot be directly supplied to the test firing test device, are temporarily taken into the game microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, by the game machine controlling the game. An error signal indicating that it is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 to the test-firing apparatus. The relay board 70 is provided with a port for taking in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector for relaying the signal line of the detection signal of the switch without the buffer, and the like. ing. The game microcomputer 11 is connected to the port on the relay board 70.
A chip enable signal CE output from 1 is also supplied, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test-firing apparatus.

The output unit 130 also includes a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid) 38b connected to the data bus 140 for opening the special variable winning device 38, and a movable member 37 of the normal variable winning device 37.
A second solenoid for outputting opening/closing data of the solenoid (universal solenoid) 37c that opens the solenoid b.
An output port 134 is provided. Also, the second output port 134 outputs the display data of the state display device 160 for displaying the calculated base value and character product ratio.

The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON/OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminals of the LEDs are connected in accordance with the content to be displayed on the collective display device 50 , and the collective display device 50 . ON/ON of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected
A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting OFF data.

Also, the output unit 130 outputs information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 7 .
A fifth output port 137 is provided for outputting to 1. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photorelay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in the game arcade, and information about the game machine 10 is transmitted. It can be supplied to an external device. Also, a firing permission signal is output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132 . Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a sixth output port 170 for outputting display data of the probability setting value display device 153 that displays the selected probability setting value.

Further, the output section 130 is provided with a first driver (driving circuit) 138a that receives open/close data signals of the big winning opening solenoid 38b and the general electric solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. , a second driver 1 for outputting ON/OFF drive signals for the segment lines on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135
38b, a third driver 138c for outputting an ON/OFF drive signal for the digit line on the current drawing side of the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136, and supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device. A fourth driver 138d for outputting the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71, and a fifth driver 138e for receiving the display data output from the second output port 134 and displaying it on the status display device 160 are provided. .

DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so as to drive a solenoid operating at 32V. Also, the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50 is supplied with DC 12V. The third driver 138c, which drives the digit lines, draws current from the digit lines according to display data, so the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A second driver 138b that outputs 12 V supplies a current to the anode terminal of the LED through a segment line, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws current from the cathode terminal through the segment line. A power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in , and the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC 12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, etc. may be provided on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, that is, not on the main board but on the relay board 70 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as the identification code and program of each game machine to the external inspection device 500 . photocoupler 13
9 is configured to allow two-way communication so that the game microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 500 by serial communication. It should be noted that since the transmission and reception of such data is performed using a serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
The effect control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC
), and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for video display on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , a sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sounds for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.
It has

The main control microcomputer 311 includes a program ROM 321 consisting of a PROM (programmable read only memory) that stores programs executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and a memory content that can be restored even if power is not supplied at the time of a power failure. An FeRAM 323 capable of holding data and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338 forming a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM that provides a working area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311 . A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 . The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the content of the effect, instructs the content of the output video to the VDP 312, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce sound, lights the decorative lamp, and controls the motor. , solenoid drive control, performance time management, etc.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a working area, and a scaler 312b that enlarges and reduces images. The VDP 312 also includes an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 are connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in parallel. Sending and receiving data in parallel allows commands and data to be sent in a shorter time than in serial mode.

From VDP 312 to main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronizing signal VSYN for synchronizing the image of display device 41 with lighting of decoration lamps provided on glass frame 15 and game board 30 is transmitted.
C. Synchronization signal STS that provides data transmission timing is input. Note that VDP312
to the main control microcomputer 311. Interrupt signals INT0 to n to inform the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM, and a wait to inform that it is waiting for reception of commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 A signal WAIT or the like is also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, a horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313 , and the video generated by the VDP 312 is sent to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313 . Is displayed.

An audio ROM 327 storing audio data is connected to the tone generator LSI 314 . The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340 . Also, an interrupt signal INT is sent from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311 .
is entered. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12 . The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b through the amplifier circuit 337. FIG.

Also, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 for receiving commands transmitted from the game control device 100 . Via this command I / F 331, the decoration special figure pending number command, the decoration special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 are transmitted to the production control command signal (production command ). Game microcomputer 111 of game control device 100
operates at DC5V, and since the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

In addition, the effect control device 300 includes decorative LEDs provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), a first display unit 621 and a second display unit 622 for executing a suggestive effect of the set probability value. A board decoration LED control circuit 332 is provided for driving and controlling the board decoration device 46 such as the above. In addition, a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18, etc.) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 15, and a game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided for driving and controlling the board effect device 44 (for example, a movable accessory or the like that enhances the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41) provided in the display device 41 . These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340 . In addition, the glass frame 15 is provided with a frame effect device having a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect), and is provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. Also good.

Furthermore, the effect control device 300 includes a effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 29 provided on the glass frame 15, an initial position of the motor in the board effect device 44, etc. A function of detecting the on / off state of the production accessory switch 47 (production motor switch) that detects and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311,
A switch input circuit 336 is provided for detecting the state of a volume control switch 335 provided in the performance control device 300 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 .

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 is the production control device 300 having the configuration as described above.
32 VDC for driving motors and solenoids, 12 VDC for driving motors and LEDs, 32 VDC for driving motors and solenoids, and 12 VDC for driving motors and LEDs. DC5, which is the power supply voltage of the command I/F 331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a voltage of DC 15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers. Furthermore, 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer 311
3.3V DC based on 5V DC
The effect control device 300 is provided with a DC-DC converter for generating DC 1.2V. Note that the DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply section 410 .

The reset signal generated by the control signal generator 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. Also, VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), tone generator LSI 314
, an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving a speaker, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling lamps, motors, etc., to reset them. In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a cooling FA for cooling various parts of the game machine 10
N45 is connected, and cooling FAN45 drives in the state where the power supply of production control device 300 was turned on.

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described.
In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the normal figure start gate 3
Based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in 4, the random number for the hit judgment of the normal pattern is extracted and compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B, and the normal pattern fluctuation display game is displayed. A process of judging hit or miss is performed. Then, after the identification pattern (identification information) is variably displayed on the general pattern display device 52 for a predetermined period of time, a process of displaying the general pattern variation display game to be stopped and displayed is performed. When the result of this normal pattern variation display game is a hit, the normal pattern display device 52 displays a special result mode corresponding to each of the first to third hit stop symbols, and the general electric solenoid 37c is turned on. The movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 is operated for a predetermined time (for example, 0
. 5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) to control opening as described above. That is, the game control device 1
00 constitutes conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). note that,
When the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is a loss, the normal pattern display 52 is controlled to display the result mode of the loss.

In addition, based on the input of the game ball detection signal from the starting port 1 switch 36a provided in the first starting winning port 36, the starting winning prize (starting memory) is stored, and based on this starting memory, the first special figure fluctuation display A random number value for judging a big hit of the game is extracted and compared with the judging value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of judging the hit/missing of the first special figure variation display game is performed. In addition, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variable winning device 37 and the starting port 3 switch 97a provided in the second starting winning port 97, the start memory is stored, Based on the starting memory, a random number value for judging the big hit of the second special figure fluctuation display game is extracted, compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B, and the process of judging the hit or miss of the second special figure fluctuation display game is performed. .

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs to the effect control device 300 a control signal (production control command) including the determination results of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game. Then, after the identification pattern (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display device 51a and the special figure 2 display device 51b, processing for displaying the special figure variation display game to be stopped and displayed is performed. That is, the game control device 100 performs the variable display game based on the winning of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 to the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 97, normal variable winning opening 37). It constitutes game control means for performing progress control.

Also, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 performs processing for displaying a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game.
Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the setting of the production state, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the processing of controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. In other words, the effect control device 300 serves as effect control means for controlling effects related to games (such as variable display games).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays a special result mode on the special figure 1 display device 51a and the special figure 2 display device 51b, and generates a special game state. process to cause In the process of generating a special game state, C
The PU 111A, for example, opens the opening/closing door 38c of the special variable winning device 38 by the large winning opening solenoid 38b, and performs control to enable the inflow of game balls into the large winning opening. Then, until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls enter the big winning opening or a predetermined openable time elapses after the opening of the big winning opening is achieved. 1 to release
Control (cycle game) is performed to continue (repeate) this for a predetermined number of rounds. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening/closing control means for controlling opening and closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is lost, the special figure 1 display device 51a and the special figure 2 display device 51b are controlled to display the result mode of the loss.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. This high-probability state is a state in which the probability of winning results in the special figure variation display game is higher than in the normal probability state (low-probability state). In addition, even if the high probability state is reached based on the result mode of either the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game, the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

In addition, the game control device 100, based on the result mode of the special figure fluctuation display game, after the end of the special game state, as a game state time saving state (also referred to as a specific game state, general figure high probability state, general electric support state) It can occur. In this time-saving state, the probability of winning the normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern per probability) is set to a high probability (normal pattern high probability state) higher than 0, which is the normal probability (normal pattern low probability state). It is possible. As a result, the normal variable winning device 37
is controlled so that the opening time of the normal variable winning device 37 per unit time is longer than in the normal low probability state.

In addition, the execution time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, the normal pattern stop time, the number of times the normal pattern is opened, and the normal pattern open time are set appropriately so as to control the normal pattern fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 to the time saving operation state. For example, in the time saving state, the execution time of the above-mentioned normal figure fluctuation display game (
Normal figure fluctuation time) can be controlled to be a second fluctuation display time shorter than the first fluctuation display time (for example, 10000 ms is 1000 ms). In addition, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the normal pattern stop time for displaying the results of the normal pattern fluctuation display game to be a second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 ms 704 ms). In addition, in the time saving state, the normal fluctuation display game results in a winning result, and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37
is opened, it is possible to control the opening time (general electric open time) to be a second open time longer than the first open time in the normal state (universal low probability state) (for example , 100
m seconds is 1352 ms). In addition, in the time saving state, the number of openings of the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 (the number of openings of the general electric power) is greater than the first number of openings (for example, 2 times) for one winning result of the normal figure fluctuation display game. It is possible to set a second opening number of times (eg, four times).
In addition, in the time-saving state, the probability that the normal pattern fluctuation display game will result in a hit (probability per normal pattern)
can be set to a high probability (ordinary pattern high probability state, eg, 250/251) higher than the normal probability (ordinary pattern low probability state, eg, 0/251) in the normal operation state.

In the time saving state, by changing one or more of the normal pattern fluctuation time, the normal pattern stop time, the normal pattern opening number of times, the normal pattern opening time, and the normal pattern per probability, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened. Makes the time to change state longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time-saving states with different things to be changed. In addition, it is also possible to select either the first opening mode or the second opening mode when the win is achieved. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Also, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently of each other, both can be generated at the same time, or only one of them can be generated.

The control of the gaming machine that performs such games will be described below. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly consists of main processing shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG.

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be explained. Main processing is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 8 and 9, first, a process of prohibiting interrupts (step S1) is performed. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and a predetermined register (
For example, the D register) is set to the upper address of the RAM start address (step S4)
. In the case of this embodiment, the range of RAM addresses is 0000h to 01FFh, 00h or 01h is taken as the higher order, and 00h at the beginning is set in step S4. Next, a firing stop signal is output and the firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state (step S5). When at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 is outputting a firing stop signal, the firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state, and the firing of game balls is prohibited.

After that, the state of input port 3 (third input port 124) is read (step S6),
Processing for setting a power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, the program of the subordinate control means (for example, the payout control device 200 and the performance control device 300) that performs various controls according to the instructions from the game control device 100 that constitutes the main control means. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) is set for waiting for normal startup. As a result, when the power is turned on, if the game control device 100 starts up first and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) when the power is turned on, and waits for the start of the sub-control device (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It constitutes waiting means for setting a waiting time.

In addition, the power-on delay timer clocks time using a storage area that is not subject to RAM validity determination (checksum calculation) (RAM area not subject to validity determination, registers, or the like). As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area from the calculation, so that the control at power-on can be prevented from becoming complicated.

It should be noted that the third input port 124 has a setting value change switch 151 and a setting key switch 1
52 and the signal from the body frame open detection switch are input, and by reading the state of the third input port 124 before the start of the standby time, the set value change switch 151 when the power is turned on. Also, the state of the setting key switch 152 and the open state of the front frame 12 (body frame) can be grasped. As described above, when the power is turned on with the front frame 12 opened and the setting key of the setting key operating section turned to the second position, the probability setting value change state in which the probability setting value can be changed is entered. becomes. Also, if the power is turned on while the setting key of the setting key operation section is not turned to the second position and the setting value change button is pressed, the RAM
111C is cleared (initialized).

By reading the state of the third input port 124 before the standby time starts, the operation of the set value change button can be reliably detected. That is, if the state of the set value change switch 151 is read after the standby time has elapsed, it is necessary to continue operating the set value change button from power-on until the standby time has elapsed. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, such troublesome operations are not required, and a situation in which the initialization operation performed when the power is turned on can be prevented from being accepted.

After performing the process of setting the power-on delay timer (step S7), the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) is performed.
First, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read through the port and data bus and the number of times (for example, two times) to be checked is set (step S8), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. (step S9).

If the power failure monitor signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitor signal has been on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). Then, if the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal does not continue for the number of checks (step S10;
N) returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitor signal is on (step S9). Also, if the power failure monitoring signal has been on for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the game machine waits for the power to be cut off. in this way,
By judging that a power failure has occurred when a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise, etc., and to appropriately deal with problems that occur when the power is turned on. .

That is, the game control device 100 serves as power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during a predetermined waiting time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which constitutes the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with problems that occur when the power is turned on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the standby time is over, and the memory contents of the previous power shutdown are still retained, so backup processing, etc. will be performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, there is no need to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, if no power failure has occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11), and whether the value of the timer is 0 is determined (step S12). If the timer value is not 0 (step S
12; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). Moreover, when the value of the timer is 0 (step S
12; Y), that is, when the waiting time has ended, access to a readable and writable RWM (read/write memory) such as RAM and EEPROM is permitted (step S13), and off data is output to all output ports (output (step S14).

Next, a serial port (a port pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111 and used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step S15).
Next, it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 1 (eg 5Ah) (step S16), and if normal (step S16; Y)
, the value of power failure inspection area 2 in RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h
) (step S17). If the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S17; Y), checksum calculation processing is performed to calculate the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM (step S18). match the checksum (step S19). That is, the game control device 100 serves as validity determination means for determining whether the information stored in the storage means is valid when the power is turned on. If the checksums match (step S19; Y), the RAM clear start address 2 is set (step S20), and it is determined whether the probability setting value is changed (step S2
1). When the probability setting value is being changed, it can be determined from the fact that the probability setting value changing flag is set.

If it is in this probability setting value change state (step S21; Y), the process proceeds to step S35 to perform RAM initialization processing and processing to make the probability setting value change state in which the probability setting value can be changed. Here, it is determined that the probability setting value is being changed when the power supply is cut off while the probability setting value is being changed and the data in the RAM is normally backed up. It is designed to be in a value change state. If it is not in the probability setting value change state (step S21; N), the state of the third input port 124 read earlier is changed to the body frame (
It is determined whether the front frame 12) is open (step S22).

In the storage area of the RAM 111C, a probability setting value area, an initial value random number area, a variation pattern random number area, a game control area, and a state display area are set in order from the top. In the probability setting value area, a probability setting value area for storing information on the currently set probability setting value and a work area for temporarily storing various information in the process of changing or confirming the probability setting value are set. be done. This work area includes a working probability setting value area for storing information on the probability setting value selected in the probability setting value change state, and an area for storing various flags. In addition, the area for the initial value random number stores the jackpot design initial value random number, the small winning design initial value random number, the winning initial value random number, and the winning design initial value random number which are updated at any time. In addition, fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3, which are updated as needed, are stored in the fluctuation pattern random number area. In addition, in the area for game control, a work area where information (various data and programs) necessary for game control is stored, and a stack area are set. Also, in the work area for status display, a work area for storing information necessary for displaying the base value, the character ratio, and the like, and a stack area are set.

The base value is calculated from the number of game balls detected by the out switch that detects all game balls (safe balls and out balls) that have been shot into the game area 32 and finished playing, and the number of payouts based on winnings in the winning area. The information necessary for displaying the base value includes, for example, information on the number of game balls detected in the out switch and information on the number of payouts based on winnings in the winning area. In addition, the role ratio is the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) obtained by entering the prize opening from the power-on of the gaming machine 10 to the present, during the big hit state (that is, fanfare and ending It is the ratio of the number of prize balls (number of winning balls by role) obtained by winning the big prize gate (excluding middle ones) (so-called continuous role ratio), information necessary to display the role ratio includes, for example, information on the total number of prize balls (total number of prize balls) and information on the number of prize balls (number of winning balls by role).

The RAM clear head address 2 is the head address of the area for the initial value random numbers, and by performing the process of clearing the RAM with this address set, the area for the initial value random numbers, the area for the variation pattern random numbers, and the The area for game control is cleared. Note that the area for the initial value random number and the area for the variation pattern random number may not be included in the clear target. A RAM clear start address 1, which will be described later, is the start address of the probability setting value area. Area for, area for variation pattern random numbers and area for game control (work area and stack area) will be cleared. Furthermore, the RAM clear top address 3, which will be described later, is the top address of the area for game control, and when this address is set, the RA
By performing the process of clearing M, the area for game control is cleared.

Regarding the status display area, the legitimacy of the status display edit output process in the timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is determined, and if there is an abnormality, the area is initialized, but the backed up information is not normal. The state display area may also be initialized in the process of clearing the RAM in the state where the RAM clear top address 1 set in the case is set. That is, in the process of clearing the RAM with the RAM clear start address 1 set, all areas of the RAM 111C may be initialized.

In the checksum calculation process of step S18 and step S57 described later, the checksum is calculated only for the work area for game control. In addition, one or more of the area for the probability setting value, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variation pattern random number, the area for the game control and the area for the state display may be targeted. When multiple areas are targeted, the checksum of each area may be calculated individually and the validity may be determined individually. You may make it determine collectively.

If the body frame is open (step S22; Y), it is determined whether the setting key switch is on based on the previously read state of the third input port 124 (step S23).
). If the setting key switch is on (step S23; Y), step S35
, where the RAM is initialized and the probability set value change state is set so that the probability set value can be changed. Also, if the setting key switch is not in the ON state (step S23; N),
If the body frame is not in the open state (step S22; N), the process moves to step S24, and it is determined whether the set value change switch is in the ON state based on the previously read state of the third input port 124 (step S24). do.

If the set value change switch is not on (step S24; N), step S30
, and perform the processing in the case of normal recovery from a power failure. In addition, if the set value change switch is in the ON state (step S24; Y), the process proceeds to step S41, the initialization of the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variation pattern random number and the RAM area for game control. process. That is, the setting value change switch 151 also has a function as an initialization operation section that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 is configured to operate the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation section. Initialization means for initializing the

On the other hand, if it is determined that the value in the blackout inspection area is not normal check data (step S
16; N or step S17; N), if it is determined that the checksums do not match (
In step S19; N), the process proceeds to step S25 to initialize all RAM areas. That is, the RAM area for probability setting values and the RAM area for status display are initialized only when a RAM abnormality occurs. In addition, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variation pattern random number and the RAM area for the game control are not only when the set value change switch 151 is turned on as described above, but also when a RAM abnormality occurs. is also initialized.

First, the RAM clear top address 1 is set (step S25), and the previously read third
It is determined from the state of the input port 124 whether the body frame (front frame 12) is open (step S26). If the body frame is open (step S26; Y), it is determined whether the setting key switch is on based on the previously read state of the third input port 124 (step S27). If the setting key switch is on (step S27; Y), the process proceeds to step S35 to initialize the RAM and to change the probability set value changeable state. As will be described later, in steps S35 and S36, the RAM is initialized. In this case, since the RAM clear start address 1 is set, the probability setting value area and the initial value random number area , the area for variation pattern random numbers and the area for game control (work area and stack area) are cleared and the initial values are saved. Note that the state display area may also be initialized here.

Also, if the setting key switch is not in the ON state (step S27; N) or if the main body frame is not in the open state (step S26; N), the command (specific information) for setting change instruction is sent to the effect control board (effect control device). 300) (step S28), prohibits access to the RAM (step S29), stops control, and waits for power off of the gaming machine. Production control device 30
In 0, the display of the display device 41, the light emission of the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, the operation of the board effect device 44, the speakers 19a and 19a, 1
A notification to prompt the change of the probability set value is made by outputting voice by 9b or the like. This notification continues until the game machine is powered off.

In this case, after turning off the power of the game machine, if the power is turned on again with the front frame 12 opened and the setting key of the setting key operation section turned to the second position, the setting key is turned on in the process of step S27. It is determined that the switch is on (step S27; Y), and step S35
, and performs a process of initializing the RAM and a process of setting the probability setting value change state in which the probability setting value can be changed. In addition, when the control is stopped after moving to step S29, without opening the front frame 12 after shutting off the power of the game machine, or without turning the setting key of the setting key operation section to the second position. When the power is turned on again, the data in the RAM remains abnormal and it is not possible to shift to the probability set value change state, so the processing of steps S28 and S29 is reached again.

In addition, although he is trying to perform notification by transmitting a setting change instruction command to the effect control device 300 in step S28, the game control device 100 may perform notification. For example, the game control device 100 may be notified in the batch display device 50 controlled, in the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52, so as to perform a display that is not used as identification information Alternatively, an indicator for announcing an abnormality may be provided.

In step S30 of FIG. 9, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S30). The areas to be initialized here are the blackout inspection area, the checksum area, and the area related to error monitoring. The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept commands, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. It is in an indeterminate state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area for storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared and set to an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined. After that, the area for storing the game state in the RWM is examined to determine whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step S31).

Here, if it is not in the high probability of the special figure (step S31; N), steps S32, S3
3 is skipped and the process proceeds to step S34. In addition, when the special figure is in the high probability (step S31; Y), the ON information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S32), and the high probability notification LED (error indicator) provided on the game board 30 is saved in the segment area (step S33).

Then, the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special game processing described later is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step S34), and step S45. proceed to In the case of this embodiment, in step S34, model designation command, special figure 1 reservation number command, special figure 2 reservation number command, probability information command, probability setting value information which is information of the selected probability setting value, screen designation A plurality of commands such as a command (for example, a customer waiting demo command in the case of a customer waiting state, and a recovery screen command in other cases) are transmitted. Depending on the model, in addition to these commands, a number-of-effects information command or a high-probability number-of-times information command is also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting the probability set value information, which is the information of the probability set value selected to the effect control device 300, it is possible to perform the effect according to the probability set value, and the effect of the game according to the probability set value. It is possible to execute an effect of suggesting or notifying a set probability value such as different selection probabilities.

The screen designation command transmits a command corresponding to the state of the resumed game. When resuming the special figure variation display game that was interrupted by the power cutoff with the resumption of control, a recovery screen command that constitutes recovery information is transmitted as a screen designation command. Furthermore, in this case, information regarding the result of the restarted special figure variation display game is also transmitted. Also, when the power supply is interrupted during the customer waiting state and the control is resumed in the customer waiting state due to the restoration of the power supply, a customer waiting demo command is transmitted as a screen designation command. Also, when resuming the special game state that was interrupted by the power shutdown along with resuming the control, a special game state resuming command is transmitted as a screen designation command.

In step S35 of FIG. 9, the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (step S35 in FIG. 9) as a process of initializing the RAM and setting the probability setting value changeable state (step S
35), save the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (step S36).
Here, when the backed-up information is normal and the process proceeds from step S21 or S23, since the RAM clear top address 2 is set, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variation pattern random number and the area for game control The RAM areas (work area and stack area) are cleared to 0 and the initial values are saved. That is, the probability setting value area and the state display area are not initialized. However, it is not necessary to clear the area for initial value random numbers and the area for variation pattern random numbers.

On the other hand, if the backed-up information is abnormal and the process proceeds from step S27, RA
Since the M clear head address 1 is set, the area for the probability setting value, the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variation pattern random number and the area for game control (work area and stack area) are cleared and initialized value is saved. That is, the game control device 100 serves as initialization means capable of initializing the storage means based on the operation of the operation section (here, the setting key operation section). Note that the state display area may also be initialized here.

The area to be initialized is an area to be set to a value other than 0 among the areas cleared to 0, for example, an area related to the setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the production mode. When all RAM areas are cleared to 0, the probability setting value is set to 1 by setting 0 to the probability setting value area. By setting the probability setting value with the lowest probability,
Damage to the game parlor can be minimized even when the RAM is cleared due to an abnormality or fraudulent act. By setting a value other than 0 as the initial value, it is possible to set a specific probability setting value (for example, setting 3) when the entire RAM area is initialized.

After that, a probability setting value changing flag is set as a process of setting the probability setting value changing state in which the probability setting value can be changed (step S37). As a result, the probability setting value change state is entered. Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S38). As a result, it becomes possible to display information on the probability setting value currently set on the probability setting value display device 153 .

Then, the value of the probability setting value area is loaded, saved in the working probability setting value area (step S39), and the command for changing the probability setting is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step S40). , the process proceeds to step S45. In the production control device 300, based on the reception of the command for changing the probability setting, the display of the display device 41, the light emission of the LEDs of the frame decoration device 18 and the board decoration device 46, the operation of the board production device 44, the speakers 19a and 19b A notification indicating that the probability setting value is being changed is provided by outputting a voice by In addition, although RAM is initialized, the command at the time of RAM initialization is not transmitted to the production|presentation control apparatus 300 here.
A setting for outputting a security signal is also performed. In this case, a timer may be set so that the security signal is output only for a predetermined period of time, or the security signal may be continuously output during the period of the probability setting value change state. Also, since the RAM has not yet been initialized here, the setting for outputting the security signal may not be performed.

Also, in step S41 of FIG. 9 as processing for initializing the RAM area for game control, RA
The M clear start address 2 is set (step S41), the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to 0 (step S42), and the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S43). As a result, the area for initial value random numbers, the area for variation pattern random numbers and the RAM area for game control (work area and stack area) are cleared to 0 and the initial values are saved. A timer is also set for outputting the security signal. That is, the game control device 100 serves as initialization means capable of initializing the storage means based on the operation of the operation section (set value change button in this case).

And the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the production|presentation control board (production|presentation control apparatus 300) (step S44), and it progresses to step S45. In the case of this embodiment, in step S44,
Model designation command, special figure 1 hold number command, special figure 2 hold number command, probability information command,
Probability setting value information, which is information on the selected probability setting value, RAM initialization command (to display the customer waiting demo screen and notify the RAM initialization with light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) command). Also, depending on the model,
In addition to these commands, a number-of-effects information command and a high-probability number-of-times information command are also transmitted. In particular, by transmitting the probability set value information, which is the information of the probability set value selected to the effect control device 300, it is possible to perform the effect according to the probability set value, and the effect of the game according to the probability set value. It is possible to execute an effect of suggesting or notifying a set probability value such as different selection probabilities.

In step S45, a CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit) that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator)
Perform processing to activate the circuit. Incidentally, the CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111 . The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the frequency-divided signal. and a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for triggering random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC start-up process of step S45, a process of starting and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S46). Specifically, the CPU 111 sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit to a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit.
done by A. Also, the bit permutation pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generating circuit is set. A bit permutation pattern is a method of permuting the extracted random number bit arrangement (the arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and storing it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition in the lower row). is a pattern that defines By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit permutation pattern, it is possible to break the regularity of the random number and improve the secrecy of the random number. The bit transposition pattern may be a single fixed pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of prepared patterns. In addition, the user may be allowed to arbitrarily set.

After that, predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on
Extract the value of the corresponding various initial random numbers (in the case of this embodiment, random numbers to determine the winning pattern of the special pattern (big hit pattern random number, small winning pattern random number), random numbers to determine the hit of the general pattern (hit random number ), save the initial value (start value) of the random number (hit pattern random number) for determining the winning pattern of the normal pattern in a predetermined area of the RWM (step S47), and then allow the interrupt (step S48).
Since the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment is configured so that the initial value of the soft random number register changes each time power is turned on, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, making it difficult for the player to acquire illegal random numbers.

Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step S49) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers and break the regularity of the random numbers. In the present embodiment, in the initial value random number update process, the jackpot design initial value random number, the small winning design initial value random number, the winning initial value random number, and the winning design initial value random number are updated (for example, +1 update). Here, the "jackpot design initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the jackpot stop pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game, and the "small hit design initial value random number" is the special figure fluctuation display. It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the small winning stop symbol of the game. In addition, the "hit initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the winning of the normal pattern variation display game, and the "hit symbol initial value random number" is the winning stop symbol of the normal pattern variation display game. A random number that is the initial value for determining In this way, by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time permits in the main processing, the randomness of the random number can be enhanced. It should be noted that the small hit symbol random number does not naturally exist in machines without a small hit. In addition, depending on the model, there is also a game machine that does not have a winning symbol initial value random number.

Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the jackpot random numbers, jackpot pattern random numbers, small hit pattern random numbers, hit random numbers, and hit pattern random numbers are generated using random numbers generated in a random number generating circuit. is configured as However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock that is equal to or faster than the CPU operating clock, and the jackpot pattern random number, small hit pattern random number, winning random number, and winning pattern random number are processed by the program. It is a "low-speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from the CTC (CTC0) of the timer interrupt process) that has the same period as the timer interrupt process, which is a unit. In addition, in the jackpot pattern random number, the small hit pattern random number, the hit random number, and the hit pattern random number, each time the random number goes around, the initial value random number (generated by software) is used to change the start value. ” is adopted. Each of the random numbers may be updated by a counter with +1 or -1, or may be updated by a random method in which all values within the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random numbers are random numbers updated only by hardware, and the jackpot pattern random numbers, small hit pattern random numbers, hit random numbers, and hit pattern random numbers are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process in step S49, the number of times (for example, twice) that the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and data bus.
is set (step S50), and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S5
1). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S51; N), the initial value random number update process (
Return to step S49). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number updating process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By enabling the interrupt (step S48) before the initial value random number update process (step S49), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed. It is possible to avoid pressure on the interrupt processing due to the waiting due to the initial value random number update processing.

Note that the initial value random number updating process in step S49 can be performed not only in the main process but also in the timer interrupt process. In order to avoid executing the value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable interrupts and then update to cancel the interrupts. If the initial value random number update processing is not performed in the timer interrupt processing, and only in the main processing, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update processing.
This has the advantage of simplifying the main processing.

If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S51; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal has been on for the number of checks set in step S50 (step S52).
. Then, if the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal does not continue for the number of checks (step S5
2;N) returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S51). Further, if the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (step S52; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, a process of temporarily prohibiting interruption (step S53
), a process of outputting OFF data to all output ports (step S54) is performed.

After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S55
), the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S56).
Furthermore, after performing checksum calculation processing (step S57) for calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown of the RWM and processing for saving the calculated checksum (step S58), the RW
After performing the process of prohibiting access to M (step S59), it waits until the power supply of the gaming machine is cut off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is shut off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutoff has been correctly backed up. It can be determined when re-entering.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that controls the game overall, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.) that perform various controls according to the instructions from the main control means ), the main control means delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device when the power is turned on (game control device 100) and power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

Also, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) , it is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data,
Initialization operation unit (set value change button, setting key operation unit) that can be operated from the outside, and initialization means (game , and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.

Also, the main control means (game control device 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.

In the above main processing, after the processing of step S28 is performed, step S26
step S26 to S2 until the setting key switch is turned on.
8 may be repeated. That is, the game control may be stopped to wait until the setting key switch is turned on. In this case, in steps S26 and S27, the determination is made based on the current state of the third input port 124 rather than the state of the third input port 124 read in step S6. Furthermore, step S2
Step S2
It is also possible to move to 9 and wait for the power to be turned off.

Further, here, the condition for shifting to the probability set value change state in which the probability set value can be changed is that the body frame (front frame 12) is in the open state and the setting key switch is in the ON state.
The open state of the front frame 12 may not be a condition. Further, both the opening of the front frame 12 and the opening of the glass frame 15 may be set as the condition, or only the opening of the glass frame 15 may be set as the condition.

Alternatively, the setting key switch may not be provided, and the setting value change state may be shifted to the probability setting value change state only on the condition that the setting value change switch is in the ON state. That is, steps S22, S
If the set value change switch is in the ON state in step S24 (step S24; Y), the process may proceed to step S35 of FIG. 9 without performing the process of 23. In this case, steps S41 to S44 in FIG. 9 for initializing the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variation pattern random number and the area for the game control are not performed, but the setting is changed in the probability setting value change state. It is possible to initialize only the area for the initial value random number, the area for the variation pattern random number and the area for the game control by ending without setting or ending after setting the same probability setting value. In this way, if the set value change switch is ON only as a condition to shift to the probability set value change state, the structure of the RAM clear switch in the conventional pachinko game machine can be diverted.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 10, in the timer interrupt processing, a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is sent to the CPU.
111A is started. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and the timer interrupt processing of FIG. 10 is started.

When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is specified (step S1
01). By switching to register bank 1, it is equivalent to performing register save processing to move the value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in main processing) to RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same processing as step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, an input process (step S103) for reading inputs and signals from various sensors and switches, that is, reading the state of each input port is performed. Then, output processing (step S104) for driving control of actuators such as solenoids (large winning opening solenoid 38b, general electric solenoid 37c) and the like is performed based on the output data set in various processes. When the firing stop signal is output in step S5 in the main processing, the firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, signal processing and the like are not performed. In addition, the launch permission signal is the first signal indicating the state of launch permission viewed from the game control device, and the second signal (fire permission signal) indicating the state of firing permission viewed from the payout control device is also payout control. It is generated within the device and output to the launch control device. In other words, two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device, and when both are permitted to launch, the game ball can be launched.

Next, random number update processing 1 (step S10
5) Random number update process 2 (step S106) for updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display games of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. After that, starting port 1 switch 36a, starting port 2 switch 37a, normal gate switch 34a, winning port switch 3
5a, Winning hole switch/state monitoring process (step S107) is performed.

Next, probability setting value change processing (step S1
08) is performed, and it is determined whether the probability setting value is changed (step S109). When the probability setting value is being changed, it can be determined from the fact that the probability setting value changing flag is set. If it is not in the probability set value change state (step S109; N), it is determined whether it is in the probability set value confirmation mode (step S110). In the probability setting value confirmation mode, the probability setting value cannot be changed, but the currently set probability setting value can be confirmed.

If it is not in the probability setting value confirmation mode (step S110; N), as processing related to the progress of the game, payout command transmission processing (step S111) for outputting commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, A special figure game process (step S112) for performing processing relating to the figure variation display game, and a normal figure game processing (step S113) for performing processing relating to the normal figure variation display game are performed. On the other hand, if it is in the probability set value change state (step S
109; Y), or in the case of the probability set value confirmation mode (step S110; Y), the process proceeds to step S114 without performing the above-described processing relating to the game. That is, in the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode, the game cannot be progressed.

It should be noted that, if the probability setting value change state or the probability setting value confirmation mode, payout command transmission processing (step S111), special figure game processing (step S112), normal figure game processing (step S113) so as not to be performed However, one or more of these may be performed. For example, the payout command transmission process (step S111) may be performed and the prize balls may be paid out. Further, processing other than the above-described processing may be included as processing that is not performed in the probability setting value change state or the probability setting value confirmation mode. For example, in the probability setting value change state, random number update process 1 (step S105) or random number update process 2 (step S10)
6) may not be performed, and the random number may not be updated in the probability set value change state or the probability set value confirmation mode. Also, the type of processing that is not to be executed in the probability setting value change state and the probability setting value confirmation mode may be different.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step S114) for driving the segment LED provided in the gaming machine 10 to display the special figure variation display game and various information related to the game so as to display desired content (step S114), the magnetic sensor 61 Magnet fraud monitoring processing (step S115) for checking the detection signal from the board to determine whether there is an abnormality, board radio fraud monitoring processing (step S115) for checking the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 and determining whether there is an abnormality Monitoring process (step S1
16). Then, an external information editing process (step S117) is performed to set signals to be output to various external devices in an output buffer, and a base value is calculated from the number of game balls detected by the out switch and the number of payouts based on winnings in the winning area. is performed (step S118), and the timer interrupt process is terminated.

Here, in this embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of enabling interrupts) and the process of restoring the specification of the register bank (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) automatically (at the end of timer interrupt processing). It should be noted that depending on the CPU used, there are game machines that require an instruction to execute a process for restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Special game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game process (step S112) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the special game process, the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37
a, and the input of the starting port 3 switch 97a, the control of the entire processing relating to the special figure variation display game, and the setting of the display of the special figure.

As shown in FIG. 11, in the special game process, first, the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2
A starting port switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring the winning of the switch 37a and the starting port 3 switch 97a is performed. In the starting opening switch monitoring process, when there is a game ball winning in the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, or the normal variable winning device 37, various random numbers (such as a jackpot random number) are extracted, and the winning Before the start of the special figure fluctuation display game based on the game result pre-determination is performed to determine the game result based on the winning prize in advance.
Next, a special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this big winning opening switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of game balls by the big winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38 is performed.

Next, if the special game processing timer is not "0", it is updated by -1 (step A3). In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the special game processing timer is "0" (step A4). The value of the special game processing timer is "
0" (step A4; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, register the special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number. (step A5), and acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special game process number using the table (step A6).
Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special game processing number (step A7).

At step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "0", the start of variation of the special figure variation display game is monitored, and the setting of the variation start of the special figure variation display game, the setting of the effect, and the special figure variation are performed. A special figure normal process (step A8) for setting information necessary for processing is performed.
At step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "1", the setting of the special figure stop display time, the setting of the information necessary for performing the special figure display processing, etc. (Step A
9).

At step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the kind of the big win and the big winning opening of each big win. Special figure display process (step A10
)I do.
At step A7, if the special game processing number is "3", the setting of the opening time of the big winning gate, the update of the number of times of opening, and the setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning gate are performed. A fanfare/interval process (step A11) is performed.

In step A7, when the special game processing number is "4", if the jackpot round is not the final round, the interval command is set, and if it is the final round, the ending command is set, and the big winning opening remains. A process (step A12) during the opening of the big prize winning opening for setting information necessary for ball processing is performed.
At step A7, if the special game process number is "5", if the big win round is the last round, the process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged and the big win end process are performed. Large winning hole remaining ball processing (step A13) for setting information necessary for performing
I do.
At step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "6", a jackpot end process (step A14) for setting information necessary for carrying out the special figure normal processing is performed.

Thereafter, after preparing a table for controlling the variation of the special figure 1 indicator 51a (step A15), the symbol variation control process (step A16) relating to the special figure 1 indicator 51a is performed. And, after preparing a table for controlling the variation of the special figure 2 indicator 51b (step A17
), the symbol variation control process (step A18) pertaining to the special figure 2 display device 51b is performed, and the special figure game process is terminated. On the other hand, in step A4, if the value of the special game processing timer is not "0" (step A4; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step A15, and the subsequent processes are executed. conduct.

A big hit is a special result that accompanies the operation of a conditional device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit pattern). Variable winning device 38
means that a specific flag is set for continuously activating (the character continuous actuating device is activated). The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on and off. In addition, "conditional device" is a term commonly used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of electric accessories, and the same applies in this specification. It is used as a term with a meaning.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the startup switch monitoring process (step A1) in the special game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 12, in the starting opening switch monitoring process, first, a first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36) winning monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and a hardware random number acquisition process (step A102) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition process, when there is an input to the target starting port switch (starting port 1 switch 36a in this case), the jackpot random number extracted in the latch register is loaded and prepared, and is sent to the target starting port. Set information indicating that a prize has been won. After that, it is determined whether or not there is a prize to the first start opening, which is the start opening of Toku-zu 1 (step A103).
If it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning to the first starting port (step A103
In ;N), the process proceeds to step A109 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, in step A103, if it is determined that there is a winning prize to the first starting port (step A
103; Y), it is determined whether or not it is during special working hours (during general electricity support) (step A
104).

At step A104, when it is determined that it is not in the special figure time saving (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, in step A104, when it is determined that it is in the special figure time saving (step A104;
In Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed. That is, if it is a time-saving state, regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game, a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the first starting hole (first starting winning hole 36) is not won unless the player is left-handed, and the normal variable prize-winning device 37 is not won unless the player is right-handed. Therefore, the time-saving state is a game state in which right-handed hitting is more advantageous than left-handed hitting, but when there is a first start opening winning during the time-saving state (that is, when left-handed during the time-saving state) , a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 performs notification (warning) instructing to hit to the right.
Next, after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the first starting opening (first starting winning opening 36) (step A107), special figure starting opening switch common processing (step A108) is performed.

Next, the second starting port (normal variable winning device 37) prepares a winning monitoring table (step A1
09), a hardware random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed. In this hard random number acquisition process, when there is an input to the target starting port switch (starting port 2 switch 37a in this case), the jackpot random number extracted in the latch register is loaded and prepared, and is sent to the target starting port. Set information indicating that a prize has been won. After that, it is determined whether or not there is a prize to the second start opening, which is the start opening of the special figure 2 (step A111).
If it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning to the second starting port (step A111
In ;N), the process proceeds to step A116 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, in step A111, if it is determined that there is a winning prize to the second starting port (step A
111; Y), the normal electric accessory (normal variable winning device 37) is in operation, that is,
It is determined whether or not the normal variation winning device 37 is in an open state in which game balls can be won (step A112), and when it is determined that the normal electric accessory is in operation (step A112; Y). , the process proceeds to step A114, and the subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, step A
At 112, when it is determined that the normal electric accessory is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether the normal electric fraud is occurring (step A113).

In step A113, it is determined that fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (eg, 5). The normal variable winning device 37
A game ball cannot win a prize in the closed state, and a game ball can win a prize only in the open state. Therefore,
If a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some kind of abnormality or dishonesty has occurred, and if there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent wins. Then, when the number of fraudulent prizes thus counted is equal to or greater than a predetermined number (upper limit) for determination of fraud occurrence, it is determined that fraud is occurring.

In step A113, if it is determined that there is no electricity fraud (step A113; N
) prepares a table for setting information on hold by the second starting port (normal variable winning device 37) (step A114), and after performing the special figure starting port switch common processing (step A115), the processing of step A116 to proceed with further processing. Also, step A113
At step A1
16, and the subsequent processes are performed.

Next, prepare a winning monitoring table for the third starting opening (second starting winning opening 97) (step A11
6) Perform hard random number acquisition processing (step A117). In this hard random number acquisition process,
When there is an input to the target starting port switch (here, the starting port 3 switch 97a), the jackpot random number extracted in the latch register is loaded and prepared, and it is determined that the target starting port has won. Set the information to be displayed. After that, it is determined whether or not there is a prize to the third start opening, which is the start opening of the special figure 2 (step A118).
If it is determined in step A118 that there is no winning to the third starting port (step A118
;N) terminates the starting port switch monitoring process.
On the other hand, in step A118, if it is determined that there is a winning prize to the third starting port (step A
118; Y), it is determined whether or not it is during special working hours (during general electricity support) (step A
119).

At step A119, when it is determined that it is not in the special drawing time saving (step A119; N), the process proceeds to step A122 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, in step A119, when it is determined that it is in the special figure time saving (step A119;
In Y), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A120), and effect command setting processing (step A121) is performed. That is, if it is a time-saving state, regardless of the probability state of the special figure variation display game, a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A120), and effect command setting processing (step A121) is performed. In the case of the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, no prize is awarded to the third start port (second start prize port 97) unless the player is left-handed, and the player to the normal variable prize-winning device 37 is not awarded to the right-handed player. Therefore, the time-saving state is a game state in which right-handed hitting is more advantageous than left-handed hitting, but when there is a third start opening winning during the time-saving state (that is, when left-handed during the time-saving state) , a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 performs notification (warning) instructing to hit to the right.
Then, after preparing a table for setting information on hold by the third starting opening (second starting winning opening 97) (step A122), special figure starting opening switch common processing (step A123) is performed, starting opening switch monitoring End the process.

[Common process for special figure start switch]
Next, the details of the special figure starting opening switch common processing (steps A108, A115, A123) in the starting opening switch monitoring processing described above will be described. Special figure starting mouth switch common processing, when there is an input of starting mouth 1 switch 36a or starting mouth 2 switch 37a or starting mouth 3 switch 97a, is a process that is performed in common for each input.

As shown in FIG. 13, in the special figure starting opening switch common processing, first, starting opening 1 switch 36
a, the starter signal, which is the number of times information regarding the number of wins to the starter switch to be monitored among the starter 2 switch 37a and the starter 3 switch 97a is output to the management device outside the gaming machine 10 The output count is loaded (step A141), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step A142), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (step A14).
3).
If the output count does not overflow (step A143; N), the updated value is set to RW
The data is saved in the starting port signal output count area of M (step A144), and the process proceeds to step A145.
On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (step A143; Y), step A1
45 is processed. In this embodiment, "0" to "255"
” can be stored. When the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" by +1 update, and it is determined that the number of output times overflows, and the data is not saved.

Next, the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, and the starting port 3 switch 97
Of a, it is determined whether or not the number of special figure pending (starting memory) to be updated corresponding to the starting port switch to be monitored is less than the upper limit (step A145).
When the special figure reservation number to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A145; N), the special figure start opening switch common processing is terminated.
Also, if the number of special figures pending to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A145; Y), the number of special figures pending to be updated (the number of special figures 1 pending or the number of special figures 2 pending) is updated by +1 ( Step A14
6), prepare a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the starting opening switch to be monitored and the special figure reservation number (step A147), perform the production command setting process (step A148), and set the target starting opening winning flag Save (step A149). Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the starting switch to be monitored and the number of special figures reserved is calculated (step A150)
, The jackpot random numbers prepared in the hardware random number acquisition process of steps A102, A110, and A117 are saved in the jackpot random number storage area of the RWM (step A151). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starting switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step A152), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A153). This jackpot symbol random number is used in the special figure reservation information determination process (step A157).

Next, the variation pattern random numbers (fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 2 in this embodiment) are saved in the corresponding RWM variation pattern random number storage area (step A154).
Then, the address of the variation order flag storage area corresponding to the sum of the special figure 1 reservation number and the special figure 2 reservation number (any place from reservation 1 to 8) is calculated (step A155), and the calculated area is targeted (Special figure 1 or special figure 2) to save the fluctuation order flag (step A156), perform special figure reservation information determination processing (step A157), and end the special figure start opening switch common processing.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls into the starting winning areas of the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 97, and the normal variable winning opening 37. It constitutes a start memory means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a start memory that is the execution right of the variable display game. In addition, the starting storage means (game control device 100) stores various random numbers extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning port 36, which is the starting port of the special figure 1, to the first Stored as a start memory, various random values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning port 97 or the normal variable winning device 37, which is the starting port of the special figure 2, are the second start with a predetermined number as the upper limit Store as memory.

[Special Figure Reservation Information Judgment Process]
Next, the special figure holding information determination process (step A
157) will be described in detail. The special figure reservation information determination process is a look-ahead process that determines the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 14, first, a low probability determination flag is prepared (step A161), and the prediction determines whether or not the big hit is a big hit by whether or not the big hit random value matches the big hit determination value (low probability big hit determination value). A big hit determination process (step A162) is performed, and it is determined whether or not a big hit is set as a determination result (step A163).
In step A163, when it is determined that the big hit is set as the determination result (step A
163; Y) sets a jackpot symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting switch (step A164), and acquires stop symbol information corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number prepared in step A152 (step A165). , the process proceeds to step A167.
On the other hand, in step A163, when it is determined that the big hit is not set as the determination result (step A163; N), that is, when the loss is set as the determination result, the stop symbol information of the loss is set (step A166 ), the process proceeds to step A167.

In step A167, the stop symbol information acquired in step A165 or step A
The stop symbol information set at 166 is saved in the symbol information area (step A167).
Next, a look-ahead stop symbol command (
low probability) is prepared (step A168), and effect command setting processing (step A169) is performed.
Next, a high probability determination flag is prepared (step A170), and the prediction big hit determination processing (step A171) determines whether or not the big hit random value matches the big hit determination value (high probability determination value of big hit). is performed, and it is determined whether or not a big hit has been set as a determination result (step A172).
In step A172, when it is determined that a big hit is set as the determination result (step A
In 172; Y), a jackpot symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting switch is set (step A173), and stop symbol information corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number prepared in step A152 is acquired (step A174). ), the process proceeds to step A176.
On the other hand, in step A172, when it is determined that the big hit is not set as the determination result (step A172; N), that is, when the loss is set as the determination result, set the stop symbol information of the loss (step A175), the process proceeds to step A176.

In step A176, it is determined whether it is in the high probability of a special figure (step A176).
In step A176, when it is determined that it is not in the high probability of Tokuzu (step A176; N)
, the process proceeds to step A178.
On the other hand, in step A176, if it is determined to be in the high probability of special figures (step A176
In Y), the pattern information area where the stop pattern information was saved in step A167 is overwritten with the stop pattern information acquired in step A174 or the stop pattern information set in step A175 and saved (step A177). , the process proceeds to step A178. note that,
The stop symbol information saved in the symbol information area is used for prefetching of variation patterns and the like.

At step A178, a look-ahead stop symbol command (high probability) corresponding to the target start switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A178), and effect command setting processing (step A179) is performed. Thus, in the present embodiment, each time the special figure reservation information determination process is executed, the result determined by the jackpot low probability determination value and the result determined by the jackpot high probability determination value are
Production control device 300 is transmitted.
Next, a special figure information setting process (step A180) for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern, is performed, and a variation pattern setting process for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed (step A181).

After that, prepare a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number indicating the variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game (step A182), perform the production command setting process (step A183), and determine the special figure reservation information. End the process. In addition, the special figure information setting process in step A180 and the variation pattern setting process in step A181 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal process.

By the above processing, the look-ahead stop pattern command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target and the look-ahead variation pattern command including the information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are generated. It is prepared and transmitted to the production control device 300 .
As a result, the judgment result (read-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether it is a big hit or the type of variation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is produced before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory. It is possible to notify the device 300, especially by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, etc., to the player before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game. It is possible to notify.
That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the starting memory in the starting winning memory means (game control device 100) before executing the variable display game based on the starting memory (
For example, it determines whether or not a special result will be obtained). The timing for determining the random value stored in correspondence with the starting memory in advance is not limited to the time when the starting memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is played. good.

[Look-ahead big hit determination process]
Next, look-ahead big hit determination processing (step A162
, A171) will be described in detail.
As shown in FIG. 15, in the look-ahead big-hit determination process, first, the lower limit judgment value of the big-hit judgment value is set (step A191), and it is judged whether the value of the target big-hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A192).

At step A192, when it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A192; Y), a loss is set as the judgment result (step A197), and the look-ahead big hit judgment processing is terminated.
On the other hand, in step A192, if it is determined that the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (
In step A192;N), it is determined whether the determination flag prepared immediately before the prefetch big hit determination process is a high probability determination flag (step A193).

If it is determined in step A193 that it is a high probability determination flag (step A193; Y
), that is, when the look-ahead big hit determination process is the process of step A171, the upper limit determination value in the high probability is set (step A194), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit determination value (Step A196).
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A193 that it is not a high probability determination flag (step A19
3; N), that is, when the prefetch big hit determination process is the process of step A162, the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (step A195), and the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value. is determined (step A196).

In step A196, if it is determined that the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (
Step A196; Y) sets a loss as the determination result (step A197), and terminates the look-ahead big hit determination process.
On the other hand, in step A196, when it is determined that the target jackpot random number value is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (step A196; N), that is, in the case of a jackpot, a jackpot is set as the judgment result (step A198). , ends the look-ahead big hit determination process.

[Special winning opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the big winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) in the special game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 16, in the big winning gate switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the value of the special game processing number is "4", that is, whether the big winning gate is being opened (step A201). . If it is during the process of opening the big winning opening (step A201; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the big winning opening switch 38a (step A203). Also, if the big winning opening is not being processed (step A201; N), the value of the special game processing number is "5
, that is, whether the remaining balls in the big winning opening are being processed (step A202).
If the big winning hole remaining balls are being processed (step A202; Y), the big winning hole switch 3
It is determined whether there is an input to 8a (step A203). Also, if the large winning opening remaining ball processing is not being performed (step A202; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated.
Since the special game processing number does not move to the next until the special game processing timer reaches "0",
In this way, the progress of the game can be checked by the special game processing number.

When it is determined in step A203 that there is no input to the big winning opening switch 38a (step A203; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, in step A203, when it is determined that there is an input to the large winning opening switch 38a (step A203; Y), a large winning opening count command is prepared (step A204).
, effect command setting processing (step A205) is performed.
Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the special game processing number is "4", ie, whether or not the large winning opening is being opened (step A206).

In step A206, if it is determined that the process is not during the opening of the big winning opening (step A206
At ;N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, in step A206, if it is determined that the process during the opening of the big winning opening (step A
At 206; Y), the big winning hole count number is updated by +1 (step A207), and the big winning hole count number becomes the upper limit value (the number of game balls that can be won in one round. For example, 9) or more. is determined (step A208).

If the large winning opening count number is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A208; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, when the number of large winning opening counts is equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A208; Y), the special game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step A209), and the large winning opening switch monitoring process ends. As a result, the big winning slot is closed and one round ends.

[Special normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing (step A8) in the special figure game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 17, in the special figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether the number of special figure 1 reservations and the number of special figure 2 reservations are both "0" (step A301).
In step A301, when it is determined that both the special figure 1 reservation number and the special figure 2 reservation number are not "0" (step A301; N), the flag is loaded from the fluctuation order flag storage area (for the total number of reservations 1) Then (step A302), it is determined whether this variation is the variation of special figure 1 (step A303).
In step A303, if it is determined that this variation is the variation of special figure 1 (step A3
03; Y), prepare a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number (step A
304), effect command setting processing (step A305) is performed, special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A306) is performed, and special figure normal processing is ended. It should be noted that, at this point, the special figure 1 reservation number is not updated by -1, but in step A304, prepare a command (decorative special figure reservation number command) corresponding to the -1 updated value.

On the other hand, in step A303, if it is determined that this variation is not the variation of special figure 1 (step A303; N), that is, if this variation is the variation of special figure 2, it corresponds to the number of special figures 2 pending Prepare the decoration special figure reservation number command (step A307), perform the effect command setting process (step A308), perform the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A309), and end the special figure normal process. It should be noted that at this point, the number of special figures 2 pending -1 is not updated, but in step A307, the command corresponding to the -1 updated value (decoration special figure pending number command)
prepare.

Also, in step A301, when it is determined that both the special figure 1 reservation number and the special figure 2 reservation number are "0" (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demonstration has been started ( Step A310), if the customer waiting demonstration has not started yet (step A310; N), the customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (step A311).
Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A312), and effect command setting processing (step A313) is performed.
Next, set "0" for special figure normal processing as the processing number (step A314),
The process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A315), and the variable design discrimination flag area is cleared (step A316). Then, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the large winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A317), and the special figure normal processing is terminated.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A306) in the special figure normal processing described above will be described. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. As shown in FIG. 18(a), first, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation pattern discrimination flag area (step A32
1), a big hit flag 1 setting process (step A322) is performed to set deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the first special figure variation display game is a big hit.

Next, special figure 1 stop design setting process (step A
323) is performed, a special figure information setting process (step A324) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and various kinds of setting of the variation pattern of the first special figure variation display game are performed. Prepare a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to information is set (step A325). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A326) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting information on the start of variation of the first special figure variation display game. (Step A327) is performed.
Then, set "1" for special figure fluctuation processing as the processing number (step A328)
, the process number is saved in the special game process number area (step A329).

Next, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A330), and a signal relating to the start of variation of special symbol 1 (for example, a special symbol 1 varying signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A331). After that, save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A332), flashing control timer in the special figure 1 flashing control timer area (special figure 1 indicator 5
Save the initial value (for example, 100 msec) of the blinking period timer of 1a (step A3
33), save the initial value (for example, 0) in the special figure 1 fluctuation pattern number area (step A33
4), end the special figure 1 fluctuation start process.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A309) in the special figure usual processing described above will be described. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the same process as the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. This is done with memory as the object.

As shown in FIG. 18(b), first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation pattern discrimination flag area (step A341).
Then, a big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) is performed for setting deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the second special figure variation display game is a big hit.

Next, special figure 2 stop design setting process (step A
343) is performed, a special figure information setting process (step A344) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern is performed, and various settings related to the setting of the variation pattern of the second special figure variation display game Prepare a special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to information is set (step A345). Thereafter, a variation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the second special figure variation display game is performed, and a variation start information setting process for setting information on the start of variation of the second special figure variation display game. (Step A347) is performed.
Then, set "1" for special figure fluctuation processing as the processing number (step A348)
, the process number is saved in the special game process number area (step A349).

Next, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A350), and a signal relating to the start of fluctuation of the special symbol 2 (for example, the signal during special symbol 2 fluctuation is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A351). After that, save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A352), flashing control timer in the special figure 2 flashing control timer area (special figure 2 indicator 5
Save the initial value (for example, 100 msec) of the blinking period timer of 1b (step A3
53), save the initial value (for example, 0) in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern number area (step A35
4), end the special figure 2 fluctuation start process.

[Jackpot determination process]
FIG. 19 shows the jackpot determination processing (steps A364 and A374) in the jackpot flag 1 setting processing and the jackpot flag 2 setting processing described above. In this jackpot determination process, first,
A lower limit judgment value of the big hit judgment value is set (step A381), and it is judged whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A382). A big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a series of multiple values, and when the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value, which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value, and below the upper limit judgment value, which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value , is determined to be a jackpot.
If the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A382; Y), set a loss as the judgment result (step A387), and end the jackpot judgment processing.

Also, if the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step A382; N), it is judged whether the probability is high (step A383).
And, if the high probability state (step A383; Y), set the upper limit judgment value in the high probability (step A384), determine whether the target jackpot random number value is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step A386 ). Also, if it is not a high probability state (step A383; N), set the upper limit judgment value in the low probability (step A385), and determine whether the value of the target jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step A386) .
If the value of the jackpot random number is greater than the upper limit judgment value (step A386; Y), the judgment result is set to be lost (step A387), and the jackpot judgment processing is terminated.
If the value of the jackpot random number is not greater than the upper limit judgment value (step A386; N), that is, if the game is a jackpot, a jackpot is set as the judgment result (step A388), and the jackpot judgment process is terminated.

[Special figure 1 stop pattern setting process]
In FIG. 20, the special figure 1 stop design setting process (step A
323) was shown. In this special figure 1 stop design setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A391), and if it is a big hit (step A391; Y), special figure 1
Load the jackpot pattern random number from the jackpot pattern random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) (step A3
92). Next, a special figure 1 jackpot design table is set (step A393), a stop design number corresponding to the loaded jackpot design random number is acquired, and saved in a special figure 1 stop design number area (step A394). This process selects the type of special result.

After that, the special figure 1 jackpot stop design information table is set (step A395), the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired, and saved in the stop design pattern area (step A396). The stop design pattern is for setting the stop design in the special figure display device (here special figure 1 display device 51a) and the stop design in the display device 41. Next, round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number (In the case of this embodiment, information indicating 16R or 6R)
and save it in the round number upper limit information area (step A397), obtain the probability fluctuation judgment data corresponding to the stop design number, save it in the probability fluctuation judgment data area (step A398), stop design pattern Prepare a decoration special figure command corresponding to (step A4
01). Here, the probability fluctuation determination data is information indicating which mode to shift to after the big hit. Data 1 (probability variation (with general electricity support))” or “high probability data 2 (latent probability variation (without general electricity support))” is acquired and saved in the probability variation determination data area.

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (step A391; N), the stop pattern number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop pattern number area (step A399), and the losing stop pattern pattern is saved in the stop pattern pattern area. Then (step A400), a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A401). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, save the decoration special figure command in the decoration special figure command area (step A402),
Effect command setting processing (step A403) is performed. This decoration special figure command is transmitted to the production|presentation control apparatus 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A404), the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A405), and the special figure 1 Stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure 2 stop pattern setting process]
In FIG. 21, the special figure 2 stop design setting process (step A
343) was shown. In this special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A411), and if it is a big hit (step A411; Y), the special figure 2
Load the jackpot pattern random number from the jackpot pattern random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) (step A4
12). Next, the special figure 2 big hit design table is set (step A413), the stop design number corresponding to the loaded big hit design random number is acquired, and saved in the special figure 2 stop design number area (step A414). This process selects the type of special result.

After that, the special figure 2 big hit stop design information table is set (step A415), the stop design pattern corresponding to the stop design number is acquired, and saved in the stop design pattern area (step A416). The stop design pattern is for setting the stop design in the special figure indicator (here special figure 2 indicator 51b) and the stop design in the display device 41. Next, round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number (In the case of this embodiment, information indicating 16R or 6R)
and save it in the round number upper limit information area (step A417), obtain the probability fluctuation judgment data corresponding to the stop design number, save it in the probability fluctuation judgment data area (step A418), stop design pattern Prepare a decoration special figure command corresponding to (step A4
21).

On the other hand, when the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A411; N), the stop pattern number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 2 stop pattern number area (step A419), and the losing stop pattern pattern is saved in the stop pattern pattern area. Then (step A420), a decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A421). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, save the decoration special figure command in the decoration special figure command area (step A422),
Effect command setting processing (step A423) is performed. This decoration special figure command is transmitted to the production|presentation control apparatus 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A424), the special figure 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the reserved number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A425), and the special figure 2 End the stop symbol setting process.

That is, the game control device 100 executes the first variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first start prize winning port 36, and the second start prize winning port 97 and the normal variable prize winning device 37 A variable display game executing means for executing a second variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of the game ball. Also, the game control device 100 serves as variable display game execution control means for controlling execution of the variable display game based on the determination result of the determination means (game control device 100).

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting process (steps A327 and A347) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 22, in the fluctuation start information setting process, first, the random number storage area for the target fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 and 2 is cleared (step A451). Next, set the variable time value table (step A452), acquire the variable time value corresponding to the variable pattern number, and save it in the special game processing timer area (
Step A453).

Then, a variation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation pattern number is prepared (step A454), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A455). Next, the special figure reservation number corresponding to the variable design discrimination flag is updated by -1 (step A456), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variable design discrimination flag is set (step A457). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (step A458), and the free area after the shift is cleared (step A458).
459). Next, the variable order flag storage area is shifted (step A460), the free area after the shift is cleared (step A461), and the variable start information setting process is terminated.

Information about the start of the special figure variation display game is set by the above processing. i.e.
The game control device 100 serves as determination means for determining various random numbers stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). Also, the game control device 100 serves as variation pattern determination means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information in the start memory.
Then, the information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games is later transmitted to the production control device 300, and the production control device 300 receives the information on the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, and responds to the determined fluctuation pattern. Set the detailed production contents in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game. The information about the start of these special figure fluctuation display games includes a decoration special figure reservation number command including information about the number of starting memories (number of reservations), a decoration special figure command including information about the stop pattern, and a variation of the special figure fluctuation display game A variation command containing information about a pattern and a stop information command containing information about extension of stop time are mentioned, and a command is transmitted to production control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command earlier than the variation command, the processing in the production control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Processing during special figure fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the special figure game process described above will be described.
As shown in FIG. 23, in the special figure fluctuation process, first, prepare a symbol stop command corresponding to the fluctuation symbol determination flag (step A501), effect command setting process (step A50
2).
Next, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number is set (step A503),
The set display time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A504). In the case of this embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is the lost symbol pattern, the display time is 8.
00 milliseconds is set, and 2000 milliseconds is set as the display time when the stop design pattern is a jackpot design pattern.
Then, set "2" for special figure display processing as the processing number (step A505)
, the process number is saved in the special game process number area (step A506).

Then, the signal related to the end of the variation of the special figure 1 (for example, the signal during the special symbol 1 variation is turned OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A507), and the signal related to the end of the variation of the special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol 2 Turn off the fluctuating signal) in the test signal output data area (
Step A508), Save the initial value of the control timer (eg, 256 ms) in the control timer area for the number of times the symbol fixed number of times related to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game for output to the external information terminal (
Step A509). After that, as the information for controlling the special figure 1 variation display game in the special figure 1 indicator 51a, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 1 indicator 51a is saved in the special figure 1 variation control flag area (step A510 ), as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 indicator 51b, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 indicator 51b is saved in the special figure 2 variation control flag area (step A511), end the processing during special figure fluctuation.

[Processing during special figure display]
Next, the details of the special figure displaying process (step A10) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 24, in the special figure display process, first, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A601), and clear the jackpot flag 1 area and jackpot flag 2 area of RWM (step A602). Then, determine whether the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (
Step A603), when it is determined to be a big hit (step A603; Y), a test signal related to the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game big hit (special figure 2 big hit) Turn on the signal during continuous operation device operation, turn on the signal for special symbol 2) to RW
It is saved in the test signal output data area of M (step A606), and the round number upper limit table is set (step A607).

On the other hand, in step A603, as a result of checking the jackpot flag 2, if it is determined that it is not a jackpot (step A603; N), it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (
Step A604), when it is determined to be a big hit (step A604; Y), a test signal (for example, a condition device in operation signal is turned ON, a character Turn on the signal during continuous operation device operation, turn on the signal per special symbol) to RW
It is saved in the test signal output data area of M (step A605), and the round number upper limit table is set (step A607).

After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit table (step A607), the round number upper limit value (16R or 6R in this embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is obtained, and the RWM round number upper limit value is obtained. Save in the value area (step A608). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired, and the RWM round LED
Save in the pointer area (step A609).

Next, the decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decoration special figure command area of RWM and prepared (step A610), and the production command setting process (step A61
3). After that, prepare a probability information command related to the information to set the probability of winning results in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game to the normal probability state (low probability state) (step A612), and effect command setting processing (Step A613) is performed. Subsequently, the design information set in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop design setting process (stop design number or stop design pattern)
A fanfare command corresponding to is prepared (step A614), and effect command setting processing (step A615) is performed.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 10000 msec) is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A616), and the jackpot (special variable prize winning device 38) corresponding to the jackpot opening information is illegally won. The number area is cleared (step A617), and the fraud monitoring period outside flag is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area of the big winning opening corresponding to the big winning opening opening information (step A618). After that, fanfare/interval process shift setting process 1 (step A619) is performed, and the process during special figure display ends.

On the other hand, in step A604, if the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (step A604
; N) sets "0" for special figure normal processing as the processing number (step A620)
, the process number is saved in the special game process number area (step A621).
Then, the fluctuating design determination flag area is cleared (step A622), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A623), and the special symbol display process is terminated.

[Fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the process transition setting process 1 (step A619) during the fanfare/interval in the process during special figure display described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 25, in the fanfare/interval process transition setting process 1, first, "3" for the fanfare/interval process is set as the process number (step A631), and the process number is the special game process number. Save in the area (step A632).

Next, the signals relating to the start of the big win (special game state) (for example, turn on the big win 1 signal, turn on the big win 2 signal, turn on the big win 3 signal, turn on the big win 4 signal) are saved in the external information output data area ( Step A633), a signal regarding the end of the high probability state and the time saving state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1
OFF the fluctuation time reduction state signal, special pattern 2 fluctuation time reduction state signal OFF, normal design 1
high-probability state signal OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A634)
. In addition, even in the special figure high probability, since only the probability state changes in the general figure, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always OFF. After that, clear the round number area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state (step A
635), save the number without time saving in the game state display number area (step A636),
The general pattern low probability flag is saved in the general pattern game mode flag area (step A637).

Then, the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A638), and the high probability notification flag is used to turn off the game state display LED (third game state display unit 58) provided on the game board 30 related to the display of the high probability state. The area is cleared (step A639), and the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A640). Next, save the probability information command (low probability) in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A641), the signal related to the right-handed instruction (for example, the firing position The designated signal 1 is turned ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A642), and in order to light up the display LED (for example, the first game state display section 56) during right hitting, the game state display number 2 area is turned on. Save the number being hit (step A643
), the fanfare/in-interval process transition setting process 1 ends. As a result, the information of the effect mode is once cleared along with the occurrence of the special game state.

[Fanfare/interval processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare/interval process (step A11) in the special game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 26, in the fanfare/interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special game state is updated by +1 (step A701), and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special game state is prepared (step A702). , effect command setting processing (step A703) is performed.

Next, save the large winning opening opening time (for example, 29 seconds) in the special game processing timer area (step A704), set the processing number to "4" for the large winning opening opening process (
Step A705), save the processing number in the special game processing number area (step A
706).
Next, a signal regarding the opening start of the big prize opening (for example, a special electric accessory 1 in operation signal is turned on
) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A707), and the information in the big winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings to the big winning opening is cleared (step A708). Then, in order to open the opening/closing door 38c of the special variable winning device 38, ON data is saved in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (step A709), and the fanfare/interval process ends.

[Jackpot end processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot ending process (step A14) in the special game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 27, in this jackpot end processing, first, a subroutine call is performed by the probability variation determination data (step A1001).
At step A1001, when the probability fluctuation determination data is "low probability data (normal (no general electricity support))", big hit end setting processing 1 (step A1002) is performed, and the processing proceeds to step A1005.
Also, in step A1001, if the probability fluctuation determination data is "high probability data 1 (probability variation (with general electricity support))", the big hit end setting process 2 (step A1003) is performed,
The process proceeds to step A1005.
In addition, in step A1001, when the probability fluctuation determination data is "high probability data 2 (latency probability change (no general electric support))", the big hit end setting process 3 (step A1004) is performed, and the process of step A1005 Transition.

At step A1005, the probability information command is loaded from the transmission command area at power failure restoration and prepared (step A1005). Then, effect command setting processing (step A10
06).
Next, set "0" for special figure normal processing as the processing number (step A1007
), save the process number in the special game process number area (step A1008).
Next, a signal relating to the end of the jackpot (for example, jackpot 1 signal OFF, jackpot 3 signal OFF, jackpot 4 signal OFF) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1
009), a signal related to the end of the jackpot (for example, turn off the conditional device operating signal, turn off the character continuous operating device operating signal, turn off the special symbol 1 winning signal, turn off the special symbol 2 winning signal
F) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1010).
Next, the information in the probability determination flag area is cleared (step A1011), and the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit is cleared (step A1012).
, save the fraud monitoring period flag in the big winning mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1
013), the jackpot ending process is terminated.

[Jackpot end setting process 1]
In FIG. 28(a), the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A
1002) was shown. In this jackpot end setting process 1, first, a signal related to no time saving state (for example, turning off the jackpot 2 signal) is saved in the external information output data area (step A
1021), a signal related to the start of the low probability state and no time saving state (for example, the special design 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special design 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special design 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal is OFF, the special design 2 change time shortening state signal OFF, normal pattern 1 high probability state signal O
FF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1022).

Next, save the number without time-saving state in the game state display number area (step A1023
), and save the normal low probability flag in the normal game mode flag area (step A1024
), save the special figure low probability & time saving no flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step A1025).
Next, a signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1026), and the right-handed display LED (first game state display unit 56) is turned off. In order to make it possible, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A1027).
Next, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at power failure recovery (step A1028), and the jackpot end setting process 1 is terminated.

[Jackpot end setting process 2]
In FIG. 28(b), the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A
1003) was shown. In this jackpot end setting process 2, first, a signal related to the start of the time saving state (for example, turning on the jackpot 2 signal) is saved in the external information output data area (step A
1031). Since the signal regarding the start of the time-saving state is output from the jackpot, it is continuously saved in the external information output data area.
Then, a signal regarding the start of the high probability state and the time saving state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is O
N, special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal ON, normal symbol 1 high probability state signal ON) are saved in the test signal output data area (step A1032).

Next, save the number with the time saving state in the game state display number area (step A1033)
, save the high-probability flag for the normal game mode in the normal game mode flag area (step A1034)
, Save the special figure high probability & time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step A
1035).
Next, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A1036), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is ended. In the case of this embodiment, the right-handed mode is set during the time-saving state, but since the right-handed mode is set during the big win, the right-handed hit is not set in the big win end setting process 2.

[Jackpot end setting process 3]
In FIG. 29, the jackpot end setting process 3 (step A100
4) was shown. In this jackpot end setting process 3, first, a signal related to no time saving state (for example, jackpot 2 signal OFF) is saved in the external information output data area (step A104
1), a signal related to the start of the high probability state and no time saving state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal is OFF
, special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal OFF, normal symbol 1 high probability state signal OFF) are saved in the test signal output data area (step A1042).

Next, save the number without time-saving state in the game state display number area (step A1043
), save the normal low probability flag in the normal game mode flag area (step A1044
), save the special figure high probability & time saving no flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step A1045).
Next, a signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1046), and the right-handed display LED (first game state display unit 56) is turned off. In order to make it possible, the number in the left-handed state is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A1047).
Next, the probability information command (latency) is saved in the power failure restoration transmission command area (step A1048), and the jackpot end setting process 3 is terminated.

Next, control by the production control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs main processing shown in FIG. 30 and timer interrupt processing (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 30, in the main process, first, the process at the start of the program is performed. In this process at the start of the program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and interrupts are permitted (step C4). Next, allow generation of display data (step C
5) A random number seed is set (step C6), and an initial value at power-on is saved in an area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, the power outage detected flag and the like are cleared.

After the program start processing from steps C1 to C7 is performed, loop processing is performed as the main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, a performance button input process (step C9) for creating input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the performance button 25 or the touch panel 29 is performed. Inputs from the performance button 25 and the touch panel 29 are read in timer interrupt processing, and in this performance button input processing, when there is an input from the performance button 25 or the touch panel 29, processing for changing performance contents, etc. is performed.

Then, the setting of the changeable range such as the brightness of the LED and liquid crystal, the volume, etc., and the LED
A hall/player setting mode process for accepting operations such as changing the brightness of the liquid crystal, the volume, etc. is performed (step C10). Next, a random number update process (step C11) is performed to update the random number that determines the details of the variation mode of the decoration special figure variation display game.

Next, a reception command check process (step C12) for analyzing and responding to commands from the game control device 100 is performed, and an effect display editing process (step C13) is performed for editing settings and drawing commands for controlling the progress of the effect. ) to set the completion of drawing command preparation (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated in accordance with the content to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. 1/3
If the drawing data for the screen to be drawn within 0 seconds (approximately 33.3 milliseconds) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

Then, it is determined whether or not it is time to switch frames (step C15). In this embodiment, the V blank interrupt (1/6
0 second) is entered twice, it is determined that it is the frame switching timing. Note that the frame switching timing can be changed arbitrarily. For example, image updating (frame switching) may be performed at 1/60 second, or image updating (frame switching) may be performed at a timing later than 1/60 second. switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C15 that it is not the frame switching timing (step C15; N), the process of step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, if it is determined at step C15 that it is time to switch frames (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C16).

After that, sound control processing (step C17) for controlling the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), decoration control processing (step C17) for controlling LEDs such as the board decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 C18), a movable body control process (step C19) for controlling the motor and solenoid of the board effect device 44 is performed, and the process returns to the process of clearing the WDT (step C8).

[Receive command check processing]
FIG. 31 shows received command check processing in the main processing described above. In this received command check processing, first, the value of a command reception counter that counts how many commands are received in one frame (1/30 second) is loaded as the command reception count (
Step C201), determine whether or not the command reception count is 0 (step C202)
. If it is determined that the number of received commands is 0 (step C202; N), the received command check process is terminated. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the contents of the command reception counter area are subtracted by the number of received commands (step C203).

Next, copy the contents of the received command buffer to the command area (step C204
), the command read index is updated by +1 within the range of 0 to 31 (step C205), and it is determined whether or not copying of the commands corresponding to the number of commands received has been completed (step C206).
Thus, in this embodiment, the command is not directly analyzed in the received command buffer,
The content of the received command buffer is copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command analysis work is performed in the command area. Thereby, in preparation for the case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during command analysis, the command (data
can be moved to create space. In addition, command analysis can be collectively performed for each round of main processing.

If it is determined in step C206 that the number of command copies corresponding to the number of commands received has not been completed (step C206; N), the process returns to step C204. If it is determined that copying of commands for the number of commands received has been completed (step C206; Y),
The contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and the received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether or not the analysis of commands corresponding to the number of commands received has been completed (step C210). Then, when it is determined that the command analysis for the number of commands received has not been completed (step C210; N),
Return to the process of step C207. Further, when it is determined that the analysis of the commands corresponding to the number of commands received has been completed (step C210; Y), the received command check processing is terminated. In this way, in the received command check process, commands received during one frame (1/30 second) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be saved.

[Receive command analysis processing]
FIG. 32 shows received command analysis processing in the received command check processing described above. In this received command analysis process, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether or not MODE and ACT are within the normal range (steps C232 and C233). ). MODE and A
When CT is determined to be within the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y)
Then, it is determined whether or not the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C23
4).

In addition, when it is determined in steps C232 and C233 that MODE or ACT is not in the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or when it is determined in step C234 that ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step C2
34;N), the received command analysis process is terminated.

If it is determined in step C234 that the ACT for MODE is a correct combination (
At step C234; Y), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235). Variation system command is a command to command the variation pattern of special figure. Then, if it is determined that MODE is within the range of the variable command (step C235
At ;Y), the variable command processing (step C236) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

If it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not within the range of the variable command (
At step C235; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the jackpot commands (step C237). The big hit system command is a command for commanding an operation (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) during the big hit, or a command for commanding an operation (display of a fanfare screen, end screen, etc.) during the small win. and MO
When it is determined that the DE is within the range of the big-hit command (step C237; Y), the big-hit command processing (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

Also, when it is determined at step C237 that MODE is not within the range of the jackpot commands (step C237; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of symbol commands (step C239). The symbol-based command is a command for instructing information on the symbol of the special figure (for example, what to do with the stop symbol of the special figure). Then, when it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the symbol-based command (step C239; Y), symbol-based command processing (
Step C240) is performed to terminate the received command analysis process.

Also, in step C239, if it is determined that MODE is not within the range of symbol-based commands (
At step C239; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of a single-shot command such as a pending number command or an error command (step C241). A single command is a command that stands alone, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. The single-shot commands include customer waiting demo commands, pending number commands, pattern stop commands, probability information commands, error/illegal commands, and model designation commands. If it is determined that MODE is within the range of single-shot commands (step C24
1; Y), single-shot command processing (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis processing ends.

If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of single-shot commands (
At step C241; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243). Then, when it is determined that MODE is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243; Y), look-ahead symbol system command processing (step C2
44) to end the received command analysis process.

Further, when it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command (step C243; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of the look-ahead variation system command (step C245). If it is determined that the MODE is within the range of the prefetch variation command (step C245; Y), prefetch variation command processing (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis processing is terminated. Also, in step C245,
If it is determined that the MODE is not within the range of the prefetch variation command (step C245; N)
, the received command analysis process is terminated.

In addition, the look-ahead variation system command and the look-ahead symbol system command are commands including information necessary for executing the look-ahead effect. Pre-reading effect (also called pre-reading notice or pre-reading notice effect) is whether the special figure fluctuation display game will be a big hit when the special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the unexecuted start memory (hold) is executed after that. (or what kind of variation pattern it will be), in order to notify the player in advance with a predetermined reliability, display the decoration special figure start memory display etc. displayed on the display device 41 in a manner different from usual, It is a production such as performing a production display on And the look-ahead system command (a look-ahead variation system command and a look-ahead design system command) is a command to inform in advance of the variation pattern and the stop design corresponding to the start memory to be the target of the look-ahead performance, and is sent from the game control device 100 at the time of start winning. It is transmitted to the production control device 300 . It should be noted that normal variation-based commands and symbol-based commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

Also, a command related to power-on and a command related to a probability setting value are processed in a one-shot command process. Commands related to power-on include a command for recovery from power failure and a command for RAM initialization. Commands related to probability setting values include the following commands: changing probability setting, changing probability setting value, ending probability setting change, confirming probability setting value, and ending probability setting value confirmation.

Various effects are set based on the commands received as described above. For example, for an image to be displayed on the display device 41, which is one of the effects set based on commands, first, scenario data for controlling the flow of effects is set based on the received command, and this scenario data is used. Based on this, motion data is set for controlling the display contents along with the progress of the game, and a video is created by synthesizing a plurality of images drawn corresponding to the motion data. An image to be displayed on the display device 41 is constructed by creating a display image for each frame and sequentially displaying the images. A display image of one frame is constructed by superimposing a plurality of layers on which images can be drawn. Figure 33(a)
) shows a layer structure constituting a display image of one frame.

In this embodiment, layer 1 from layer 0 to layer 13 is applied from the back side of the screen to the front side of the screen.
There are four types, and the content of the image to be drawn is defined for each layer. The background layer is a layer for drawing a background image, and the notice A layer to the notice H layer are layers for drawing various notice images including a step-up notice.
In addition, the left pattern layer, the right pattern layer and the middle pattern layer are layers for drawing identification patterns of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game display section 85 (see FIG. 38), and the reserved layer is This is a layer for drawing the displays of the memory display portion 83 during standby and the memory display portion 84 during execution (see FIG. 38).
See) is a layer that draws the decorative special figure fluctuation display game by the 4th pattern.

As shown in FIG. 33(a), control of the drawing contents of each layer is managed by the corresponding motion management area. As shown in FIG. 33(b), the motion management area is
Display number (maximum number) that is the number (maximum number) of objects (not necessarily displayed on the display screen 41a) to be displayed in the corresponding layer number) (display number area) and an area (frame number area) for storing a frame number indicating how many frames the processing has progressed. In addition, an area for storing the command position (command position area) that indicates how many lines in the motion table, which defines a certain flow of effects, has progressed, and a list table for multiple motions (a list of motion tables). area (motion list table area) for storing address data (corresponding to motion index) indicating which table is used in data list)
and a plurality of display information areas that define the display content of each object.

There are a plurality of display information areas in the motion management area corresponding to the number of displays (the number of objects), and as shown in FIG. X coordinate of the point, Y coordinate of the upper left point of the display, X coordinate of the upper right point of the display, Y coordinate of the upper right point of the display, X coordinate of the lower left point of the display, Y coordinate of the lower left point of the display, Image index, Background color, Foreground color, It includes an area for storing each data of frame count and behavior index when only IPicture (I-picture) is moving.

Here, the display type is the type of the object (including information indicating whether the object is a still image or a moving image (movie), as well as information indicating the type of movie (I-picture or not, etc.)). The effect type is information indicating the type of effect (processing such as making the image transparent) to be applied to the image. The effect parameter is a parameter of the effect (transparency when transparency is provided, etc.). The X coordinate and the Y coordinate are data for specifying the display position of the image. I have the coordinates of a point. An image index is a number that identifies a still image or movie. The frame count for a moving image of only an IPicture is data indicating what frame data is an IPicture (that is, an I frame). A behavior index is an index for setting the behavior of an object (display element).

The contents of the motion management area are set according to the scenario data set based on the commands. Scenario data is set in a scenario layer, which is a conceptual scenario layer for hierarchically controlling the flow of production.
Each scenario layer has a scenario layer number from 0 to 7.
In this embodiment, the scenario layer with scenario layer number 0 is mainly used to control the display of the background image, the scenario layer 1 is used to control the display of the left pattern, the scenario layer 2 is used to control the display of the right pattern, and the scenario layer 3 is used to control the display of the right pattern. is used to control the display of medium patterns, scenario layer 4
is used for display control of the first notice effect, scenario layer 5 is used for display control of the second notice effect, and scenario layer 6 is used for pending display (display of memory display unit 83 during standby and memory display unit 84 during execution) , and the scenario layer 7 is used for display control of the fourth pattern.

[Single-shot command processing]
Next, single-shot command processing (step C107) in the received command analysis processing described above
will be described in detail with reference to FIG.
When the one-shot command processing is started, it is first determined in step C181 whether or not the MODE data instructs the customer waiting demonstration. , the process proceeds to step C182, and if it is not intended to command a customer waiting demonstration (step C181; N), the process proceeds to step C184. The customer-waiting demonstration is a customer-waiting demonstration effect (also referred to as a “customer-waiting effect”), and is an effect including the customer-waiting demo display performed on the display device 41 . In the customer waiting demonstration, the display is not limited to the display on the display device 41,
Display on other display devices, lighting (including blinking) of lamps, or output of sound may be performed.

Proceeding to step C182, it is determined whether the state of the P machine (the state of the pachinko game machine) is in the customer waiting demonstration. If not (step C182; N), a customer waiting effect setting process for performing a customer waiting effect is performed (step C183), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

When proceeding to step C184, it is determined whether the data of MODE commands the value of the special figure 1 reserved number, and if it commands the value of the special figure 1 reserved number (step C184; Y), Special figure 1 pending information setting process (step C1
85) is executed, the single-shot system command processing is terminated, and if the value of the special figure 1 reservation number is not commanded (step C184; N), the process proceeds to step C186.
When proceeding to step C186, it is determined whether the data of MODE commands the value of the special figure 2 reservation number, and if it commands the value of the special figure 2 reservation number (step C186; Y), Special figure 2 pending information setting process (step C1
87) is completed after executing the one-shot system command processing, and if the value of the special figure 2 reservation number is not commanded (step C186; N), the process proceeds to step C188.

Proceeding to step C188, it is determined whether or not the data in MODE indicates power failure recovery (command data at power failure recovery), and if it indicates power failure recovery (step C
In 188; Y), after the power failure recovery setting process (step C189) is executed, the one-shot command process is terminated, and if power failure recovery is not notified (step C188; N), the process proceeds to step C190. The power failure recovery setting process (step C189) is for notifying the player of the power failure recovery by, for example, displaying a message such as "The game has been restarted" on the display device 41, or blinking the lamps in a predetermined manner. and includes scenario data setting processing therefor.

When the process proceeds to step C190, it is determined whether or not the MODE data indicates power-on (power-on with initialization) (command data at power-on). ;Y) includes power-on processing (step C191)
, and if it is not for notifying that the power is turned on (step C190; N), the process proceeds to step C192. The power-on command is a power-on command for notifying the effect control device 300 that the game control device 100 has cleared the RWM. This power-on command causes the effect control device 300 to clear the effect state, and the RWM clear notification (R
It is sent to cause the display device 41 to display that the WM has been cleared, for example.

In the power-on processing (step C191), as various initial screen information settings, clear the special figure type / design type, set 0 to the special figure 1 reservation number and the special figure 2 reservation number, set the current design and the stop design For example, left = 7, middle = 5, right = 3 includes the process of setting the missing design. Furthermore, initialization processing for initializing the operating position of the motor of the production device, and control processing for executing the RWM clear notification are included.

Proceeding to step C192, it is determined whether or not the MODE data indicates the suggestive effect start condition. The suggestive effect start condition is passage of the game ball to the normal figure starting gate 34 and winning to the right general winning hole 35, which is the start condition of the suggestive effect described later. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when a game ball passes through the normal figure start gate 34 and when there is a winning in the right general winning opening 35, a suggestive effect start condition command is issued from the game control device 100. It is supposed to be sent.

If the MODE data indicates the suggestive effect start condition (step C192;
In Y), suggestive effect setting processing (step C193) is performed, and the one-shot command processing is terminated. The details of the suggestion effect setting process will be described later. Also, if it is not for notifying the suggestive effect start condition (step C192; N), other commands not shown are processed, and the one-shot command processing is terminated.

[Processing of variable commands]
Next, variable command processing in the received command analysis processing (step C101)
will be described in detail with reference to FIG.
When the variation system command processing is started, first in step C111, it is determined whether the special figure type is undetermined, and if it is undetermined (step C111; Y), the variation system command processing is terminated,
If it is not undecided (step C111; N), that is, if the special figure type is set, the variation pattern corresponding symbol determination process (step C112) is executed and step C113
proceed to The special figure type is information indicating whether the special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2, and is information set by symbol system command processing.

When the process proceeds to step C113, based on the information (valid command information or invalid command information) returned in the variation pattern corresponding symbol determination process (step C112), it is determined whether or not the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent. If there is a match (step C113; Y), that is, if invalid command information is returned, the variable command processing is terminated, and if there is no mismatch (step C113; N), that is, valid command information is returned. In that case, the process proceeds to step C114.
It should be noted that the symbol type means the category of the symbol, and the symbol types include, for example, a lost symbol, 1
There are 6R probability variable jackpot patterns. In addition, the inconsistency in step C113 is a contradiction in performing production, such as when a pattern command of a 16R probability variable jackpot pattern is received even though a variation command (variation pattern command) is received. It means that it is a combination (combination of variation command and symbol type).

When the process proceeds to step C114, a variable effect setting process (step C114) is executed in order to perform an effect according to the variable command, and the P machine state (state of the pachinko game machine) is set to be changed (step C115). . Here, "during fluctuation" means that the special figure is fluctuating (not during a demonstration waiting for customers, during a big hit, or during a fanfare). After that, a limited period management process for managing a limited period for limiting the execution of the look-ahead effect, which will be described later, is performed (step C1).
16), end the variable command processing.

[Variation effect setting process]
Next, details of the variable effect setting process (step C114) in the above-described variable command process will be described with reference to FIG.
When the fluctuation effect setting process is started, first, a fluctuation pattern classification process (step C271
) is executed to prepare the advance notice distribution table 1 corresponding to the broad patterns and various types of effect information returned in the variation pattern classification process of step C271 (step C272). The production information here is the information of the stop pattern (especially the details of the jackpot pattern, because the deviation can be understood by the rough pattern), the probability state information such as the high probability / time saving state, the number of reservations, and the production control device 3
A game mode managed by 00 (in this example, a game mode command is also sent from the game control device) is possible. This step C272 (or steps C274 and C2 described later)
In 77), since the notice distribution table is set in consideration of various performance information, for example, even with the same variation pattern command, the notice distribution rate (occurrence rate) can be changed in the state at that time. .
Next, a random number lottery process A (step C273) is executed.
Next, prepare the advance notice distribution table 2 corresponding to the broad patterns and various effects information returned in step C271 (step C274), and perform random number lottery processing B (step C275).
) and proceed to step C276.

Proceeding to step C276, it is determined whether the broad pattern returned in step C271 is "normal failure". If "normal failure" (step C276; Y), step C279.
If it is not "normal deviation" (step C276; N), the process proceeds to step C277.
When the process proceeds to step C277, the advance notice distribution table 3 corresponding to the broad pattern and various effect information returned in step C271 is prepared (step C277), and random number lottery processing C is performed.
(Step C278) is executed to proceed to step C279.
At step C279, the basic BGM number (basic BGM song number) is set (step C279), the advance notice effect setting process 1 (step C280) is executed, and then the process proceeds to step C281.

When proceeding to step C281, it is determined whether the first half fluctuation type determined by the processing so far is normal fluctuation or not. C281; N), Although illustration is omitted, processing of various variations in the case where the first half variation type is not normal variation is performed, and the variation effect setting processing is terminated.
It should be noted that the first half variation type, the same MODE (for example, 12 second first half normal variation), is that of the variation notice type distributed by the production control device side. In addition, "
"Normal" means that it is not a special variation such as so-called slippage or shortening variation. Also, in order to avoid complication, only a part of the advance notice distribution when the first half variation type is normal (not slipping or shortening) is shown here.

Proceeding to step C282, it is determined whether or not the notice type (data in the effect distribution result area described later) determined in the processing up to this point (step C273, etc.) designates a scroll notice, and if it is not a scroll notice (step In C282; N), the process proceeds to step C283, and if it is a scroll notice (step C282; Y), scroll notice scenario data setting processing (step C286) is executed, and the variable effect setting processing ends.
Proceeding to step C283, it is determined whether or not the notice type determined by the processing up to this point designates a scroll character notice. Data setting processing (step C287) is executed, and the variable effect setting processing is terminated. Also, if it is not a scroll character notice (step C283; N), other notices (not shown) are processed, and the variable effect setting process is terminated.

[Presentation effect setting process 1]
Next, details of the advance notice effect setting process 1 (step C280) in the variable effect setting process described above will be described with reference to FIG. In this advance notice effect setting process 1, a step-up advance notice is set according to the random number lottery results (the results of the random number lottery processes A, B, and C described above). The step-up notice is a notice effect in which the content of the notice changes in stages, and the more the stage progresses, the higher the reliability, which is the higher possibility of a special result. In the drawings and specifications of the present application, "SU" means the step-up of this step-up notice, "SU1" means the first step of the step-up notice, and "SU2" means the step-up notice. It means the second stage, and "SU3" means the third stage of step-up notice.

When the notice effect setting process 1 is started, first, the distribution result is loaded from the SU notice number area of the effect distribution result area (step C381).
Next, prepare scenario layer number 4 (step C382), step C381
Prepare the address of the SU notice scenario table corresponding to the number of SU notices loaded in (
Step C383), a scenario data setting process (step C384) for setting the progress of the presentation is executed based on the data prepared in the immediately preceding steps C382 and C383.

Next, the distribution result is loaded from the SU1 cut-in area of the effect distribution result area (step C385), the display image data corresponding to the SU1 cut-in number loaded in step C385 is acquired, and the motion index area (save motion index storage area) (step C386).
Next, the distribution result is loaded from the SU2 cut-in area of the effect distribution result area (step C387), the display image data corresponding to the SU2 cut-in number loaded at step C387 is acquired, and the SU2 cut-in area of the motion index area is obtained. (step C388).

Next, the distribution result is loaded from the SU3 cut-in area of the effect distribution result area (step C389), the display image data corresponding to the SU3 cut-in number loaded at step C389 is acquired, and the SU3 cut-in area of the motion index area is acquired. (step C390) and proceeds to step C391.
At steps C385 to C390, the motion table data for displaying the display image is temporarily stored for each stage. Note that the data saved here is not necessarily used, and if the number of SUs selected is 1 or 2, the display image saved in the upper SU area will not be used.

Also, a temporary image may be set as the display image. The provisional image is arranged in order to create a production scenario or the like even if the display image is not yet completed in the development stage of the gaming machine. If this temporary image is set (step C391;
Y) replaces the temporary image with the corresponding display image (step C392).
. However, when the display image to be replaced does not yet exist, such as when the game is still in the development stage, the temporary image is not replaced and the effect is displayed as it is. Whether or not a temporary image is set can be determined from the value of the image index, which is information specifying an image in the display information area of the motion management area (see FIG. 33(c)).

After that, an in-execution memory display setting process is performed (step C393). In this processing, the setting of the display mode at the start of display of the memory display during execution, the process of change, and the change effect, which is the effect associated with the change, are performed. Details will be described later.

Next, display on the display device 41 will be described. As shown in FIG. 38(a), in the center of the display area of the display device 41, a decoration special figure variation display game display section 85 for displaying the first decoration game of the decoration special figure variation display games is provided. Here, the decoration special figure variable display game is displayed by stopping after the identification information is variably displayed in each of the left, middle and right variable display areas.

Each piece of identification information displayed on the decoration special figure variation display game display portion 85 includes a character portion 87a, a character portion 87b, and a decoration portion 87c attached to the character portion 87b. character part 87
b is arranged so as to partially overlap with the front side of the character portion 87a. In this embodiment, numbers are used as characters, and the character portion 87b can also be said to be a number portion. The decorative portion 87c is an image imitating a stringed bell, and is arranged so that one end of the string is connected to the character portion 87b. The decoration portion 87c is arranged so as to be positioned in front of the lower right of the character portion 87b when the character portion 87b faces the front. The position is not on the extension line of the rotation axis when displaying such a display.

A second decoration game display section 88 for displaying the second decoration game of the decoration special figure variation display game is provided in the upper left part of the display area. The second decoration game displayed on the second decoration game display unit 88 uses one fourth symbol in the left area corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game and the right area corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game. It is used to display The fourth pattern has "-", which is identification information corresponding to a loss, and "○", which is identification information corresponding to a big hit. there is

In addition, in the central lower part of the display area, there is provided a standby memory display section 83 for displaying the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory. In this embodiment, the first starting memory and the second starting memory are digested in the order of storage, so that the standby memory display unit 83 displays the decoration special figure starting memory corresponding to the first starting memory or the second starting memory one-to-one. are displayed in the order they are stored from the left end. The decoration special figure start memory display of the left end is the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the 1st start memory memorized first, and is designed to shift to the left each time it is digested.
In addition, it is possible to suggest the result of the special figure variation display game corresponding to each starting memory and the result of the look-ahead such as the variation pattern by the display mode. In addition, in FIG. 38(a), a look-ahead effect is performed to change the display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display for the first starting memory in the order of digestion.

On the left side of the standby memory display section 83, there is provided a memory display section 84 during execution for displaying information related to starting memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game currently being executed. This in-execution memory display section 8
4, at the start of the special figure variation display game, the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display section 83 shifts, and the result of the special figure variation display game to be executed, the variation pattern, etc. are displayed in its display mode. It is suggested by
A starting memory number display section 86 for displaying the number of starting memories is provided in the upper right part of the display area. This starting memory number display section 86 has a first starting memory number display section 86a for displaying the number of first starting memories.
and a second start memory number display portion 86b for displaying the number of second start memories.

When the starting memory is digested and reduced from the state shown in FIG. 38(a), as shown in FIG. A display that flows into is performed. Here, the result of the special figure variation display game, the variation pattern, etc. are suggested in the same manner as the look-ahead effect in the in-execution storage display unit 84. Also, in the starting memory number display section 86, the numerical value of the first starting memory number display section 86a is decreased by one.

Then, in the decoration special figure variation display game display unit 85, the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game based on the first start memory is started, and the left, middle, and right variation display areas are identified. A variable display of information is started. Also, in the second decoration game display section 88, the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game based on the first start memory is started, and the variation display of the identification information is started in the left area.
After that, as shown in FIG. 38(c), the identification information temporarily stops in the order of the left variation display area, the right variation display area, and the middle variation display area in the decoration special figure variation display game display section 85. FIG. In the temporarily stopped state, the character portion 87a, the character portion 87b, and the decoration portion 87c of the identification information are displayed so as to sway, indicating that they are not completely stopped. Also, the second decorative game display section 8
In 8, the variable display of the identification information is continued in the left area.

Note that the shaking motion at the time of temporary stop is the character portion 87a, the character portion 87b, the decoration portion 8
7c may sway together, or they may sway independently. In this case, they may sway in the same direction or in different directions. good. Further, some of the character portion 87a, the character portion 87b, and the decoration portion 87c may stop and the others may move so as to sway.

Then, when the variation time ends, as shown in FIG. 38(d), the identification information of the decoration special figure variation display game display section 85 is stopped, and the result mode is displayed. In the second decorative game display section 88 as well, the variable display of the identification information ends in the left area, the identification information stops, and the result mode is displayed.
Furthermore, the special figure variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game are terminated with the end of the stop time. Along with this, as shown in FIG. 38(e), the display of the in-execution memory display section 84 is erased, and the next decoration special figure variation display game can be started. If there is no starting memory in the state shown in FIG. 38(e), the customer waits. Also, if the result is a special result in the state of FIG. 38(e), it will be in a special game state.

FIGS. 39A to 39C show an example of step-up notice. When the step-up notice is performed, after the variable display of the special figure variable display game is started, first, FIG.
As shown in , SU1, which is the first stage, is displayed as the display image 600 of the step-up notice. Next, instead of displaying SU1, as shown in FIG. 38(b), SU2, which is the second step, is displayed as a display image 600 for step-up notice. Further, instead of displaying SU2, as shown in FIG. 38(c), as a display image 600 for step-up notice, SU3, which is the third step, is displayed.
If the progress stage of the step-up notice is one step, the step-up notice ends when the display of FIG. 39(a) ends. Also, if the progress stage of the step-up notice is two stages, the step-up notice ends when the display of FIG. 39(b) ends.

The display image 600 of the step-up notice of the present embodiment is layer 12 (see FIG. 33 ), and the display image 600 of the step-up notice is displayed in front of the identification information of the decoration special figure variation display game display section 85 so as to overlap.

From (d) to (g) in FIG. 39, the layer 1 on which the display image of the step-up notice is drawn
2 shows an area 610 corresponding to the display area of the display device 41 in FIG. The step-up notice display image 600 is composed of a background portion 601, a character portion 602, and a character portion 603. Here, these are integrated into one image.
As described in the above-described advance notice effect setting process 1, the display image 600 to be used is prepared for the display image 600 of SU1 and the display image 600 of SU2. 600 is drawn on the layer 12 as shown in FIGS. 39(d) and (e), and a step-up notice is given as shown in FIGS. 39(a) and (b).

On the other hand, a temporary image 605 may be prepared for the display image of SU3, and a temporary image 60 may be prepared.
5 is prepared, it is rendered by replacing it with the display image 600 that is actually used. When there is a display image 600 to be replaced or when the display image 600 is prepared from the beginning without preparing the temporary image 605, the display image 6 of SU3 is displayed as shown in FIG.
00 is drawn on the layer 12, and a step-up notice is given as shown in FIG. 39(c). However, if there is no replacement image and the provisional image 605 remains prepared, the provisional image 605 is drawn on the layer 12 as shown in FIG. 39(g). When the temporary image 605 is drawn, the temporary image 605 is displayed as the display image of SU3 as shown in FIG. 39(h).

The temporary image 605 is not drawn over the entire area 610 corresponding to the display area in layer 12, but is an image drawn only in a portion where the display image 600 of SU3 can be displayed. Therefore, even if the temporary image 605 is drawn, the image of the portion of the image of the layer positioned on the far side of the screen relative to the layer 12 where the temporary image 605 is not drawn is visible.
By using such a temporary image 605, it is possible to proceed with the development related to the step-up notice even if the display image 600 has not yet been completed in the development stage. efficiency can be increased.

Further, when the game machine is completed, the processing using the temporary image 605 becomes unnecessary, but even in this case, the processing for preparing the temporary image 605 is left as it is without being deleted.
Even if the process of preparing the temporary image 605 remains, it will always be replaced with the display image 600, so no inconvenience will occur. Rather, it is possible to save the trouble of deleting the process of preparing the temporary image 605, and to prevent unintended problems caused by the deletion.

Although the temporary image 605 is used as part of the display image 600 of SU3, which has multiple types,
The temporary image 605 may be used for all types of the display image 600 of U3, or the temporary image 605 may be used for some or all of the display images 600 of SU1 and SU2, which are of multiple types. Also good.
Alternatively, only part of the step-up notice display image 600 may be used as the temporary image 605 .
As described above, the display image 600 of the step-up notice includes the background portion 601, the character portion 6
02 and a character portion 603 , part of which may be used as the temporary image 605 . In this case, one layer may contain a plurality of temporary images 605, and one layer may contain both the temporary image 605 and the completed image.

Also, a plurality of temporary images 605 may be arranged in different layers. As a case where a plurality of temporary images 605 are arranged on different layers, temporary images are used in a plurality of layers when the display image 600 of one step-up notice is an image obtained by integrating images over a plurality of layers. There are cases. It is also conceivable that the temporary image 605 is used for the display image 600 of the step-up notice, and at the same time, the temporary image 605 is used for other displays.

In addition, the use of the temporary image 605 is not limited to the step-up notice, and can be used in other effects, and the temporary image 605 is used for effects in which the display image is not yet completed. By doing so, it is possible to proceed with the design of processing related to rendering even before the display image is completely completed.
For example, the temporary image 605 may be used for some or all of the images selected from a plurality of images and displayed. In addition, advance notice to display dialogue, character display to explain the function of the game machine, display for error notification, cut-in notice, background display, selection display of music and production contents during special game state, display of game machine By using the temporary image 605 for the history display, the eye-catching image displayed at the time of scene change, the chance-up image displayed at a predetermined probability during the SP reach, etc., development of these displays can be efficiently performed. can proceed.

Also, the decoration special figure starting memory display of the standby memory display unit 83 and the running memory display of the running memory display unit 84, the change effect displayed when changing the decoration special figure starting memory display and the running memory display,
The provisional image 605 may be used for the first starting memory number display portion 86 a and the second starting memory number display portion 86 b of the starting memory number display portion 86 . In this case, if a plurality of display images are prepared for the look-ahead effect, the temporary image 605 may be used for some or all of them.
Further, the temporary image 605 may be used for the identification information displayed on the decoration special figure variation display game display portion 85 and the identification information displayed on the second decoration game display portion 88 . In this case, the temporary image 605 may be used for some or all of the multiple types of identification information. Also, the character portion 87a, the character portion 87b, the decoration portion 87 included in the identification information
The temporary image 605 may be used for part or all of c.

Conversely, an effect may be determined such that the temporary image 605 is not used. The temporary image 605 is used for images that may be disadvantageous to the player if displayed as the temporary image 605, such as an alert image that calls the player's attention, an error notification, and a notification of the shooting direction. You can choose not to.
In addition, the temporary image 605 may not be used for an image that is important to the player, such as an image indicating a confirmed big win or an image showing a special result, which if displayed as the temporary image 605 would significantly reduce the interest of the player. .

The temporary image 605 is an image of a size that can be drawn only in the portion where the display image to be replaced can be displayed. An image larger than the size may be prepared as temporary image data, and this may be reduced and used as the temporary image 605 .
Conversely, an image that is smaller than the size that can be drawn only in a portion where the display image to be replaced can be displayed may be prepared as temporary image data, and this may be enlarged and used as the temporary image 605 .
By doing so, even if the area occupied by the display image to be replaced changes in the development stage, it can be dealt with only by changing the enlargement ratio or reduction ratio of the temporary image without changing the temporary image data. can increase

Also, although the temporary image 605 is a monochromatic image, it may be an image other than this.
For example, as shown in FIG. 40(a), an image such as a rough sketch corresponding to the display image 600 may be used as the temporary image, or as shown in FIG. The image may be the temporary image 605 . In this way, the contents of the display image 600 can be easily grasped in the development stage, and the development efficiency can be improved.
Also, the temporary image 605 may be an image that can be used as an effect display such as the cherry blossom pattern display shown in FIG. 40(c). Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 40D, an image that is used only as a temporary image 605 but has the same display content as the display image that is actually used may be used. In this way, even if the temporary image 605 is displayed due to a problem or the like, the player will not feel uncomfortable, and the loss of interest can be prevented.

40(c) and (d), and a plurality of types of temporary images 605, such as monochrome images as shown in FIG. It may be possible to select which temporary image 605 to use according to the scene.
In addition, the type of the temporary image 605 may be made different for each model of gaming machines of different models that have different specs such as jackpot probability but are capable of executing the same effect. By doing so, the model can be easily grasped from the temporary image 605, and the development efficiency can be improved.

Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 40(e), the temporary image 605 may be a transparent image so that the image of the layer behind it can be seen through. By doing so, it becomes possible to easily grasp the positional relationship with the image of the rear layer in the development stage, and the efficiency of development can be improved.
Further, the pattern of the base image and the pattern of the temporary image 605 drawn on the entire screen on the inner side of the screen from the layer 0 located at the innermost part of the screen may be the same pattern. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the data of the background image and use it as the data of the temporary image 605 .

In the image ROM 325 in which image and video data are stored, an area for storing temporary image data, an area for storing display image data that is other image and video data,
may be separated. By doing so, handling in the process of development becomes easy, and the efficiency of development can be improved.
Also, the area for storing the data of the temporary image may be an area on the front side or the area on the rear side of the area for storing the display image data. By storing the display image data in an area on the top side, even if the size of the display image data area changes during the development process, the position of the area where the temporary image data is stored can be kept unchanged. can.
In addition, even if the display image data is stored in an area behind the display image data, it is important to secure an unused area in advance and place the display image data in a location where it is clear that the display image data will not be stored. Even if the size of the display image data area changes in the process of (1), the position of the area for storing the temporary image data can be kept unchanged.

For example, as shown in FIG. 41(a), in the image ROM 325, the data used in the game is arranged at the head of the area for storing the data, and the display image data, which is other image and video data, is stored in the subsequent area. You can make it work. The data of the temporary image is used in the development stage, and the display image is also predetermined. Therefore, the data can be prepared from the beginning of development, and it is easy to store from the beginning of the storage area. is. again,
By storing from the beginning of the storage area, the storage position of the temporary image does not change even if the display image data increases or decreases, and the program does not need to change the area to be referred to, so development efficiency can be improved.
Also, as shown in FIG. 41(b), an unused area may be arranged in an area on the leading side of the area for storing the temporary image data, or as shown in FIG. 40(c). An area storing fixed data whose size does not change may be allocated. In this case as well, it is possible to prevent the position of the area for storing the data of the temporary image from changing.

Also, as shown in FIG. 41(d), the image ROM 325 may be arranged at the end of the area for storing the data used in the game. Even in this way, it is possible to obtain the same effect as in the case of arranging at the beginning.
Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 41(e), an unused area may be arranged in the area behind the area in which the data of the temporary image is stored, or as shown in FIG. 41(f). An area storing fixed data whose size does not change may be allocated. In this case as well, it is possible to prevent the position of the area for storing the data of the temporary image from changing.
Further, the data of the temporary image may be stored adjacent to the display image data to be replaced with the data of the temporary image. By doing so, the corresponding display image data becomes easy to understand.

From the above, the display device 41 for displaying an image in a gaming machine capable of generating a state advantageous to a player when a game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result. and an effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the display device 41, and the effect control means controls the image to be displayed on the display device 41 by integrating a plurality of layers each capable of drawing an image. A part of the drawing area of a predetermined layer can be drawn using a specific image (temporary image 605), and when drawing is performed using the specific image, the specific image can be drawn. The image is replaced with a predetermined image and displayed on the display device 41 . Therefore, even if the image to be displayed is not completed, development can proceed using the temporary image 605, and the efficiency of development can be improved.

In addition, the effect control means makes the image of the layer arranged on the back side of the predetermined layer visible in the area where the image is not drawn in the predetermined layer including the specific image. Therefore, even when the temporary image 605 is displayed, it is possible to display the same effect as the actual effect, and development can proceed efficiently.

Also, the effect control means can draw an image including a plurality of specific images on a predetermined layer. Therefore, it is possible to create images for each part separately, and the development can proceed efficiently.

Next, the effect executed based on the detection of game balls in a predetermined area will be described.
In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, it is possible to execute the first suggesting effect suggesting the probability set value based on the detection of the game ball at the normal pattern starting gate 34 forming the first detecting section. In addition, based on the detection of the game ball at the right general winning opening 35 forming the second detection unit located below the normal figure starting gate 34, it is possible to execute the second suggestion effect that suggests the probability set value.

As shown in FIG. 42(a), the passing rate of the game balls to the normal figure start gate 34 is 20% of the game balls hit to the right. In addition, as explained in FIG. 2, only a part of the game balls that have passed through the normal pattern start gate 34 can flow into the right general prize winning port 35 provided below the normal pattern start gate 34 by a plurality of obstacle nails. In addition, game balls that have not passed through the normal start gate 34 are prevented from flowing into the right general winning hole 35, and the winning rate to the right general winning hole 35 is the number of right-handed game balls. 5% of them. That is, 25% of the game balls that have passed through the normal figure starting gate 34 are awarded to the right general winning opening 35.例文帳に追加
Therefore, when the second suggestive effect is executed, the first suggestive effect is also executed, so that the accuracy of the suggestion can be improved and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, the passing rate of the game ball to the normal pattern starting gate 34 and the winning rate to the right general winning hole 35 can be set arbitrarily, and the passing rate to the normal pattern starting gate 34 of the game ball hit to the right is higher , higher than the winning rate of the right-handed game ball to the right general winning hole 35.例文帳に追加In addition, normal figure starting gate 3
A game ball that does not pass through 4 may be able to enter the right general winning port 35 .

FIG. 42(b) shows a first suggestive effect selection table used for selecting the first suggestive effect. There are three performance modes, that is, the performance mode A, the performance mode B, and the performance mode C, and here, the lighting mode in the first display section 621 is different. Also, FIG. 42(c) shows a second suggestive effect selection table used for selection of the second suggestive effect. There are three modes of effect execution, namely, effect mode A, effect mode B, and effect mode C, and here, the light emission modes of the second display section 622 are different.
Of these presentation modes, presentation mode A suggests setting 1 with the lowest probability of special results, and presentation mode B is setting 2 with a medium probability of special results. Effect mode C has the highest probability of a special result, setting 3
It suggests that

The mode of execution of the rendering modes A to C is, for example, in both the first suggestive rendering and the second suggestive rendering, the rendering mode A uses a blue luminescent color, and the rendering mode B uses a green luminescent color. , and the effect mode C is to emit red light. Of course, the execution mode of the production modes A to C is not limited to this.
may be different. Execution mode includes emission color, flashing period, emission intensity, etc., and these can be arbitrarily set.

Further, in the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect, the selection ratio of the effect mode C with respect to the selection ratio of the effect mode A in the case where the setting 1, which has the lowest probability of a special result, is set is the first suggestion effect.
The second suggestive effect is lower than the suggestive effect.
Also, production mode A when setting 3, which has the highest probability of a special result, is set
The selection ratio of the effect mode C with respect to the selection ratio of the second suggestive effect is higher than that of the first suggestive effect.
Furthermore, the selection ratio of the second suggestive effect is higher than that of the first suggested effect, relative to the selection ratio of the effect mode A when setting 2, which has a medium probability of a special result, is set. ing.
Also, production mode C in the case where setting 2 is set with a medium probability of a special result
The selection ratio of the effect mode B with respect to the selection ratio of the second suggestive effect is higher than that of the first suggestive effect.

In other words, the second suggestion effect is less likely to be executed than the first suggestion effect, but the second suggestion effect has a higher probability setting value suggestion accuracy than the first suggestion effect. ing. By configuring in this way, the first suggestion effect is executed with high frequency, so that the probability set value can be prevented from being easily found while increasing interest in execution of the probability set value suggestion.
Although the suggestive effect has a low frequency, the precision of the suggestion is high, and when executed, the player's interest can be enhanced. By being able to execute such suggestive effects with different characters, it is possible to make suggestions that have never existed before, and to improve the amusement of the game.

42(b) and 42(c) are not limited to these, and the second suggestion effect is more precise than the first suggestion effect so that the accuracy of the probability set value suggestion is higher. It can be any value as long as it is

[Suggestion effect setting process]
FIG. 43 shows the suggestion effect setting process performed in the one-shot command process (see FIG. 34). In this suggestion effect setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the game ball has passed through the normal pattern start gate 34 (step C401), and if the game ball has not passed through the normal pattern start gate 34 (step C401; N) , the process proceeds to step C405.
In addition, when the game ball passes through the normal figure start gate 34 (step C401; Y), the first suggestion effect selection table (see FIG. 42(b)) is set (step C402), and the first
Effect selection processing based on the suggestive effect selection table is performed (step C403). Then, the selected first suggestion effect is set (step C404), and the process proceeds to step C405. As a result, the first suggestion effect is performed on the first display section 621 in the selected effect mode.

In step C405, it is determined whether or not there is a prize in the right general prize winning port 35 (step C
405), if there is no winning in the right general winning slot 35 (step C405; N), the suggestive effect setting process is terminated.
Also, if the winning is to the right general winning slot 35 (step C405; Y), the second suggestive effect selection table (see FIG. 42(c)) is set (step C406), and the second suggestive effect selection table is set. Effect selection processing based on is performed (step C407). Then, the selected second suggestive effect is set (step C408), and the suggestive effect setting process is terminated. As a result, the second suggestion effect is performed on the second display section 622 in the selected effect mode.

In addition, when there is a passing of the game ball to the normal figure start gate 34 or a winning to the right general winning opening 35, the suggestive effect may be executed with a predetermined probability. For example, as shown in FIG. 42(d), when the game ball passes through the normal pattern start gate 34, the first execution probability of 40
%, and the second suggestion performance may be executed at 20%, which is the second execution probability, when there is a prize in the right general winning hole 35.例文帳に追加

In this case, in the above-mentioned suggestion effect setting process, when the game ball passes through the normal pattern start gate 34 (step C401; Y), lottery is performed with the first execution probability, and when winning, from step C402 C404 is processed.
Also, if the winning is to the right general winning opening 35 (step C405; Y), a lottery is conducted with the second execution probability, and if the winning is won, the processing from steps C406 to C408 is performed.

By doing so, it becomes possible to control the respective execution probabilities in addition to the physical restrictions on the winning of prizes by obstacle nails, and to increase interest in the execution of suggestive effects. Also, the first execution probability and the second execution probability may be changed when a predetermined condition in the game is satisfied, such as during a specific game state or during a specific performance period. The specific game state includes a game state that is a normal probability state, a game state that is a high probability state, a game state that is a time saving state, a special game state, etc. One or more of these game states are made to correspond. It is possible. In addition, as the specific effect, there are a reach state, an SP reach state, a state other than the reach state, a state in which a predetermined effect is being executed, a state in which a predetermined effect mode is set, etc., one or more of which It is possible to correspond to the production of In addition, the predetermined conditions for changing the execution probability include the occurrence of a big hit, the number of starting memories reaching a predetermined number, the operation of the effect button 25, and the reaching of a predetermined time. It is possible to correspond multiple conditions.

In addition to changing the execution frequency of the suggestive effect by setting the first execution probability and the second execution probability, the execution frequency of the suggestive effect is changed by changing the ease of establishment of the execution condition of the suggestive effect. You can let them do it.
For example, when the execution condition of the suggestive effect is satisfied each time the game ball to the normal pattern start gate 34 passes, and when two or more game balls to the normal pattern start gate 34 pass, the suggested effect is executed. When a condition is established and when a predetermined condition is established in a game, such as during a specific game state or during a period when a specific effect is being executed, the execution frequency may be changed by selection. good.

It should be noted that the execution timing of the suggestion effect is immediately based on the passage of the game ball to the normal pattern start gate 34 and the winning of the right general winning opening 35, but the passage of the game ball to the normal pattern start gate 34 Alternatively, the right to execute the suggestive effect may be stocked based on the winning in the right general winning hole 35, and the suggestive effect may be executed at a later predetermined timing. In this case, a standby notification display 631, which will be described later, may be performed to notify that the execution of the suggestive effect is on standby. Furthermore, the standby notification display 631 may suggest or notify the content of the suggestive effect. Further, in the standby notification display 631, a suggestive effect may be performed separately from the suggestive effect waiting to be executed. In this case, the suggestion effect in the standby notification display 631 corresponding to the first suggestion effect and the suggestion effect in the standby notification display 631 corresponding to the second suggestion effect may differ in accuracy of suggestion.

In addition, one of the passage of the game ball to the normal figure start gate 34 and the winning to the right general prize winning port 35 immediately performs the suggestive performance, and the other is stocked with the execution right of the suggestive performance and performed at a later timing. can be In particular, by stocking the right to execute the suggestive effect for the suggestive effect with higher precision of suggestion and performing it at a later timing, the player can more certainly see the suggestive effect, and the interest in the game can be improved. .

In addition, the passage of the game ball to the normal figure start gate 34 and the winning of the right general winning opening 35 are the triggers for executing the suggestive effect, but it is possible to execute the suggestive effect based on the detection of the game ball at other places. Also good. For example, the detection of game balls at the first start winning port 36, the second starting winning port 97, the normal variable winning device 37, the special variable winning device 38, the left general winning port 35, and the effects provided separately from these winning ports The suggestive effect may be executed by detecting a game ball in the game ball detection unit for the game ball, and the setting can be made arbitrarily.
In addition, as a trigger other than the passage of the game ball, the suggestive effect may be performed with a change in the game state such as the end of the special game state as a trigger. In this case, the precision of suggestion may differ depending on the type of jackpot (normal jackpot, variable probability jackpot, etc.) that triggered the execution of the special game state.

In addition, any suggestion effect may be used, and the first display unit 621 and the second display unit 62
2, it may be displayed on the display device 41. FIG. For example, the display device 41
The predetermined display areas may be used as the first display portion 621 and the second display portion 622, and the presentation modes A to C may be expressed by the display colors and the types of characters in these display areas. Alternatively, the production modes A to C may be expressed by voice.

Also, when the display device 41 notifies the number of prize balls generated with the winning, the performance modes A to C are expressed by the reporting mode of the number of prize balls due to the winning into the right general winning hole 35 which triggers the suggestive performance. It may be something to do.
For example, the display color of the notification of the number of prize balls that accompanies the winning to the right-side general prize-winning port 35 is the production modes A to C.
make it different. In this case, the display color is different from the display color of the notification of the number of prize balls that accompanies the winning of the winning hole, which does not trigger the suggestive effect.
Such notification of the number of winning balls may be performed all the time, or may be performed only in a game state in which the number of balls possessed by the player increases, such as a special game state or a game state in which small wins occur frequently. .
In addition, it is also possible to change the place where the suggestive effect is executed according to the game state or the like. For example, in the case of the time saving state, since the player pays attention to the passage of the game ball to the normal figure start gate 34, the first display unit 621 and the second display unit 622 execute the suggestive effect, and in the special game state, the game is played. Since the player pays attention to the display device 41, the suggestion effect may be executed on the display device 41. - 特許庁

In addition, when winning a prize in a winning slot in which the easiness of winning changes depending on the game state, such as the normal variable winning device 37 or the special variable winning device 38, is used as a trigger for the suggestive effect, the suggestive effect is determined according to the state of the easiness of winning. may have different accuracies. For example, in the case of winning in a state where winning is difficult, the precision of suggestive performance is made higher than in the case of winning in a state where winning is easy.

In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with storage means for storing the contents and the number of suggestive effects executed on the first display unit 621 and the second display unit 622, and stored in an external terminal by displaying a two-dimensional code or the like. An output means for outputting the information may be provided so that the contents and the number of suggestions by the suggestion effect can be confirmed on an external terminal.

Further, the target of the suggestion is not limited to the set probability value, and any suggestions regarding the game may be used. For example, it may suggest the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game being executed (such as the type of SP reach) and the high possibility of a special result. for example,
It is assumed that the production mode A has the lowest possibility of a special result, and the production modes B and C
It is also possible to suggest that there is a high possibility of a special result in the order of .

Also, regarding the starting memory, the variation pattern (S
The type of pre-reach, etc.) or a look-ahead effect that suggests a high possibility of a special result may be used. For example, regarding the high possibility that a starting memory that becomes a special result exists in the starting memory, it is assumed that the possibility that the effect mode A exists is the lowest, and the possibility that the effect mode B and C exist in that order. It is also possible to suggest that . In addition, an effect that suggests whether the state is the normal probability state or the high probability state may be used. In addition, it may be an effect suggesting the currently set probability in the latent state that does not clearly notify whether it is the normal probability state or the high probability state.

Further, the target of the suggestion is not limited to the probability setting value, and may be any setting value that can be selected and set from among a plurality of types of setting values by the operation of the game player or the store clerk of the amusement arcade. For example, it may be the set value of the volume or the luminance of the display device 41, the type of the selected production mode, or the like.

In addition, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, only right-handed game balls can be detected at the normal start gate 34 and the right-side general winning opening 35. When a game ball is detected at the normal figure starting gate 34 or the right general winning opening 35 in the state of doing so, the suggestive effect may not be performed. Also, if the design is such that the detection of a game ball by a detection unit capable of detecting only a left-handed game ball is used as a trigger to perform a suggestive effect, the suggestion effect will be performed when a game ball is detected in a state in which the game is progressing with a right-handed hit. You may choose not to perform the performance.
That is, when a game ball that triggers the execution of the suggestive effect is detected, whether or not the suggestive effect is executed depends on whether the game is progressing with left-handed hitting or right-handed playing. may be determined, or the precision of the suggestive effect may be different.

In addition, it is also possible to select whether or not to execute the suggestive effect and the accuracy depending on the game state. For example, normal probability state, high probability state, special game state, time saving state, normal game state that is not normal probability state and time saving state, customer waiting state, multiple production modes, etc. It is also possible to select whether to execute or not and the accuracy.

Furthermore, if the presence or absence of the execution of the suggestive effect and the accuracy are varied depending on the game state,
For a predetermined period after the game state change occurs, the game state may be handled in accordance with the game state before the change.
For example, if the game progresses from the right-handed game to the left-handed game progress due to a change in the game state, the game progresses with the right-handed game for a certain period of time from the change in the game state. It may be handled in the same manner as when the execution opportunity is established. For a certain period of time from the change in the game state to the state in which the game progresses with left-handed play, there is already a game ball that has been shot with right-handed action, so for such a game ball, a right-handed action suggestion execution opportunity is established. It can be treated fairly by treating it in the same way as if it was done. Of course, if the state of progressing the game with the left hand changes to the state of progressing the game with the right hand, the same treatment as when the execution opportunity of the suggestive effect is established in the state of progressing the game with the left hand for a certain period of time. You can also use

Similarly, in the case of a change in the game state without a change in the shooting direction, whether or not the suggestive effect is executed and the accuracy are set according to the game state before the change for a predetermined period after the change in the game state occurs. You can do it. For example, when the presence or absence of the execution of the suggestive effect and the accuracy are respectively specified in the normal game state, the special game state, and the time saving state, a special result occurs in the normal game state in which the game progresses with the left hand, and with the right hand. A special game state to progress the game is started, and after that, if it becomes a time-saving state to progress the game by hitting to the right, a certain period from the end of the special game state is a special game state or a normal game state. It may be handled in the same way as when it is established. In this case, the fixed period may be until all the starting memories of the first special figure variation display game that existed at the end of the special game state are consumed.

Further, even if the game state is the same, the presence or absence of execution of the suggestive effect and the accuracy thereof may differ depending on factors other than changes in the game state.
For example, in the normal game state or the time saving state, the execution timing of the suggestive effect is established during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game, and the special figure fluctuation display in the two consecutively executed special figure fluctuation display games. The presence or absence of the execution of the suggestive effect and the accuracy may be different depending on whether it is the inter-game timing which is the timing between the end of the game and the start of the next special figure fluctuation display game.

For example, if the execution opportunity of the suggestion effect is established during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game, the accuracy of the suggestion is higher than the case where the execution opportunity of the suggestion effect is established at the inter-game timing. It is possible to improve the amusement of the game by making a change. In addition, if the execution opportunity of the suggestion effect is established during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game, the accuracy of the suggestion is lower than the case where the execution opportunity of the suggestion effect is established at the inter-game timing. It is possible to give the player a privilege that a highly accurate suggestive effect is executed only when the execution opportunity of the suggestive effect can be established at the inter-game timing, and the interest of the game can be improved. .

In addition, whether or not the special figure fluctuation display game being executed is in reach, whether it is in stop display, the type of reach being executed, the type of effect being executed, etc. The presence/absence and accuracy may be different.
For example, if the accuracy of the suggestion is higher when the timing of execution of the suggestion production is during the reach than when it is not during the reach, the accuracy of the suggestion is improved in addition to the improvement of interest by the reach. You can also expect an increase in interest due to Also, if the timing when the execution timing of the suggestive effect is established is during the reach, the accuracy of the suggestion is lower than when it is not during the reach, so that it is not necessary to pay attention to the suggestive effect during the reach. , the player's consciousness can be directed to the ready-to-win performance, and the amusement of the game can be improved.
In addition, if the accuracy of the suggestion is higher when the execution timing of the suggestion effect is established during the stop display than when it is not during the stop display, the display of the result will not only improve the interest but also the suggestion. Improvement in interest can also be expected by improving the accuracy of In addition, if the accuracy of the suggestion is lower when the timing at which the execution opportunity of the suggestive effect is established is during the stop display than when it is not during the stop display, the game is more suitable for confirmation of the result than the suggestive effect. Amusement of the game can be improved by directing the player's consciousness.

In addition, if the accuracy of the suggestion is higher when the timing of execution of the suggestion effect is during the reach than when the stop display is in effect, the accuracy of the suggestion can be improved in addition to the improvement of interest by the reach. Improvement of interest can also be expected due to the improvement of In addition, if the timing when the execution timing of the suggestive effect is established is during reach, the accuracy of the suggestion is lower than when the stop display is in progress. As a result, it is possible to direct the player's attention to the ready-to-win performance, thereby improving the interest in the game.
In addition, if the precision of the suggestion becomes higher as the opportunity to execute the suggestion production is established in the reach with a high expectation, which is a special result, in addition to the improvement of interest due to the reach with a high expectation, the accuracy of the suggestion can be improved. You can also expect an increase in interest. In addition, by setting the accuracy of the suggestion to be lower as the opportunity to execute the suggestive effect is established in the reach with high expectations, the player does not have to pay attention to the suggestive effect during the reach, and the player's awareness of the reach effect is improved. It can be directed to the direction, and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, in the special game state, whether or not the suggestive effect is executed and the accuracy may differ depending on whether it is a fanfare, a round, an interval, or an ending.
For example, if the suggestion effect is not executed during the fanfare, the player can concentrate on preparations such as changing the shooting direction toward the start of the special game state. In addition, if the suggestive effect is not executed during the interval, when the player is notified of the number of winning balls, the execution mode of the next round, etc. during the interval, the player concentrates on these notifications. be able to
In addition, by increasing the accuracy of the suggestions in the order of Fanfare, Round, Interval, and Ending, the timing at which the trigger for the suggestion production is established increases the accuracy of the suggestions toward the end of the special game state, A sense of anticipation can be given to the game after the game state is finished.
In addition, by making the timing at which the execution timing of the suggestion effect is established, the accuracy of the suggestion decreases in the order of fanfare, round, interval, and ending, so that the accuracy is highest at the start of the special game state, and the special game A sense of anticipation can be provided at the start of the state.

Further, the presence or absence of the execution of the suggestive effect and the precision may differ depending on the type of the special result that has triggered the special game state. For example, whether or not the suggestive effect is executed in the subsequent special game state and the accuracy may be different between the variable probability big win and the normal big win.
If the execution opportunity of the suggestion performance is established in the special game state based on the probability variable jackpot, the precision of suggestion is higher than the case of the execution opportunity of the suggestion performance is established in the special game state based on the normal jackpot. In addition to the improvement of interest due to the high probability state after the end of the special game state, the improvement of interest due to the improvement of the accuracy of suggestion can also be expected.
In addition, when the execution opportunity of the suggestion performance is established in the special game state based on the probability variable jackpot, the precision of the suggestion is made to be lower than when the execution opportunity of the suggestion performance is established in the special game state based on the normal jackpot. , it is possible to suppress the disappointment caused by the normal probability state after the end of the special game state, and to give motivation to continue the game.

In addition, if there is no start memory in the time saving state and the special figure fluctuation display game is not executed and the execution opportunity of the suggestion production is established, the suggestion production in the state where the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed in the time saving state The accuracy of the suggestion may be higher than when the trigger for execution of is established. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the player's dissatisfaction with the fact that the special figure variation display game is not executed.
In addition, if there is no start memory in the time saving state and the special figure fluctuation display game is not executed and the execution opportunity of the suggestion production is established, the suggestion production in the state where the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed in the time saving state The accuracy of the suggestion may be lower than when the execution trigger of is established. By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the generation of the starting memory.
Further, in a state in which there is no start memory in the time saving state and the special figure variation display game is not executed, the suggestive effect may not be executed even if the execution opportunity of the suggestive effect is established. By doing so, it is possible to make the player pay attention to the generation of the starting memory.

In addition, when the execution opportunity of the suggestion production is established during the round in the special game state, the accuracy of the suggestion is higher than when the execution opportunity of the suggestion production is established while the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed in the time saving state. can be made higher. By doing so, it is possible to increase the interest in the game in the special game state, which is often shorter in duration than in the time saving state.
In addition, when the execution opportunity of the suggestion production is established during the round in the special game state, the accuracy of the suggestion is higher than when the execution opportunity of the suggestion production is established while the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed in the time saving state. may be made lower. By doing so, it is possible to increase the interest in the game over a long period of time by enhancing the interest in the game in the time saving state having a longer period than the special game state.

In addition, when the execution opportunity of the suggestion production is established during the ending in the special game state, the accuracy of the suggestion is higher than when the execution opportunity of the suggestion production is established while the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed in the time saving state. can be made higher. By doing so, it is possible to increase the interest in the game in the special game state, which is often shorter in duration than in the time saving state.
In addition, when the execution opportunity of the suggestion production is established during the ending in the special game state, the accuracy of the suggestion is higher than when the execution opportunity of the suggestion production is established while the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed in the time saving state. may be made lower. By doing so, it is possible to increase the interest in the game over a long period of time by enhancing the interest in the game in the time saving state having a longer period than the special game state.

In addition, if the opportunity to execute the suggestive effect is established during the ending in the special game state, it is more suggestive than when the opportunity to execute the suggestive effect is established during the result period that informs the number of acquired game balls etc. at the end of the time saving state. may be made to have a higher precision. By doing so, it is possible to enhance the interest of the game in the special game state.
In addition, if the opportunity to execute the suggestive effect is established during the ending in the special game state, it is more suggestive than when the opportunity to execute the suggestive effect is established during the result period that informs the number of acquired game balls etc. at the end of the time saving state. may be made to have a lower precision. By doing so, it is possible to increase the interest in the game during the result period executed immediately before shifting to the normal game state, and to give motivation to continue the game even in the normal game state.

By setting the execution/non-execution of the suggestive effect and the accuracy thereof in consideration of various conditions as described above, the suggestive effect can be varied.
In addition, the above examples can be combined arbitrarily, and the suggestive effect can be made more diverse.
Further, the presence or absence of execution of the suggestive effect can be said to be the presence or absence of regulation of the execution of the suggestive effect. In addition to the case where the execution of the suggestive effect is not selected from the beginning, it also includes the case where the execution of the suggestive effect is once selected but the execution is restricted due to the establishment of the conditions.

From the above, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and can generate a state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, an effect that controls the effect of the game Control means (effect control device 300) is provided, and the effect control means is capable of executing a first suggestive effect and a second suggestive effect as suggestive effects for suggesting matters related to the game.
The precision of suggestion by the suggestion effect is higher than the precision of suggestion by the first suggestion effect. Therefore, it is possible to execute suggestive effects with different tastes, and to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, setting means (game control device 100) that can set a set value selected from among a plurality of types of set values including the first set value by a predetermined operation, and effect control means (effect control device 300) is configured to suggest the set value as a game-related item by means of a suggestive effect, and the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect include a first effect mode (any of the effect modes A to C); A second rendering mode (any of rendering modes A to C) that suggests that the first setting value (for example, any of settings 1 to 3) is more likely to be set than the first rendering mode is included. , the selection ratio of the second presentation mode to the selection rate of the first presentation mode when the first set value is set is higher for the second suggestion presentation than for the first suggestion presentation. Therefore, it is possible to execute suggestion effects with different precisions of suggestion, and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, a setting means ( The game control device 100) is provided, and the effect control means is configured to suggest the set probability set value as a game-related item by means of a suggestive effect, and the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect include a first effect mode. (production mode A) and a second production mode (production mode C
) is included, and the ratio of selection of the second production mode to the selection ratio of the first production mode when the probability setting value with the highest probability of a special result is set is higher than that of the second suggestion production is higher. Therefore, it is possible to execute suggestion effects with different precisions of suggestion, and to improve the interest of the game.

Further, a setting means for enabling selection of a probability setting value to which a probability value for a special result in the game is assigned from a plurality of types of probability setting values by operating an operation unit (set value change switch 151, setting key switch 152). (game control device 100), the effect control means is configured to suggest the set probability setting value as a game-related item by a suggestive effect, and the first suggestive effect and the second suggestive effect include the first effect A mode (rendering mode A) and a second rendering mode (rendering mode C) suggesting that a probability setting value with a higher probability of a special result than the first rendering mode is set is included, resulting in a special result. The ratio of selection of the second production mode to the selection ratio of the first production mode when the probability setting value with the lowest probability is set is higher than that of the first suggestive production.
The suggestive production is lower. Therefore, it is possible to execute suggestion productions with different precision of suggestion,
It is possible to improve the interest of the game.

In addition, the effect control means can execute the first suggested effect with a first execution probability, and the second
The suggestive effect can be executed with the second execution probability lower than the first execution probability. Therefore, suggestive effects with different suggestive accuracies can be executed with different execution probabilities, and the amusement of the game can be improved. Further, by lowering the execution probability of highly accurate suggestive effects, it is possible to prevent the probability set value from being found out early.

In addition, the game ball can flow down the game area 32, equipped with a first detection unit (normal figure start gate 34) and a second detection unit (right general winning opening 35) capable of detecting the passage of the game ball, effect control means , the first suggesting effect can be executed based on the detection of the game ball by the first detecting section, and the second suggesting effect can be executed based on the detection of the game ball by the second detecting section. therefore,
The detection of a game ball by the detection part used in the game serves as a trigger for execution of the performance, and the detection part can be provided with a new function to improve the interest in the game.

Also, the second detection section allows only some of the game balls detected by the first detection section to pass through. Therefore, when the second suggestive effect is executed, the first suggestive effect is also executed, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Next, the look-ahead effect after power failure recovery will be described. FIG. 44 shows an example of game progress.
In this example, first, the special figure variation display game is executed in a state where there are three starting memories a to c. In the column of the number of starting memories in FIG. 44, the number of starting memories is shown in the upper row, and the types of existing starting memories are shown in the lower row.

In this state, a power failure occurred (t11), and then the power failure was restored (t12). Since the game control device 100 has a backup function, the state at the time of the power failure is backed up when the power failure occurs. Therefore, the information managed by the game control device 100 is maintained in the state at the time of the power failure. The memories a to c are also maintained in the state before the power failure occurred.

When the special figure variation display game executed after the power outage ends, the starting memory a is consumed and the game a, which is a special figure variation display game based on the starting memory a, is started (t13). Furthermore, when the game a ends, the starting memory b is consumed and the game b, which is a special figure variation display game based on the starting memory b, is started (t14).
During execution of this game b, two new starting memories d and e are generated, and the number of starting memories is three (t15, t16). These starting memory d and starting memory e constitute a specific starting memory which is a starting memory generated after restoration from power failure.

After that, when the game b ends, the starting memory c is consumed and the game c, which is a special figure variation display game based on the starting memory c, is started (t17). Furthermore, when the game c ends, the starting memory d is consumed and the game d, which is a special figure variation display game based on the starting memory d, is started (t18), and when the game d ends, the starting memory e is consumed. A game e, which is a special figure variation display game based on the starting memory e, is started (t19).

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, the period from the restoration of the power failure to the end of all the special figure fluctuation display games based on the starting memory that existed before the occurrence of the power failure is the restriction period that limits the execution of the look-ahead effect. I am trying to In the example of FIG. 44, the time period (from t12 to t18) from the restoration of the power failure to the end of the game c is the restricted period.

Since the production control device 300 does not have a backup function, the information of the special figure fluctuation display game being executed and the information of the starting memory are lost due to the occurrence of power failure. That is, the look-ahead information about the start memories a to c that existed before the power failure occurred is lost due to the power failure, and the look-ahead performance for these start memories a to c cannot be executed after the power failure is restored.
In addition, with respect to the starting memories d and e that occurred after the restoration of the power failure, the pre-reading information was received when the starting memories occurred and the pre-reading effect can be executed, but the pre-reading information for the starting memories a to c is lost. Since it is not known what kind of special figure fluctuation display game will be executed before the special figure fluctuation display game based on the starting memories d and e is executed, and whether there is a change in the game state, etc. There is a risk that a contradiction will occur when the performance is executed.
Therefore, the execution of the look-ahead effect is restricted during the period from the restoration of the power failure to the end of all the special figure fluctuation display games based on the starting memory that existed before the occurrence of the power failure.

[Restriction period setting process]
FIG. 45 shows power failure recovery processing (step C189) of single-shot command processing (see FIG. 34).
It shows the limit period setting process performed in . In this limit period setting process, first, a limit flag is set (step C421). When this restriction flag is set, the look-ahead effect is not set in the look-ahead variation command process (see FIG. 32) for setting the look-ahead effect.
Then, the value of the starting memory number+1 is set as the limit number of times (step C422), and the limit period setting process ends. The limited number of times is for managing the period of the limited period, and is subtracted at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game.

[Processing of look-ahead pattern commands]
FIG. 46 shows the look-ahead pattern-based command processing (step C244) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this look-ahead symbol type command processing, first, it is determined whether or not the latest pending information is special figure 1 pending (step C301). If the latest pending information is special figure 1 pending (step C301; Y), that is, if the received look-ahead pattern system command is related to special figure 1 pending, the command special corresponding to special figure 1 pending number 1 (step C302), sets a flag for waiting for reception of a read-ahead variation command (step C304), and ends the read-ahead design command process.

Also, if the latest pending information is not special figure 1 pending (step C301; N), that is,
If the received lookahead design system command is related to special figure 2 reservation, save the command in the special figure 2 lookahead design command area corresponding to the number of special figure 2 reservations (step C303), lookahead variation command reception waiting flag It is set (step C304), and the look-ahead symbol system command processing is terminated. The prefetching variation command reception wait flag is set in step C304 because the prefetching pattern command and the prefetching variation command (prefetching variation pattern command) are set (paired).

[Prefetching variation command processing]
FIG. 47 shows the prefetch variation command processing (step C246) in the received command analysis processing described above. In this look-ahead variation command processing, first, it is determined whether or not a look-ahead variation command is waiting for reception (step C311). Here, when there is a prefetch variation command reception wait flag set in the prefetch symbol system command processing described above, it is determined that the reception is waiting. If the prefetch variation command is not waiting to be received (step C311
;N) terminates the look-ahead variation command processing. On the other hand, if it is waiting to receive a look-ahead variation command (step C311; Y), it clears the look-ahead variation command reception wait flag (step C312).

After that, in the processing of steps C313 to C316, the prefetching variation command (prefetching variation pattern command) received from the game control device 100 is converted so as to be convenient for the processing in the effect control device 300. First, the processing (step C313) for setting the look-ahead variation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of pending symbols in the latest hold information is performed, and the information of the special figure type of the start memory corresponding to the look-ahead variation system command received this time and the relevant Depending on the current pending number of special figure type, to set the MODE conversion table for converting the MODE.

Next, referring to the set MODE conversion table, the intra-sub prefetch variation command MODE corresponding to the prefetch variation command MODE is obtained (step C314). moreover,
A look-ahead variation ACT conversion table is set (step C315), and an intra-sub look-ahead conversion command ACT corresponding to the look-ahead variation command ACT is acquired (step C316).

MODE contains information on the first half fluctuation, but the contents and time of the first half fluctuation set based on this MODE will change depending on the number of reservations at the time of judgment, so judgment at the time of pre-judgment and special figure fluctuation display Game start Judgment results may differ depending on the timing. Therefore, in order to be able to easily and reliably process the pre-reading notice effect without being affected by the number of reservations at the time of judgment, MODE is converted in a conversion mode according to the current number of reservations, and at the time of judgment It is designed so that it can be handled in common regardless of the number of reservations. For example, if it is a change without reach and may have a short first half fluctuation time depending on the hold situation, or if it is a change without reach and has a long first half change time regardless of the hold situation, To make it possible to easily and surely perform processing of a prefetching advance notice performance by converting into MODEs classified by items to be considered in setting the prereading notice performance.

In addition, ACT includes information on changes in the second half, such as the presence or absence of reach and the type of reach.
The content of the second half variation set based on this ACT does not change depending on the number of holdings at the time of determination. However, for example, even in normal reach, the final stop symbol is set to stop one frame before the reach symbol, stop one frame ahead, and hit.
Even with the same type of reach, there are various aspects, and the ACT corresponding to each of them is set, so the range of values is wide. Therefore, the number of ACTs corresponding to the reach of the same system is converted into the same ACT to reduce the number of ACTs, thereby reducing the processing load such as checking in the processing of the pre-reading advance notice effect.

Next, it is determined whether both MODE and ACT after conversion are other than 0 (step C31
7). If both MODE and ACT after conversion are not 0 (step C317; N),
Since the command value is abnormal, the prefetch variation command processing is terminated. On the other hand, MO after conversion
If both DE and ACT are other than 0 (step C317; Y), the post-conversion command is saved in the look-ahead variable command area corresponding to the latest pending information and pending number.

Next, it is determined whether or not there is a limit flag set in a limit period for limiting execution of the look-ahead effect (step C319), and if there is a limit flag (step C319; Y), the look-ahead variation command processing is terminated. . In this case, the look-ahead effect is not executed, but the look-ahead information is saved. If there is no limit flag (step C319; N), M
Prefetch command consistency check processing (step C320) is performed to determine whether the combination of ODE and ACT (command combination) is normal.

If the command combination is not normal (step C321; N) as a result of the look-ahead command consistency check processing (step C320), the look-ahead variation command processing is terminated. on the other hand,
If the command combination is normal (step C321; Y), a pre-reading lottery process (step C322) for drawing lots for execution of the pre-reading notice effect is performed, and it is determined whether the pre-reading notice effect is to be generated (step C323).

Then, if the pre-reading announcement effect is not generated (step C323; N), the pre-reading variation system command processing is terminated. On the other hand, if the pre-reading notice effect is to be generated (step C323; Y
) determines whether or not the pre-reading foretelling effect to be generated (that is, the pre-reading foretelling effect selected in the pre-reading lottery process (step C322)) is an effect that starts immediately (step C3
24). The effect to start immediately is, for example, a pending change notice that changes the display mode of the decoration special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41 from the present time. In addition, the production that does not start immediately is a pre-reading notice production that is performed during the execution of the special figure fluctuation display game. There are effects of making a notice by a character appearing during display, a pending change notice of changing the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display at a later timing than the present time, and the like. In addition, as the timing of starting execution of such an effect that does not start immediately, if the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed, the special figure fluctuation display game ends, and the execution of the next special figure fluctuation display game starts It corresponds to the timing at which the

If the effect does not start immediately (step C324; N), the prefetching variation command processing is terminated. In this case, the notice is set at the start of the special figure variation display game for executing the look-ahead notice effect. On the other hand, if the effect is to be started immediately (step C324; Y), a display corresponding to the selected pre-reading preview effect is set (step C325), and the pre-reading variation command processing is terminated.

[Restriction period management processing]
FIG. 48 shows the limited period management process performed in the variable command process (see FIG. 35). In this restricted period management process, first, it is determined whether or not there is a restriction flag (step C431).
If there is no restriction flag (step C431; N), the restriction period management process is terminated. In this case, no limit period is set. If there is a limit flag (step C431; Y), the limit count is updated by -1 (step C432), and it is determined whether the limit count has become 0 (step C433).

If the limited number of times is not 0 (step C433; N), the limited period management process is terminated. In this case, the restricted period continues. Also, if the limit count becomes 0 (
At step C433; Y), the restriction flag is cleared (step C434), and it is determined whether or not there is a start memory that occurred during the restriction period (step C435). In this case, the limited period ends.

If there is no starting memory that occurred during the limited period (step C435; N), the limited period management process is terminated. Also, if there is a start memory that occurred during the limited period (step C435; Y)
prepares the look-ahead information of the earliest start memory among the start memories generated during the limited period (step C436), and performs the processing from step C437 to step C442. This processing is the same processing as the processing from steps C320 to C325 in the above-described look-ahead variation command processing, and thereby set look-ahead effect for the starting memory that occurred during the limited period.

After that, it is determined whether or not all starting memories generated during the limited period have been processed (step C4
43) If all have been processed (step C443; Y), the limited period management process ends. If not all processed (step C443; N), pre-reading information is prepared for the start memory next to the processed start memory among the start memories generated during the limited period (step C443; N).
Step C444) and return to step C437. As a result, the setting of the look-ahead effect is performed for each of the starting memories generated in the limited period.

In addition, during the above-mentioned limited period, the performance control device 300 does not perform the process of selecting the prefetching performance, so that the prefetching performance is not executed, and when the limited period ends, the prefetching performance of the starting memory that occurred during the limited period is selected. However, as long as the look-ahead effect is limited during the limited period, any type of effect may be used. For example, with respect to the starting memory generated during the limited period, the look-ahead effect may not be performed even after the limited period ends.

In addition, it is possible to display that the execution of the look-ahead effect is restricted in the special figure start memory display or other areas. In this case, it may be possible to distinguish between those in which the read-ahead performance is not executed even when the limit period ends and those in which the read-ahead performance is likely to be executed when the limit period ends.
In the example shown in FIG. 44, since there is a possibility that the look-ahead effect will be executed when the limit period ends for the starting memories d and e, even if the display is made to be distinguished from the starting memories a, b, and c. good. As a distinction of such a display, for example, "x" is displayed in the decoration special figure start memory display of the start memories a, b, c to indicate that the look-ahead effect will not be executed even if the limit period ends, and the start It is also possible to display "preparing" in the decoration special figure starting memory display of the memories d and e to indicate that there is a possibility that the look-ahead performance will be executed when the limit period ends. In addition to the display of "preparing", for example, the remaining time until the end of the restricted period may be displayed by a timer. However, since the exact time until the end of the restricted period is unknown until the start of game c, the timer display is updated to the exact time until the end of the restricted period after the start of game c. .

Also, during the limited period, we did not perform effects such as changing the display mode of the decorative special starting memory display, but for one or both of the starting memory that existed before the power failure occurred and the starting memory that occurred during the limited period, During the limited period, an effect not based on the look-ahead information may be executed. The effect not based on the look-ahead information may be a different effect from the look-ahead effect, or may be the same effect as the look-ahead effect. When the same effect as the look-ahead effect is to be performed, a specific effect with a suggested degree of expectation below a certain value is performed. For example, it is possible to execute only the look-ahead effect with the lowest expectation to suggest, or the look-ahead effect that can be selected regardless of the variation pattern or result of the special figure fluctuation display game, and the actual special figure fluctuation display game It is preferable to avoid conflicts with content.

In addition, if the look-ahead effect is started with a change effect such as the character acting on the decoration special figure start memory display, the change effect can be executed during the limited period, but the look-ahead effect is not started. You can do it. For example, the character acts on the decoration special figure start memory display, but the display mode of the decoration special figure start memory display is not changed.
As such a change effect, for example, the decoration special figure start memory display is blinking, and the shape of the decoration special figure start memory display is changed. Make it executable. For example, the decorative special figure start memory display is a display that imitates an egg, and the egg is cracked as a change effect. Even during the restricted period, it is possible to execute up to the stage of the entering performance.
In addition, when the starting memory is digested sequentially, the decoration special figure starting memory display moves to a predetermined position, so that the display mode such as shape and color changes. In this case, such a change effect can be executed even during the restricted period.
Also, as will be described later, it may be possible to execute a false effect in which the display mode of the decoration special figure start memory display does not change as a result as a change effect.

In addition, regarding the starting memory generated in the limited period, the performance control device 300 does not perform the process of selecting the prefetching performance in the limited period, but the starting memory generated in the limited period is read ahead in the performance control device 300 even in the limited period. A process of selecting an effect may be performed. In this case, the selected look-ahead effect may not be performed during the limit period, but may be started after the limit period ends. If the selected look-ahead effect is a specific effect, it may be started even during the limited period, and if it is not a specific effect, it may be started after the end of the limited period. A specific production is a production with a certain level of expectation or less. good. In addition, when it is possible to select an effect with an expectation level of a certain value or less as a specific effect, the selection probability of the selectable effect may be the same selection probability as in the case where it is not a limited period. The selection probability may be less or greater than if not.

Further, when selecting the prefetching effect during the limited period for the starting memory generated during the limited period, a selection table different from that used when selecting the prefetching effect outside the limited period may be used. For example, the specific table, which is the selection table for selecting the prefetching effect during the limited period, is one of the prefetching effects that can be selected from the normal table, which is the selection table for selecting the prefetching effect outside the limited period. Only the part can be selected. Some productions are, for example, productions with suggested expectations below a certain value, predictive productions that can be selected regardless of the fluctuation pattern or result of the special figure fluctuation display game, and suggested expectations is the highest look-ahead effect or the like.

Also, the end of the restricted period may be the start of the special figure fluctuation display game that is finally digested out of the starting memory that existed before the occurrence of the power failure. During the limited period, the effect control device 300 cannot grasp the variation mode and result of the special figure fluctuation display game based on these starting memories because the prefetch information of the starting memories that existed before the power failure occurred is lost. It was set to prevent discrepancies and contradictions with the pre-reading effect of the starting memory that occurred, but the special figure fluctuation display game that is digested last among the starting memories that existed before the power failure is started. Since all the variation modes and results of the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory that existed before the power failure occurred at the time of the power failure, there is no problem even if the limit period ends at this time.

In addition, although the game control device 100 is made to make a preliminary determination even if it is a starting memory that occurred during the restricted period, the starting memory that occurred during the restricted period is kept in the game control device 100 until the restricted period ends. It is also possible not to perform the prior determination of . That is, the game control device 100 may limit the prefetch effect. In this case, prior judgment may be made after the end of the limited period and prefetch information may be transmitted to the effect control device 300, or the start memory generated during the limited period may be judged in advance even after the limited period ends. You can leave it out.

In addition, along with the restoration of the power failure, it may be possible to perform a preliminary determination again for the starting memory that existed before the occurrence of the power failure, and transmit the prefetch information to the effect control device 300 . In this way, contradictions do not occur in the look-ahead effect even if the limited period is not provided.

In addition, although the look-ahead effect is restricted during the restricted period, the effect other than the look-ahead effect such as part of the effect of the special figure variation display game being executed may also be restricted. for example,
It is also possible to limit the effect display in the in-execution memory display section 84 . Conversely, even during the restricted period, the effect of explaining the game may not be restricted, and the frequency may be increased compared to when it is not during the restricted period.

In view of the above, in a gaming machine capable of executing a variable display game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generating a state advantageous to the player when the result of the variable display game is a special result,
Random number information is extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the starting winning opening (the first starting winning opening 36, the normal variable winning apparatus 37, the second starting winning opening 97), and the execution right of the variable display game is started together with the random number information. Starting storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit number as storage;
A preliminary determination means (game control device 100) capable of determining random number information before the execution of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory stored in the start memory means is provided, and power failure occurs and is restored. In this case, the period from the restoration of the power failure to the establishment of a predetermined condition is defined as a limited period, and the specific starting memory, which is a new starting memory generated during the limited period, uses the judgment result of the prior judgment means regarding the specific starting memory. Part or all of the pre-announced performance, which is a performance, can be restricted until the restriction period ends. Therefore, it is possible to prevent contradictory advance notice effects from being executed due to the loss of the advance determination result due to power failure, thereby preventing a decrease in interest in the game.

Also, the limited period is the period until all the variable display games based on the start memory that existed when the power failure occurred are completed. Therefore, the period can be easily understood by the player.

Further, the prior determination means makes a determination about the specific starting memory even during the limited period, and the control means does not perform a part or all of the advance notice performance about the specific starting memory until the limited period ends. It will be done as follows. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the advance notice effect from being executed during the restricted period. In addition, it becomes possible to obtain the result of prior judgment regarding the specific starting memory that occurred during the restricted period, and it becomes possible to execute the prior notice effect at a later opportunity.

In addition, there are a plurality of types of advance notice effects with different degrees of reliability, which are high possibilities of special results, and the control means selects a plurality of types of advance notice effects in accordance with the determination results of the advance determination means. A selection table having a fixed probability is used to select a pre-announced effect, and the selection table includes a specific table used during the restricted period and a normal table used outside the restricted period, and the specific table. The advance notice effects that can be selected by , are part of the advance notice effects that can be selected from the normal table and whose reliability is lower than a predetermined value. Therefore, although the advance notice performance can be executed even during the restricted period, it is possible to prevent the execution of the advance notice performance with contradictory contents, thereby preventing the decrease in interest in the game.

Also, the advance determination means will not make a determination about the specific start memory until the limit period ends. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the advance notice effect from being executed during the restricted period.

Next, as a game effect, a suggestive display that can suggest the degree of expectation, which is a high possibility of a special result, and a standby notification that can notify that the player is waiting for execution of a predetermined effect will be described. do. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, it is possible to notify that the execution of a button effect for operating the effect button 25 as a predetermined effect is waiting by a standby notification display 631, which is one of the standby notifications.

FIG. 49 shows an example of the notification effect in which the standby notification display is displayed.
When a predetermined notification condition is established during the execution of the special figure variation display game, a notification display 630 to the effect that the execution of the button effect accompanying the operation of the effect button 25 is awaited is made as shown in FIG. 49(a). Predetermined notification conditions can be set arbitrarily, for example, when a predetermined timing has come in a special figure fluctuation display game in which button effects are performed, or when a predetermined lottery for determining the presence or absence of notification is won. be.

After the notification display 630 is performed, a standby notification display 631 indicating that the button effect is scheduled to be performed is displayed as shown in FIG. 49(b). Here, a display of "x2" indicating that the button effect is scheduled to be performed twice is given in the standby notification display 631, and the number of times of operation right is also displayed. The number of times the button effect is performed is selected from one or a plurality of times, and the scheduled number of button effects indicated by the standby notification display 631 for one notification display 630 varies.

The standby notification display 631 is a display that imitates the effect button 25, making it visually easy to understand that the effect of operating the effect button 25 is waiting. Further, in the standby notification display 631 , “stock” is additionally displayed so that it can be easily distinguished from the promotion image 632 prompting the operation of the effect button 25 . Of course, the display mode of the standby notification display 631 is not limited to this.

The greater the number of executions of the button effect, the higher the degree of expectation, which is the possibility of a special result. ing. In addition, even if the standby notification display 631 that notifies the same scheduled number of times is displayed, it is divided by the display of the notification display 630 a plurality of times, and the display of the notification display 630 a plurality of times. Even if the standby notification display 631 that notifies the same scheduled number of times is finally displayed, the suggested degree of expectation may differ depending on the number of times of the notification display 630 .

After that, it is possible to execute a change effect for changing the display mode of the standby notification display 631 . This change production may not be executed. The change effect here is a button effect different from the button effect announced by the standby notification display 631 . In this change effect, FIG. 49(c)
, a promotion image 632 prompting the operation of the effect button 25 is displayed, and this promotion image 63
2, a corresponding display 633 corresponding to the operation is made as shown in FIG. 49(d). Then, the correspondence display 633 works on the standby notification display 631,
As shown in FIG. 49(e), the display mode of the standby notification display 631 changes.
The display mode of the standby notification display 631 suggests the degree of expectation, and here, the display mode of FIG. 49(e) indicates that the expectation level is higher than the display mode of FIG. 49(b). It's becoming

In addition to the case where the display mode changes to that shown in FIG.
After the notification display 630 of a), the display mode may change directly to the display mode of FIG. Even in the case where the display mode of FIG. 49(e) is finally obtained, the degree of expectation suggested by the presence or absence of the transition of the change effect is different. In other words, not only the display mode itself, but also the process of change contributes to the suggestion of the degree of expectation.

In the gaming machine of this embodiment, rather than the display mode of FIG.
The suggested degree of expectation is higher when the display mode is directly changed to that shown in FIG. 49(e) without going through the change effect. The change effect can be executed a plurality of times, and even when the predetermined display mode is finally achieved, the suggested degree of expectation may be reduced each time the change effect is executed.

In addition, the number of cases where the display mode of FIG. 49(e) is changed through the change effect is higher than the case where the display mode changes directly to the display mode of FIG. 49(e) without going through the change effect. That is, the frequency of occurrence is high but the degree of expectation that is suggested is low when the change performance is passed, and the frequency of occurrence is low but the degree of expectation that is suggested is high when the change performance is not passed.

Note that the change effect is a button effect, but an effect other than the button effect may be used. again,
The standby notification display 631 may be changed without a special effect such as a change effect.
Further, the change in display mode is not limited to the change in color shown in FIG. 49, but may be any change in size, shape, display position, or the like. In addition, when a plurality of effect buttons 25 and an operation unit (such as a lever) other than the effect button 25 are provided, it is possible to notify the type of operation unit to be operated by the standby notification display 631, and the change effect The operation unit to be operated may be changed.

FIG. 50 shows an example of button effects foretold by the standby notification display 631 .
First, as shown in FIG. 50(a), the standby notification display 631 moves to the center of the display area.
As shown in 0(b), a promotion image 632 prompting the operation of the effect button 25 is displayed. Also, with the start of the button effect, the number of button effects indicated by the standby notification display 631 is decremented by 1, but since the number of button effects indicated by the standby notification display 631 remains one, the display of the standby notification display 631 is maintained. be done.

Then, when the player operates the production button 25, a corresponding display 633 for suggesting or notifying the variation mode and result of the special figure variation display game being executed is displayed as shown in FIG. 50(c).
Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 50(d), the standby notification display 631 moves to the center of the display area,
As shown in FIG. 50(e), a promotion image 632 prompting the operation of the effect button 25 is obtained. In addition, since the number of button effects indicated by the standby notification display 631 is decremented by 1 with the start of the button effect and becomes 0, the standby notification display 631 is erased.
When the player operates the production button 25, as shown in FIG. 50(f), a corresponding display 633 is displayed to suggest or notify the variation mode and result of the special figure variation display game being executed.

It should be noted that although the case where multiple button effects foretold by the standby notification display 631 are executed in one special figure fluctuation display game is shown here, multiple button effects are executed over a plurality of special figure fluctuation display games. You can let it be.
Further, after part of the button effect notified by the standby notification display 631 is executed, a notification effect may be performed to increase the number of button effects announced by the standby notification display 631 .

Further, the button effects shown in FIGS. In this case, the suggested degree of expectation may differ depending on whether the standby notification display 631 is included or not.
Further, when the button effect is executed, the ratio of the case where the standby notification display 631 is performed and the case where it is not performed can be set arbitrarily. For example, the ratio of when the standby notification display 631 is performed and when it is not performed may be the same.
Further, in a state where execution of a button effect is announced by the standby notification display 631, a button effect separate from the button effect announced by the standby notification display 631 may be executed.
In this case, the number of times of execution notified by the standby notification display 631 is not decreased due to the execution of the button effect.

Also, the standby notification display 631 may be one that gives notice of execution other than the button effect, and may be one that gives notice that some kind of effect will be executed. For example, it may be foretelling the execution of the look-ahead effect, in this case, it may be foretelling the number of starting memories to be targeted for the look-ahead effect, and the display mode of the decorative special figure starting memory display as the look-ahead effect It is also possible to foresee the number of times of possibility of change.

Also, the standby notification display 631 capable of notifying that the execution of the predetermined effect is waiting has been described, but if the standby notification display 631 does not notify that the execution of the predetermined effect is waiting, It can be used as a suggestive display capable of suggesting the degree of expectation, which is the high possibility of a special result.
That is, the display suggests the degree of expectation depending on the display mode, and even when the display mode is the same, the display can be such that the degree of expectation that is suggested differs depending on the process leading up to the display mode.
Even if the function of suggesting only the degree of expectation is provided in this way, the degree of expectation to be suggested is different even if the display mode is the same.

Also, as shown in FIG. 50(g), in addition to the promotion image 632, a time value display 651 indicating the time value during which the effect button 25 can be operated may be displayed. In the time value display shown here, as the time value for which the effect button 25 can be operated decreases, the length of the bar-shaped display indicated by hatching becomes shorter. Further, the display mode (shape, color, etc.) of the time value display 651 may be changed depending on whether or not there is a standby button effect, and the number of times of the standby button effect.
Further, as shown in FIG. 50(g), for the waiting button effect in the standby notification display 631, a time value display 651 of the waiting button effect may be performed. In this case, the time value display 651 may be performed for all waiting button effects, or the time value display 651 may be displayed for some button effects such as button effects to be executed next and highly anticipated button effects. You can do it. Alternatively, a temporary time value display 651 unrelated to the actual time value may be displayed.

In addition, in the above-described embodiment, regardless of the presence or absence of the waiting button effect and the number of times of the waiting button effect, the time during which the effect button 25 can be operated in the button effect is set. The time during which the effect button 25 can be operated in the button effect may be varied according to the presence or absence of the waiting button effect and the number of times of the waiting button effect. For example, when there is a waiting button effect, the time during which the effect button 25 can be operated in the button effect may be shorter or longer than when there is no waiting button effect. Further, the time during which the effect button 25 can be operated in the button effect may be shortened or lengthened as the number of times of the waiting button effect increases. When performing the time value display 651 in a format in which the length of the bar-shaped display is shortened as the time value during which the effect button 25 can be operated decreases, the shorter the time during which the effect button 25 can be operated in the button effect, the longer the bar-shaped display. The display of becomes shorter and the speed becomes faster.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, regardless of the presence or absence of the waiting button effect and the number of times of the waiting button effect, the corresponding display 633 executed in response to the operation of the effect button 25 in the button effect Although the execution time is set, the execution time of the correspondence display 633 may be changed according to the presence or absence of waiting button effects and the number of times of waiting button effects. For example, when there is a waiting button effect, the execution time of the corresponding display 633 may be shorter than when there is no waiting button effect. Also, the execution time of the correspondence display 633 may be shortened as the number of times of waiting button effects increases.

Also, the execution time may be varied according to the display contents of the correspondence display 633 . For example, the correspondence display 633 with a high degree of expectation may take longer to execute than the correspondence display 633 with a low degree of expectation.
In addition, depending on the execution time of the button effect, the time when the effect button 25 can be operated and the corresponding display 6
33 may have different execution times. For example, the button effect executed in the latter half of the special figure fluctuation display game is the production button 2 rather than the button production executed in the first half of the special figure fluctuation display game.
5 and the execution time of the correspondence display 633 may be longer. The division between the first half and the second half of the special figure fluctuation display game may be the first half and the second half of the fluctuation time, or the first half before the occurrence of the reach state and the second half after the occurrence of the reach state. In addition to this, the execution time may be varied according to the presence or absence of waiting button effects and the number of times of waiting button effects.

Further, the display mode (shape, color, etc.) of the standby notification display 631 is not a single display mode, but may be a plurality of display modes. Furthermore, it may be possible to change the display mode. Also, depending on the display mode of the standby notification display 631, it is possible to suggest or notify about the waiting effect. For example, depending on the display mode of the standby notification display 631, the corresponding display 6
The degree of expectation indicated by 33 may be suggested.
Furthermore, the display mode of the standby notification display 631 may be changed according to the change in the display content around the standby notification display 631 . Also, the standby notification display 631 may be a transparent display. By doing so, it is possible to prevent the continuously displayed standby notification display 631 from lowering the visibility and decorativeness of the effect being executed.

51 and 52 show another example of the standby notification display.
In this example, as shown in FIG.
35, and if this panel 635 is completely removed, the announced button effect will be executed. When the player operates the production button 25, the panel 635
can be erased, and an operation right for erasing the panel 635 is given a predetermined number of times. Here, the right to operate four times is given, and the number of panels 635 is the same as the number of times of right to operate. In other words, the display on the panel 635 makes a standby notification display indicating that the execution of the button effect for operating the effect button 25 is waiting and the number of times of operation right.

As shown in FIG. 51(b), at the timing of the first operation, a promotion image 632 prompting the operation of the effect button 25 is displayed, and the remaining number of possible operations is displayed. When the player operates the effect button 25, an effect display 636 is displayed on a panel 635 which is erased as shown in FIG. 51(c), and the panel 635 is erased as shown in FIG. 51(d).

Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 51(e), when the second operation timing comes, the production button 25
A promotion image 632 prompting the operation of is displayed, and the remaining number of possible operations is displayed.
When the player operates the production button 25, the panel 63 is erased as shown in FIG. 51(f).
5, an effect display 636 is displayed, and the panel 635 is erased as shown in FIG. 51(g). Here, two panels 635 are erased simultaneously.

Next, as shown in FIG. 51(h), at the timing of the third operation, a promotion image 632 prompting the operation of the effect button 25 is displayed, and the remaining number of possible operations is displayed. When the player operates the effect button 25, the panel 635 is erased as shown in FIG. 51(i).
51(j), the panel 635 is erased as shown in FIG. 51(j). This clears all panels 635, indicating that the given mission was successful. In addition, it is indicated that the button effect associated with the success of the mission is waiting.

After that, as shown in FIG. 52(a), when it comes to the fourth operation timing, the effect button 25
A promotion image 632 prompting the operation of is displayed, and the remaining number of possible operations is displayed.
As mentioned above, the mission has already been successful, but the production continues for the number of times that it was originally planned. When the player operates the production button 25, FIG.
As shown in (b), an effect display 636 is made, and as shown in FIG. 52(c), it is continuously shown that the button effect associated with the success of the mission is waiting.
In addition, when the mission has already succeeded but the number of possible operations remains, an effect different from the mission may be performed by operating the production button 25 according to the remaining number of possible operations.
When all the operation rights notified by the standby notification display 631 are exhausted, the button effect associated with the success of the mission is started as shown in FIG. 52(d).

As shown in FIGS. 52(e) and 52(f), the standby notification display 631 has a plurality of display modes, and the degree of expectation suggested by the display mode is different. Further, FIG. 52(g)
As shown in , the number of times of operation rights may differ, and the number of panels 635 forming the standby notification display 631 is also set in accordance with the number of times of operation rights.

FIG. 53 also shows another example of the standby notification display.
In this example, as shown in FIG. 53(a), a reel display 637 imitating a reel on which a plurality of symbols are displayed is provided, and the player operates the effect button 25 to change the reel display 637.
is stopped and the pattern simulating the performance button 25 stops, an acquisition performance in which the operation right is given in the subsequent performance is executed, and the number of times of the operation right acquired in this acquisition performance is displayed by a standby notification display 631. It's like

As shown in FIG. 53(b), the variable display of the reel display 637 is started, and when the player operates the effect button 25, the variable display stops as shown in FIG. 53(c). Here, the display of "x" is stopped, indicating that the operation right could not be obtained.
Next, the variable display of the reel display 637 is started as shown in FIG. 53(d), and when the player operates the effect button 25, the variable display stops as shown in FIG. 53(e). Here, a display imitating the production button 25 is stopped, indicating that the operation right has been acquired. Accompanied by acquisition of this operation right, a standby notification display 631 is displayed.

After that, the acquisition effect progresses as described above, and the operation right is acquired five times as shown in FIG. 53(f). The display mode of the standby notification display 631 changes depending on the number of times the operation right has been acquired, and the display mode is different for 1 to 4 times, 5 to 9 times, and 10 or more times. .

When the acquisition performance ends, the notification performance using the acquired operation right is started. When the notification effect is started, as shown in FIG. 53(g), the standby notification display 631 moves upward in the display area and is arranged in the horizontal direction. Then, the standby notification display 631 at the left end moves to the center of the display area and changes to a promotion image 632 prompting the operation of the effect button 25, and when the player operates the effect button 25, as shown in FIG. 53(h). A correspondence display 633 corresponding to the operation is performed. After that, the same effect is repeated until all the operation rights indicated by the standby notification display 631 are consumed.

Note that the contents of the standby notification display may be other than those described above. For example, in the above example, it is notified that the execution of the button effect involving the player's operation is waiting, but it is also possible to notify that the effect that does not involve the player's operation is also waiting. can be Figure 5
As shown in 4(a), the types of characters appearing in the subsequent development, the content of the effect to be executed, and the like may be notified. In this case, the execution may be displayed in chronological order, or may be displayed independently of the chronological order.

Moreover, as shown in FIG.54(b), it may be made to show that addition of the execution frequency of the special-figure variation display game made into a time saving state or a high probability state is waiting. In this example, it is in a time saving state, and the remaining number display section 64 indicating the number of executions of the special figure variation display game that can be executed in the time saving state
In 1, it is shown that the special figure variation display game will end after six more executions.
In the standby notification display 631, it is displayed that 10 additions, 20 additions and 5 additions are waiting as the additional value of the number of special figure fluctuation display games that can be executed in the time saving state. ,
These are sequentially added to the remaining count display section 641 . The standby notification display 631 does not have to clearly notify the number of times, and may indicate that the addition will be performed or the possibility that the addition will be performed.
In addition, the number of executable games such as AT state, RT state, or ART state in the slot machine can also be suggested to be added by the similar standby notification display 631 .

Also, as shown in FIG. 54(c), when executing the look-ahead effect that changes the display mode of the decoration special figure start memory display, the character acting on the decoration special figure start memory display is displayed in standby notification display 6
31 may be displayed.
Depending on the type of character acting on the decorative special figure starting memory display, the possibility of execution of the look-ahead performance and the level of expectation indicated by the look-ahead performance are made to differ, and a standby notification display 631 is provided.
By keeping the character waiting at , it is possible to suggest what kind of content the read-ahead effect is waiting to start.

Further, the standby notification is not limited to being displayed on the display device 41.
Alternatively, it may be indicated by the light emission of an LED separately, the position and movement of the operable character, the light emission mode, or the like. In other words, not only the display device 41 but also light-emitting means such as LEDs, operable accessories, and the like can be included as notification means capable of executing predetermined standby notification including the standby notification display 631 .

From the above, it is possible to execute a predetermined notification in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and can generate a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result. Informing means (display device 41) and production control means (production control device 300) for controlling game production, the production control means, when execution of a specific production is scheduled, the specific A standby notification (standby notification display 631) that can notify that the execution of the performance is waiting can be executed by the notification means, and the degree of expectation of special results can be suggested by the display mode of the standby notification, and the standby notification The degree of expectation to be suggested is different between the case where the predetermined notification mode has been maintained from the start of the notification and the case where the notification mode has changed to the predetermined notification mode after the start of the standby notification.
Therefore, even if the notification mode is the same, the suggested degree of expectation is different, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Also, the effect control means can execute a specific effect a plurality of times, and can suggest the number of executions of the specific effect by the display mode of the standby notification. Therefore, it is possible for the player to grasp the number of executions of the specific effect, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the effect control means changes the number of executions of the specific effect suggested from the start of the standby notification to the predetermined number of times, and the number of executions of the specific effect suggested after the start of the standby notification is changed to the predetermined number of times. In other words, the degree of expectation implied by is different from the case where Therefore, even if the number of times of execution is the same, the suggested degree of expectation is different, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, an operation means (effect button 25) that can be operated by the player is provided, and the effect control means is capable of executing a change effect, which is an effect that can change the notification mode of the standby notification based on the operation of the operation means. Become. Therefore, it is possible to change the standby notification according to the player's operation, so that the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the performance control means makes the suggested degree of expectation different depending on whether or not the change performance has been performed. Therefore, even if the notification mode is the same, the suggested degree of expectation is different, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, in a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generating a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, a notification means capable of executing a predetermined notification ( Display device 41) and effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect of the game, and the effect control means controls the execution of the specific effect when execution of the specific effect is scheduled. (standby notification display 631) can be executed by the notification means, and the notification mode of the standby notification can suggest the degree of expectation for a special result, and a specific effect is executed. In this case, the probability of executing the standby notification and the probability of not executing the standby notification are the same, and the degree of expectation suggested by the presence or absence of the execution of the standby notification is made different. Therefore, the player pays attention to the standby notification, and the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and can generate a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, an effect control means ( The effect control device 300) is provided, and the effect control means can execute a suggestive effect (standby notification display 631) that can suggest the degree of expectation for a special result, and in a predetermined effect mode from the start of the suggestive effect. The degree of expectation to be suggested is made different between the case where the suggested presentation is present and the case where the presentation mode is changed to the predetermined presentation mode after the suggested presentation is started. Therefore, even if the performance mode is the same, the suggested degree of expectation is different, and the interest in the game can be improved.

Further, an operation means (an effect button 25) that can be operated by the player is provided, and the effect control means is capable of executing a change effect, which is an effect that can change the effect mode of the suggestive effect based on the operation of the operation means. Become. Therefore, since the suggestive effect can be changed in accordance with the player's operation, the interest in the game can be improved.

In addition, the performance control means makes the suggested degree of expectation different depending on whether or not the change performance has been performed. Therefore, even if the performance mode is the same, the suggested degree of expectation is different, and the interest in the game can be improved.

A display device 41 capable of displaying information about a game in a gaming machine capable of generating a state advantageous to the player when the game is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and the result of the game is a special result. , and an effect control means (effect control device 300) that controls the effect of the game, and an operation means (effect button 25) that can be operated by the player, and the effect control means is a specific operation that involves the operation of the operation means. When the performance is scheduled to be executed, a standby notification display 631 capable of informing that the execution of the specific performance is waiting can be displayed on the display device 41, and in the specific performance, the operation means A promotion image 632 prompting an operation is displayed, and the standby notification display 631 is a display imitating the operation means, and has an additional display indicating that it is different from the promotion image 632. . Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from erroneously recognizing the promotion image 632 and the standby notification display 631 .

Next, the display mode of the identification information of the decoration special figure variation display game when the specific effect is executed as the effect of the special figure variation display game will be described. The specific effect is an effect performed in a state in which the display mode of the identification information is different from that in the case of not being the specific effect, and the effect display using each of the identification information is performed. In the specific effect, the display mode of the variable display of the identification information is different from the display mode in which the variable display is performed by moving from top to bottom at high speed in a state that is difficult to see, which is the normal display mode. You could say it's a performance. In this embodiment, as a specific effect,
It is possible to execute a first specific effect and a second specific effect in which the display mode of the identification information is different from that in the case of not being the specific effect.

55 and 56 show an example of the first specific effect. As shown in FIG. 55(a), each piece of identification information in this embodiment includes a character portion 87a, a character portion 87b, and a decorative portion 87c attached to the character portion 87b. In this embodiment, numbers are used as characters, and the character portion 87b can also be said to be a number portion. In the variable display when the specific effect is not being executed, the identification information that is displayed integrally with the character portion 87a, the character portion 87b, and the decoration portion 87c is variably displayed. That is, when the specific effect is not being executed, the display includes at least the character portion 87b and the decoration portion 87c, and here, the display mode further includes the character portion 87a.

After that, as shown in FIG. 55(b), when the same identification information temporarily stops in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, a reach state occurs. In the temporarily stopped state, the character part 8 of the identification information
7a, the character portion 87b, and the decoration portion 87c are displayed as if they were shaking, indicating that they are not completely stopped.

As shown in FIG. 55(c), when the performance progresses after reaching the ready-to-win state and the specific performance is started, the character portion 87a is erased from the identification information, and the character portion 87b is made easy to recognize. . In the first specific effect, the decorative portion 87c is also displayed in addition to the character portion 87b. In this effect, first, the character portion 87a of the identification information of the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area is erased and displayed by the character portion 87b and the decoration portion 87c, and displayed in a reduced size above the display area. At this time, the character portion 87b and the decoration portion 87c are displayed so as to sway to indicate that they are not completely stopped.
In addition, in the medium fluctuation display area, the identification information displayed by the character portion 87b and the decorative portion 87c is displayed as a rotating display that extends vertically and is positioned at the center of the character portion 87b in the horizontal direction as indicated by the dotted line in the drawing. It is displayed to change while rotating around the axis.

The decorative portion 87c is arranged at a position not on the extension line of the rotation shaft and in the lower right front side of the front facing character portion 87b when viewed from the front side.
As a result, as shown in FIG. 55(d), when the character portion 87b faces right, the decorative portion 87
c is located on the right side of the character portion 87b, and when the character portion 87b faces backward as shown in FIG. As shown, when the character portion 87b faces left, the decorative portion 87c is positioned on the left side of the character portion 87b.
In particular, when Chinese numerals are used as the character portion 87b as in this embodiment, the character portion 8
It may be difficult to tell whether 7b is facing forward or backward,
By providing the decorative portion 87c, it becomes possible to easily determine in which direction the rotating character portion 87b faces.

As shown in FIG. 55(g), before and after the character portion 87b faces the front, the rotation speed is reduced, and an effect is performed as to whether or not the variable display is to be stopped. Also at this time, the decorative portion 87c is displayed as if it were swinging, indicating that it has not stopped completely. If the rotation ends in the state shown in FIG. 55(g), the special figure variation display game ends as a result of losing. In this example, the rotation does not end, and as shown in FIG. 55(h), the identification information changes to "3" and the rotation continues.

Then, as shown in FIG. 55(i), the character portion 87b faces backward, and FIG.
After the character portion 87b faces leftward as shown in FIG. 56(a), the rotational speed decreases with the character portion 87b facing forward as shown in FIG. 56(a). The rotation does not end here either, and FIG.
), it changes to the next identification information “four” and continues to rotate.

After that, as shown in FIG. 56(c), the character portion 87b faces backward, and
After the character portion 87b faces to the left as shown in FIG. 56(e), the rotational speed decreases when the character portion 87b faces to the front as shown in FIG. 56(e). If the rotation does not end here, it stops after changing to the next identification information of "five", resulting in a deviation.

In this example, the rotation ends here, and all the identification information is temporarily stopped in the state shown in FIG. 56(e). At this time, the character portion 87b and the decoration portion 87c are displayed so as to sway to indicate that they are not completely stopped.
Then, as shown in FIG. 56(f), the identification information of the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area return to their original positions, and the display of the character portion 87a is resumed as shown in FIG. 56(g). Also at this time, the character portion 87a, the character portion 87b, and the decoration portion 87c are displayed so as to sway, indicating that they are not completely stopped.
After that, as shown in FIG. 56(h), the variable display is stopped and the stop time for displaying the result is reached.

As described above, in the first specific effect, there is no period in which the identification information becomes invisible, and the identification information is always visible.
In such an effect, by displaying the decoration part 87c, the state of the character part 87b and whether or not it is a temporary stop can be made easy to understand, and the effect can be easily understood, thereby improving the interest of the game. be able to.
Among the identification information, the character portion 87a contains the most complicated drawing contents.
Since the character portion 87a is not displayed, the amount of data necessary for representing the three-dimensional action and the burden of control processing are reduced in the effect of displaying the three-dimensional action as described above. can be realized.

FIG. 57 shows another example of the first specific effect. As shown in FIG. 57(a), the same identification information temporarily stops in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area to enter the reach state, and as shown in FIG. 57(b), the first specific effect is started and the identification information , the character portion 87a is deleted. At this time, the character portion 87b and the decoration portion 87c are displayed so as to sway to indicate that they are not completely stopped.

The identification information of the left change display area and the right change display area is displayed in reduced size above the display area. In addition, the identification information in the medium-variation display area changes through a state in which consecutive identification information is displayed in multiples. First, as shown in FIG. The information is displayed, and as shown in FIG. 57(c), the identification information of "second" and the identification information of "three" which is the next identification information are displayed in a multiplex manner, and as shown in FIG. 57(d). Then, the identification information of "two" is erased and only the identification information of "three" is left. In this process also, the character portion 87b and the decoration portion 87c are displayed as if they were shaking, indicating that they have not stopped completely.

In addition, in a state where the identification information is displayed in a multiplexed manner, the decorative portion 8 is added to each piece of identification information.
7c is attached.
As a result, the decorative portion 87c is also displayed in multiples, so that it is possible to easily recognize that the identification information is displayed in multiples.
In particular, as shown in FIG. 57(c), even in a state where one identification information "three" and the other identification information "two" are almost overlapped, the identification information is multiplexed due to the displacement of the decorative portion 87c. It can be made easy to recognize what is displayed.

If the change ends in the state of FIG. 57(d), it becomes a result of losing and the special figure variation display game ends. In this example, the change does not end, and the next identification information "four" is displayed multiplexed as shown in FIG. ” is erased and only the identification information of “four” is left. If the change does not end here, it stops after changing to the next identification information of "five", resulting in a failure.

In this example, the change ends here, and all the identification information is temporarily stopped in the state shown in FIG. 57(f). At this time, the character portion 87b and the decoration portion 87c are displayed so as to sway to indicate that they are not completely stopped.
Then, as shown in FIG. 57(g), the identification information of the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area return to their original positions, and the display of the character portion 87a is resumed as shown in FIG. 57(h). Also at this time, the character portion 87a, the character portion 87b, and the decoration portion 87c are displayed so as to sway, indicating that they are not completely stopped.
After that, as shown in FIG. 57(i), the variable display is stopped and the stop time for displaying the result is reached.

In order to make it easier to recognize that the identification information is displayed in multiples, the position of the decorative portion 87c is made different for each piece of identification information, so that the misalignment of the decorative portion 87c can be easily recognized. Also good. In particular, the decorative portion 87c between pieces of identification information that may be displayed multiple times
are preferably positioned differently.

FIG. 58 also shows another example of the first specific effect. As shown in FIG. 58(a), the same identification information is temporarily stopped in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, and after the ready-to-win state is reached, the first specific effect is started. In this first specific effect, the display area is divided into four areas as shown in FIG. 58(b), and a decoration special figure variation display game is displayed in each area based on identification information including a character portion 87b and a decoration portion 87c. When the result is a big hit, one of them is made to be a special result, and when the result is a loss, all of them are made to be a losing result.
Also, in each area, the image is displayed independently in the background, but the image in each area uses the same series of images, and the images in each area are displayed at different timings by changing the playback timing. I'm trying to

As shown in FIG. 58(c), first, the upper left area is closed up and the variable display is stopped. Here, the deviation result is temporarily stopped and displayed. Also, at this time, the image of the lower right area is set to the timing at which the image of the tiger forming the specific image 99 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 58(d), the upper right area is closed up and the variable display is stopped. Here too, the result of deviation is temporarily stopped and displayed. Also, at this time, the image of the lower left area is set to the timing at which the image of the tiger forming the specific image 99 is displayed.

Next, as shown in FIG. 58(e), the lower left area is closed up and the variable display is stopped. Here too, the result of deviation is temporarily stopped and displayed. Also, at this time, the image of the upper right area is set to the timing at which the image of the tiger forming the specific image 99 is displayed.
Next, as shown in FIG. 58(f), the lower right area is closed up and the variable display is stopped. Here, the special result is temporarily stopped and displayed. Also, at this time, the image of the upper left area is set to the timing at which the image of the tiger forming the specific image 99 is displayed.

After that, as shown in FIG. 58(g), the identification information of the left varying display area and the right varying display area return to their original positions, and the varying display stops. A special game state fanfare effect is started.
In this example, the special figure variation display game is ended without restarting the display of the character portion 87a when the special result is temporarily stopped. 8
The display of 7a may be resumed. Of course, in the examples of FIGS. 55 to 57, the special figure variation display game may be ended without restarting the display of the character portion 87a at the temporary stop of the result as in this example.

As described above, in this presentation, the order of close-up of each area is the upper left area, the upper right area, the lower left area, and the lower right area. The timing for reproducing the video is set so that the regions are displayed in the order of the area, the lower left area, the upper right area, and the upper left area.
The series of images displayed in the background are an image of the sun peeking through clouds, an image of thunder, an image of clouds hanging over the moon, an image of the moon and stars, an image of a tiger forming the specific image 99, an image of a shooting star, and an image of rain. , and images of the sun. The playback start positions in FIG. 4B are set to have later timings in the order of the upper left area, upper right area, lower left area, and lower right area.

More specifically, as shown in FIG. 58(b), at the timing of starting video playback, the close-up of the lower right area, which is the fourth close-up, is performed before the specific image 99 is displayed in the upper left area. Playback is started from the previous point for the amount of time required to start up.
Also, in the upper right area, reproduction is started from a point earlier than the timing at which the specific image 99 is displayed by the time necessary to start the close-up of the lower left area, which is the third close-up.
In addition, in the lower left area, reproduction is started from a point before the timing at which the specific image 99 is displayed by the time necessary to start the close-up in the upper right area, which is the second close-up.
Also, in the lower right area, reproduction is started from a point before the timing at which the specific image 99 is displayed by the time necessary to start the close-up of the upper left area, which is the first close-up.

By doing so, the timing of the close-up and the timing of displaying the specific image 99 match, and the production effect can be enhanced.
In addition, it is possible to make it easy to understand that the decoration special figure variation display game is being displayed independently in each area by the fact that the picture of each field becomes the picture which differs.

The order of close-ups and the display order of the specific images 99 can be arbitrarily set, and the specific images 99 may be displayed in the area to be closed-up.
Further, although the specific image 99 is part of a series of images, it may be an image independent of the series of images, such as a cut-in image. In this case, the background image may be any image, and only the display timing of the cut-in image may be controlled.

FIG. 59 shows an example of the second specific effect out of the specific effects. As shown in FIG. 59(a), the same identification information temporarily stops in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area to enter a reach state, and when the specific effect is started, the left fluctuation is shown in FIG. 59(b). The identification information of the display area and the right-changing display area is reduced and displayed above the display area.
As for the identification information of the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, the character portion 87a is erased and the character portion 87b and decoration portion 87c are displayed. At this time, the character portion 87b and the decoration portion 87c are displayed so as to sway to indicate that they are not completely stopped.

The identification information of the medium-variation display area is gradually erased and invisible as shown in FIG. 59(b), gradually partially displayed as shown in FIG. As shown in (d), the whole is displayed and becomes visible. In this second specific effect, only the character portion 87b is displayed and the decorative portion 87c is not displayed. In addition, the character portion 87b is displayed as if it were shaking to indicate that it has not stopped completely. If it stops in this state, it will be a loss result and the special figure fluctuation display game will end.

In this example, the fluctuation does not end, and as shown in FIG. 59(e), the effect display 89a is performed so as to sandwich the medium fluctuation display area, and as shown in FIG. 59(f), the medium fluctuation display area identification information An effect display 89b is performed in which the is destroyed, and an effect is performed in which the identification information is rendered invisible.
The effect display 89a shown in FIG. 59(e) indicates the range in which the next effect display 89b shown in FIG. 59(f) is displayed. That is, it indicates that the next effect display 89b is displayed between the two effect displays 89a in FIG. 59(e).
By performing the effect display 89a as shown in FIG. 59(e), it is possible to show the player to which position the line of sight should be directed in the next development, thereby enhancing the effect of the production and enhancing the interest of the game. can be improved.
Further, by performing the effect display 89a as shown in FIG. 59(e), it becomes possible to suggest that the identification information sandwiched between the effect displays 89a will be in an invisible state.

After that, as shown in FIG. 59(g), the next identification information "four" is gradually partially displayed, and the whole becomes visible as shown in FIG. 59(h).
If the change does not end here, it stops after changing to the next identification information of "five", resulting in a deviation.
In this example, the fluctuation ends here, and as shown in FIG. 59(i), the identification information of the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area return to their original positions, the fluctuation display stops, and the stop time elapses. Figure 5 later
As shown in 9(j), a special game state fanfare effect is started.

In addition, in FIGS. 59(e) and (f), an effect accompanied by effect displays 89a and 89b is performed when the identification information becomes invisible, but FIGS. The character portion 87b may gradually become partially invisible by performing the reverse effect.
In addition, in FIGS. 59(c) and (d), when the identification information becomes visible from the invisible state, the display is gradually rendered visible. Figure 59 (e
), the effect display 89a, 89b is performed on the character portion 87b by performing the effect opposite to that shown in (f).
You may make it the state which can be visually recognized with this.

Moreover, the next effect display 8 is displayed within the range indicated by the effect display 89a shown in FIG. 59(e).
9b is displayed, but it is sufficient if the center of the next effect display 89b is within the range indicated by the effect display 89a shown in FIG. 59(e).
The next effect display 89b may extend outside the range indicated by a.
Also, the identification information of the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area may be displayed only with the character part 87b without displaying the decoration part 87c.

Further, as shown in FIG. 60(a), the effect display 89a displayed so as to sandwich the middle fluctuation display area is the board decoration device 46 provided above the display device 41 and the display device 41 provided below the display device 41. It is displayed so as to connect the board effect device 44 .
As the board effecting device 44 rises as shown in FIG. 60(b) from the state shown in FIG. 60(a), the identification information rises and the effect display 89a retracts. As shown in FIG. 60(a), as the board effect device 44 descends, the identification information may descend and the effect display 89a may extend.
By doing so, the operation of the board effect device 44 can be interlocked with the identification information and the effect display 89a, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Further, as shown in FIG. 60(c), effect display 89a is performed so as to sandwich the identification information of the left fluctuation display area, and as shown in FIG. 89b may be displayed to make the identification information invisible.
Of course, it is also possible to display the effect display 89a so as to sandwich the identification information of the right fluctuating display area and display the next effect display 89b in the right fluctuating display area.
Further, as shown in FIG. 60(e), an effect display 89a is displayed so as to sandwich a plurality of pieces of identification information, and as shown in FIG.
It is also possible to display b.

Further, even if the effect display 89a as shown in FIG. 60(a) is displayed, the next effect display 89b may not be displayed and the identification information may not be visible.
Further, the possibility that the next effect display will be displayed may differ depending on the color, shape, etc. of the effect display 89a as shown in FIG. 60(a).
The effect display 89a is not limited to the second specific effect, and any effect may be used as long as the effect display 89b is displayed at a predetermined position.

In the second specific effect shown above, the process of forming identification information such as the process in which the identification information becomes visible from the invisible state, and the identification information from the visible state to the invisible state It includes a process of destroying identification information such as a process. Although both processes are included in the example of FIG. 59, any one process may be included.
In this way, when the identification information includes the process of making it invisible, only the character portion 87b is displayed without displaying the decoration portion 87c, thereby eliminating unnecessary decoration and recognizing the character portion 87b. By making it easier to understand the contents of the presentation, the amusement of the game is improved.

In view of the above, in a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generating a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, display means for displaying a game (Display device) 41 and an effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the display of the display means, the effect control means displays a decoration game that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information corresponding to the game. means, and when the specific effect is not being executed, each piece of identification information is decorated in a display mode including a number part (character part 87b) and a decoration part 87c attached to the number part When the game is displayed and the specific effect is being executed, the effect display using each of the identification information is performed, and during the execution of the first specific effect among the specific effects, the effect display The identification information is displayed by the number part and the decoration part 87c, and the identification information in the effect display is displayed by the number part during execution of the second specific effect among the specific effects.
Therefore, it is possible to change the display mode of the identification information according to the type of presentation, and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, it is possible to select an appropriate display mode of the identification information according to the type of presentation, thereby improving the visibility of the identification information.

Further, when the specific effect is not being executed, a display mode is adopted in which the character portion 87a is further included in the identification information.
Therefore, it is possible to improve the decorativeness of the identification information.

Further, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generates a state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, a display device 41 for displaying a game, A presentation control means (a presentation control device 300) for controlling the display of the device 41 is provided, and the presentation control means displays on the display device 41 a decoration game that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information corresponding to the game. When the specific effect is not being executed, the decoration game is displayed in a display mode in which each piece of identification information includes a character portion 87a, a character portion 87b, and a decoration portion 87c attached to the character portion 87b. When the specific effect is being executed, the decoration game is displayed in a display mode in which each of the identification information does not include the character portion 87a, and the effect display using the identification information is performed. During the execution of the first specific effect, the identification information in the effect display is displayed by the character part 87b and the decoration part 87c,
During execution of the second specific effect among the specific effects, the identification information in the effect display is displayed only by the character portion 87b.
Therefore, it is possible to change the display mode of the identification information according to the type of presentation, and to improve the interest of the game. In addition, it is possible to select an appropriate display mode of the identification information according to the type of presentation, thereby improving the visibility of the identification information.

Further, the first specific effect is a effect in which the identification information in the effect display rotates.
He is trying for c to be distribute|arranged to the positions other than the extension line of the rotating shaft when the said identification information rotates.
Therefore, it is possible to grasp the rotation state of the identification information from the position of the decorative portion 87c, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

Also, the first specific effect is an effect in which one or a plurality of pieces of identification information are displayed multiplexed in the effect display.
Therefore, the presence of the decorative portion 87c makes it easy to understand that the identification information is displayed in multiples, and the amusement of the game can be improved.

In addition, the second specific effect is an effect in which the identification information is changed from an invisible state to a visible state in the effect display or an effect in which the identification information is changed from the visible state to the invisible state in the effect display. becomes.
Therefore, by displaying only the character portion 87b, the character portion 87b can be displayed without unnecessary decoration.
The recognition of b is enhanced, and the content of the presentation is easily understood, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

Next, the setting of the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the standby memory display unit 83 and the memory display during execution displayed on the memory display unit 84 during execution will be described.
Decoration special figure start storage display, it is possible to suggest or inform the information of the result obtained by the prior determination and the variation pattern by changing the display mode.
In addition, by changing the display mode of the memory display during execution, it is possible to suggest or notify the results obtained by the preliminary judgment and the judgment at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game and information on the fluctuation pattern. .

As shown in FIG. 61 (a), in the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display and the running memory display,
Six display modes of display modes 1 to 6 are provided. These are designed to suggest different expectations of the jackpot. Note that the display mode 2 is a blinking display mode.
In addition, as shown in FIG. 61(b), five of A to E are provided for the change effect which is the effect at the timing when the display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display and the running memory display can be changed.
The change effect A does not perform any effect, and can be executed both when the memory display is changed and when it is not performed.
The change performance B is a performance in which the character acts on the memory display to change the memory display, and the change performance C is a performance in which the character acts on the memory display as in the change performance B but the memory display does not change.
The change effect D is an effect that can be executed only in the memory display during execution, and is an effect in which the memory display during execution changes with a dedicated effect. In addition, the change effect E is also an effect that can be executed only in the memory display during execution, and the same effect as the change effect D is performed, but the memory display during execution does not change.

FIG. 62 shows an example of a change effect. FIGS. 62(a) and 62(b) show an example in which a change effect A is executed in which no effect is performed as a change effect.
First, as shown in FIG. 62(a), when the special figure fluctuation display game ends, there are two starting memories, and the decoration special figure starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory digested first is displayed in the display mode 1. The display mode 3 is the decoration special figure starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory digested second.

When a new special figure fluctuation display game is started from this state, as shown in FIG. It transitions and appears as a running memory display. At this time, the display mode 1 is changed to the display mode 3 by executing the change effect A without any effect.
Also, the decoration special figure starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory digested second shifts to the left within the standby memory display section 83 . At this time, the display mode 3 is executed by executing the change effect A without any effect.
to display mode 5.

FIGS. 62(c) and 62(d) show the case where a change effect B is executed in which the character acts on the memory display to change the memory display as the change effect.
When a new special figure fluctuation display game is started from the state shown in FIG. 62(a), the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory digested first takes over the display mode 1 and displays the memory during execution. Then, it is assumed that the decoration special figure starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory digested second takes over the display mode 3 in the standby memory display unit 83 and is shifted to the left.

Then, as shown in FIG. 62(c), a change effect B in which the character acts on the memory-in-execution display is performed, and thereafter, the display mode of the memory-in-execution display changes as shown in FIG. 62(d).
Also, as shown in FIG. 62(c), a change effect B in which the character acts on the decoration special figure starting memory display is performed, and then the display mode changes as shown in FIG. 62(d).
In the case of change effect C, as shown in FIG. 62(c), the character acts on the memory display, but the display mode does not change.

In addition, FIG. 62(b) shows an example in which the change effect A is executed for both the running memory display and the decorative special figure starting memory display, and FIG. 62(c) shows the running memory display and the decorative special figure starting memory display. Although an example in which the change production B is executed for both is shown, it is not necessary to perform the same change production for both the running memory display and the decoration special figure start memory display, and it is possible to select an arbitrary change production for each. be.

FIG. 62(e) to (h) show a change effect D in which a special effect for the memory display during execution is performed as a change effect and the display mode changes, and a change effect D in which the character acts on the memory display and the memory display during execution changes. We have shown the case where B is executed.
When a new special figure fluctuation display game is started from the state shown in FIG. 62 (a), the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory digested first takes over the display mode 1 and the running memory display , and is in a reach state as shown in FIG. 62(e).

Along with this, as shown in FIG. 62(e), as a change effect D, an effect display, which is an effect dedicated to the display of memory during execution, is performed for the memory display during execution, and the display mode is as shown in FIG. 62(f). changes.
In the case of change effect E, effect display is performed as shown in FIG. 62(e), but the effect is such that the display mode of the memory-in-execution display does not change.
When the ready-to-win effect develops after that, a change effect B is performed as shown in FIG. The display mode of the memory-in-execution display changes.

The change timing of the memory display during execution depends on the effect contents of the special figure variation display game being executed, and the timing may differ depending on the effect to be executed.
FIG. 62(e) to (h) show an example of the case where the SP ready-to-win effect is performed, but depending on the content of the effect of the special figure variation display game, it may change at timings other than those shown here.
By making the change timing dependent on the effect being executed in this way, the change in the memory display during execution and the progress of the effect are linked, and the game is compared to the one that changes at a uniform timing. can improve the interest of

Next, the setting of the effects as described above will be described.
Regarding the setting of the display mode and the change effect of the decoration special figure starting memory display, it is performed when the starting memory occurs.
The items to be set are the initial display mode, which is the display mode when starting the display of the decorative special figure starting memory display, and the display when the corresponding decorative special figure starting memory display is erased as the starting memory is digested. It is the type of change effect executed at each timing when the final display mode which is the mode, the process of change from the initial display mode to the final display mode, the display start of the decoration special figure start memory display and the display mode can be changed.

FIG. 63 shows an example of a selection table for setting the display mode and change effect of the decoration special figure start memory display. This selection table is a selection table used when the starting memory to be consumed thirdly occurs, and is a normal game state that is not a time saving state or a high probability state, and a special figure variation display game in which the result is lost. , and the selection table for the start-up store where SP reach is performed.
The selection of this table is the result of the special figure variation display game and the variation pattern obtained from the contents of the look-ahead stop symbol command and the look-ahead variation pattern command transmitted to the effect control device 300 in the special figure reservation information determination process shown in FIG. based on the information of In addition, information on the game state, information on the number of pending games, and the like are also used.

The display of the decorative special starting memory display and the timing at which the display mode can be changed are at the time of winning, which is the timing when the starting memory is generated, at the time of holding 2 shifts, which is the timing when one starting memory is consumed, and the starting memory is There are 3 timings during the pending 1 shift which are 2 digested timings.
At the time of winning, the game is started without changing effects, so only the display mode is defined, and this display mode is the initial display mode. Further, at the time of hold 2nd shift and at the time of hold 1st shift, the display mode after the elapse of the relevant timing and the type of change effect at the relevant timing are defined. The display mode shown in the column for one shift on hold is the final display mode.

In this selection table, patterns 1 to 80 are prepared as selectable patterns, and one pattern is selected from these by one lottery.
For example, when pattern 1 is selected, it is displayed in display mode 1 at the time of winning, the display mode 1 is maintained by performing change effect A during hold 2 shift, and the change effect A is performed during hold 1 shift and display mode 1 is set so that
When the pattern 59 is selected, it is displayed in the display mode 2 at the time of winning, changed to the display mode 3 by performing the change effect B at the time of the hold 2 shift, and changed to the display mode 4 by performing the change effect A at the time of the hold 1 shift. is set to change to

In addition, the display mode of the memory display during execution and the setting of the change effect are performed when a new special figure fluctuation display game is started.
Since the change timing of the memory display during execution depends on the effect content of the special figure fluctuation display game being executed, the change pattern is determined with the start of the special figure fluctuation display game. It is necessary to set the display mode and change effects.

The items to be set are the initial display mode, which is the display mode when starting to display the memory-in-execution display,
The final display mode, which is the display mode when the memory display during execution is erased with the end of the special figure fluctuation display game, the process of change from the initial display mode to the final display mode, the start and display of the memory display during execution This is the type of change effect that is executed at each timing when the mode can be changed.
In the case of the memory display during execution, the initial display mode, the final display mode, and the process of change are determined by one lottery, and the type of change effect is determined by another lottery.

FIG. 64 shows an example of a selection table for setting the display mode and change effect of the memory display during execution. This selection table is a normal game state that is not a time saving state or a high probability state,
It is a selection table used when a special figure variation display game in which the result is lost is executed and a variation pattern in which SP reach as shown in FIG. 62 is executed is selected.
Selection of this table, the decoration special figure command which is transmitted to production control control equipment 300 with stop design setting processing of Figure 20 and Figure 21, fluctuation command which is transmitted to production control equipment 300 with fluctuation start information setting processing of Figure 22 It is done based on the results of the special figure fluctuation display game and the information on the fluctuation pattern obtained from the contents of. In addition, information on the game state, information on the number of pending games, and the like are also used.

As the timing at which the memory display during execution can be changed, in addition to the shift time, which is the timing when the decorative special figure start memory display transitions to the memory display during execution, as the timing in this variation pattern, at the timing when the reach state occurs When a certain reach occurs, there is provided a timing at the time of SP development, which is the timing of developing into the SP reach state.
In this case, the display mode at the time of shift is the initial display mode, and the display mode at the time of SP development is the final display mode.

In the case of the memory display during execution, as shown in FIG. 64(a), a first selection table for selecting the display mode at each timing and the ) for selecting a change effect at each timing, and a lottery is performed in two stages using a second selection table.
For example, if pattern 1, 11, 17 or 20 is selected in the first selection table shown in FIG. 64(a), then the second selection table shown in FIGS. A change effect at each timing is selected.
Further, when pattern 6 or 15 is selected in the first selection table shown in FIG. 64(a), the second selection table shown in FIGS. A change production is selected.
In this second selection table, items are set with a distribution value of 0 even for the change effects that are not selected. By doing so, the data structure of the plurality of second selection tables becomes the same structure, which facilitates the processing.

It should be noted that here is the selection table for when the SP reach is executed as shown in FIG. The timing and number of these changes differ depending on the content of the effect executed in .
In this way, by making it so that the memory display during execution changes in conjunction with the production of the special figure fluctuation display game, the change in the memory display during execution and the progress of the production are linked, and at uniform timing It is possible to improve the amusement of the game compared to the one that changes.

As described above, in selecting the display mode and change effect of the memory display, in the case of the decorative special figure start memory display, since there are not so many selectable patterns, it is possible to perform a one-stage lottery, This makes it possible to simplify the processing.
On the other hand, in the case of the memory-in-execution display, since there are many types of change effects and the timing of change varies depending on the change pattern, the number of selectable patterns becomes enormous when all combinations are integrated. For this reason, a two-stage lottery is used to prevent the selection table from becoming too large and to reduce the processing load. Of course, the lottery may be performed in a plurality of stages, which is more than two stages.

In addition, as described above, the lottery of the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display is the look-ahead stop symbol command and the look-ahead variation pattern command sent to the effect control device 300 in the special figure reservation information determination process shown in FIG. The lottery of the display mode of the memory display during execution is performed based on the information, the decoration special figure command transmitted to the production control device 300 in the stop symbol setting process of FIG. 20 and FIG. 21, and the fluctuation start information setting of FIG. It is performed based on the information of the variation command transmitted to the production control device 300 in the process. That is, he is trying to draw a lottery based on the newest information which production control device 300 recognizes (information on the last received command among related commands).
However, in the lottery of the display mode of the memory display during execution, the lottery continues to use the information of the prefetching stop pattern command and the prefetching variation pattern command, which are the information when the start memory occurs, instead of the decorative special command and the variation command. You can
In the pattern selection shown in FIGS. 63 and 64(a), the selection probabilities of each pattern may be the same, or the selection probabilities may be biased so that a specific pattern is more likely to appear.

From the above, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on winning a prize in the starting area and can generate a special game state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, information about the game is provided. Display means (display device 41) that can be displayed, production control means (production control device 300) that controls display on the display means, start area (first start winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 97, normal fluctuation winning A start memory means (game control device 100) capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit number of start memories that become the execution right of the game based on the winning of the game ball to the device 37), and the effect control means Information about starting memory not corresponding to the game can be displayed in the display mode of the starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory, and information of the starting memory corresponding to the game being executed can be displayed as the running memory corresponding to the starting memory. The selection of the display mode of the starting memory display that does not correspond to the game being executed is performed using one selection table, and the selection of the display mode of the memory display during execution is performed using the first selection table and selection using a second selection table selected according to the selection result using the first selection table.
Therefore, the burden of control can be reduced.

In addition, the effect control means, as the display mode of the in-execution memory display, the initial display mode at the start of display, the final display mode at the end of display, the process of change from the initial display mode to the final display mode, and the A change effect to be executed at possible timing is selected, and an initial display mode, a final display mode, and a process of change are selected from a first selection table, and selected according to the selection result. A second selection table is used to select a change performance.
Therefore, the burden of control can be reduced.

In addition, game information can be displayed in a gaming machine that can generate a special game state that is advantageous to the player when the game is executed based on the winning in the starting area and the result of the game is a special result. Display means (display device 41), production control means (production control device 300) for controlling display on the display means, and start area (first start winning port 36, second starting winning port 97, normal variable winning device 37) a starting memory means (game control device 100) capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit number of starting memories that become the execution right of the game based on the winning of the game ball, and the effect control means corresponds to the game being executed. The information of the starting memory can be displayed in the display mode of the memory-in-execution display corresponding to the starting memory. and selection using a second selection table that is selected according to the selection result using the table.
Therefore, the burden of control can be reduced.

As shown in FIG. 64, in the case of selecting the display mode of the memory display and the change effect from a plurality of selection tables, the items to be selected from each selection table can be set arbitrarily.
For example, the first selection table may be used to determine the initial display mode and the final display mode, and then the second selection table may be used to determine the process of change and the type of change effect.
By determining the initial display mode and the final display mode in advance, the patterns that can be selected next can be narrowed down, and the processing can be performed efficiently.

In addition, regarding the decorative special figure start memory display, the types of display modes that can be selected as the initial display mode may differ according to the start memory that exists at the time of winning.
For example, if the prize is won with the number of start memories being 0, the display mode 2 will be displayed as the initial display mode.
may be left unselected.
Display mode 2 is a blinking display mode, but in the case of winning when the number of starting memories is 0, the decorative special figure starting memory display will be displayed for a very short period of time, and there is a possibility that blinking cannot be recognized. is selected.

In addition, when a prize is won with the start memory number being 0, the selection probability of the display mode 3 as the initial display mode may be set to be the highest.
Winning when the starting memory number is 0 will be displayed only for a very short period of time, and there is no opportunity to change the display mode in the decorative special starting memory display, and in the running memory display Only change. For this reason, in the case of the display mode 1 with the lowest degree of expectation, the expectation of changing to the display mode with the highest degree of expectation is low. In addition, in the case of a display mode with a high degree of expectation such as display mode 5, it is difficult to expect a change to a display mode with a higher degree of expectation. end up
For this reason, when the display modes are divided into three groups in descending order of expectation, the selection probability of display mode 3, which belongs to the medium level group, is set to be the highest. In addition, display mode 4
may have the second highest selection probability.

In addition, for the decorative special figure start memory display, the display mode and the change performance are selected at the time of winning, and for the running memory display, the display mode and the change performance are selected at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game. The display mode and change effect may be selected at timings other than this.
For example, for the decoration special figure starting memory display, the display mode and the change effect may be selected at each of the change timings such as the time of occurrence of the starting memory and the time of shift accompanying the digestion of the starting memory.
In addition, as for the memory display during execution, the display mode and the change effect may be selected at each change timing such as shift time, reach occurrence time, and SP development time.
Further, as for the memory display during execution, it is possible to select the display mode and the change effect when the corresponding starting memory is generated. In particular, when the details of the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory are clarified by prior determination when the starting memory is generated, the change timing corresponding to the content of the effect is also clarified, so selection becomes easy.

[First modification]
Next, a first modification of the gaming machine of the embodiment described above will be described. Basically,
It has a configuration similar to that of the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, and effects and the like shown in the above-described embodiment can be executed in the same manner. Hereinafter, portions having the same configuration are denoted by the same reference numerals and descriptions thereof are omitted, and different portions are mainly described. The game machine of this modification differs in the configuration of the game board and the transition of the game state.

FIG. 65 shows a front view of the game board 30 in this modified example.
A substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 is formed on the surface of the game board 30 . The game area 32 includes resin side cases 3 provided at the four corners of the game board 30.
3 and a guide rail 31. Further, on the left side of the game area 32, a guide wall 491 is provided along the guide rail 31 to form a guide path 490 that guides the launched game ball to a predetermined position in the game area 32.

In the game area 32, a center case (game effect structure) 40 having a display device 41 is arranged substantially in the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 40 . That is, the center case 40 surrounds the display area of the display device 41 and protrudes forward from the display surface of the display device 41 to prevent game balls from jumping into the surrounding game area 32 .

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (cathode-ray tube). In the area where the image of the display screen can be displayed (display area), information related to the game such as multiple identification information (special symbols), characters that direct the special symbol fluctuation display game, and background images that enhance the performance effect are displayed. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game is performed. The display screen also displays images for effects based on the progress of the game (for example, a big win display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.).

In addition, the center case 40 is provided with a board effect device 44 serving as a movable effect device for effecting a game including a special figure variation display game by an operating movable effect member 44a. This board effect device 44 is located at a position retracted from the display area of the display device 41 in the initial state, and is operable from this position toward the center of the display device.

In addition, in the lower left part of the center case 40, a sub for displaying the fourth symbol for executing the decoration special figure variation display game separately from the decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 and the number of starting memories is displayed. An information display device 90 is provided.

This sub-information display device 90 is composed of a single light-emitting section serving as a sub-game display section for displaying a fourth symbol for executing a decoration special-figure variation display game corresponding to the first special-figure variation display game. A second sub game display section 91 and a single light emitting section forming a sub game display section for displaying a fourth symbol for executing a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the second special figure variation display game. A game display unit 92 is provided. Further, a first sub-display unit 93 indicating the number of the first starting memory that is the right to execute the first special figure variation display game by two light emitting units, and a second special figure variation display game by two light emitting units and a second sub-display 94 that indicates the number of second starting memories that you are entitled to.

In the first sub-game display section 91 and the second sub-game display section 92, a display indicating that the corresponding special figure variation display game is being displayed in a variation display and a display indicating the result are displayed. can be displayed by In addition, the first sub-display unit 93 and the second sub-display unit 94 display the number of the first starting memory (special figure 1 pending) and the second starting memory (special figure 2 pending), respectively, turning off the two light emitting units, It can be displayed by flashing or lighting.

By providing the sub-information display device 90 separately from the display device 41, the fourth pattern can be displayed on the display device 4.
1, the display area of the display device 41 is not occupied, and the display area can be effectively utilized. The sub-information display device 90 is provided outside the operation range of the board presentation device 44, so that the sub-information display device 90 is not covered during the operation of the board presentation device 44. .

Three general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32 , and one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the right side of the center case 40 . The game balls that have entered these general winning holes 35 are detected by the winning hole switch 35a (see FIG. 69).
In addition, below and on the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is provided a normal pattern start gate 34 (normal pattern start gate, normal pattern start area, inflow area) that gives the starting condition of the normal pattern fluctuation display game. . The game ball that won the normal figure start gate 34 is the gate switch 34
a (see FIG. 69).

Below the center case 40 in the game area 32 and directly below the normal figure starting gate 34, there is a starting winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting area, inflow area ) is provided. A game ball that has entered the starting winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 69). Starting gate 3 directly under normal drawing starting gate 34
6 is provided, it is possible to generate the first start memory immediately after the normal figure start memory is generated.

In addition, on the lower right side of the center case 40, a pair of movable members 37b, 37b that can be converted into a state in which the upper part opens in the shape of an inverted "V" to facilitate the inflow of game balls is provided, and a second start prize is provided inside. A normal fluctuating winning device (general electric) 37 having a mouth (starting winning region) is provided. A pair of movable members 37b, 37b of the normal variable prize winning device 37 normally maintains a closed closed state (disadvantageous state for the player) with an interval approximately equal to the diameter of the game ball. However, since a game nail is provided above the normal variable winning device 37, the game balls cannot win when the device is closed. Then, when the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 69) as a driving device causes a reverse "C".
It can be changed to an open state (a state that is advantageous to the player) in which game balls can easily flow into the variable prize winning device 37 by opening in the shape of a square. A game ball that has won the normal variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 69). It should be noted that it is possible to allow game balls to win even in the closed state, and to make it more difficult for game balls to win in the closed state than in the open state.

In the lower right part of the center case 40, there is a first special variable prize winning device (upper big prize winning opening) 38 which can be converted between a state in which game balls are not accepted and a state in which game balls are readily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variable display game.
is arranged. The first special variable winning device 38 has an attacker type open/close door 38c which can be opened by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls to the front side, and the result of the special figure variable display game as an auxiliary game. Depending on how, the state in which the big winning opening is closed (closed state disadvantageous to the player) is changed to an open state (state advantageous to the player). That is, the first special variable winning device 38 includes, for example, an upper grand winning opening solenoid 38b as a driving device (see FIG. 69)
It is provided with a big prize winning opening that is opened and closed by the opening and closing door 38c driven by the controller, and during the special game state or the small winning game state, the state of the big winning prize opening is changed from the closed state to the open state, so that the player can enter the big prize winning port. The inflow of game balls is facilitated, and a predetermined game value (prize balls) is awarded to the player. In addition, inside the big winning hole (winning area), an upper big winning hole switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 69) as a detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the big winning hole is arranged. there is

Below the starting prize winning port 36, a second special variable prize winning device (lower large prize winning port) 39 is arranged which can be converted between a state in which game balls are not accepted and a state in which it is easy to accept game balls according to the result of the special variable display game. there is The second special variable winning device 39 has an attacker type open/close door 39c which can be opened by rotating in the direction in which the upper end side falls to the front side, and the result of the special figure variable display game as an auxiliary game. A state in which the big prize gate is closed depending on how it is (blocked state that is disadvantageous to the player)
to an open state (a state advantageous to the player). That is, the second special variable winning device 39 includes, for example, a large winning opening that is opened and closed by an opening and closing door 39c driven by a lower large winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 69) as a driving device, During the small winning game state, the closed state of the big winning hole is changed to the open state to facilitate the inflow of the game balls into the big winning hole and give the player a predetermined game value (prize ball). It is designed to In addition, inside the big winning hole (winning area), a lower big winning hole switch (count switch) 39a (see FIG. 69) as a detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the big winning hole is arranged. there is In addition, below the second special variable winning device 39, an out port 30a is provided for collecting game balls that did not win, such as a winning port.

FIG. 66 shows the flow path of game balls in the first special variable winning device 38 . Inside (winning area) of the first special variable winning device 38, an upper large winning opening switch (count switch) 38a as detecting means for detecting a game ball entering the first special variable winning device 38 is arranged. ing. All game balls entering the first special variable winning device 38 are detected through the upper big winning opening switch 38a and flow into the upper channel 38j.

The upper flow path 38j is provided with a specific area 38h into which game balls can flow,
Lever solenoid 38f (
69) is provided. The lever member 38i is
It is a plate-like member that can slide in the front-rear direction, and as shown in FIG.
8h is covered, a closed state in which the game ball cannot flow into the specific region 38h, and a specific region 3
It can be converted to an open state in which game balls can flow in at 8h.

The specific area 38h is provided with a specific area switch 38d capable of detecting the inflow of game balls, and the game balls that have flowed into the specific area 38h are detected by the specific area switch 38d and then flow into the lower flow path 38k. A special game state is generated based on the detection of a game ball by the specific area switch 38d during the small hit game state.

In addition, a passage port switch 38g capable of detecting the passage of game balls is provided on the left downstream side of the specific region 38h in the upper flow path 38j. After being detected by the switch 38g, it flows into the lower channel 38k. Lower channel 38
In k, a flow path through which game balls that have passed through the specific region 38h flow down and a flow path through which game balls that have passed through the passage port switch 38g flow down are merged on the downstream side. And the lower flow path 38
A discharge confirmation switch 38e for detecting the passage of game balls is provided at the downstream end of k.
All the game balls that have flowed into the lower channel 38k are detected by the discharge confirmation switch 38e, and then flow into the discharge channel that discharges the game balls to the outside of the gaming machine.

In the first special variable prize winning device 38 configured in this manner, the number of game balls detected by the upper big prize winning port switch 38a matches the number of game balls detected by the specific area switch 38d and the passage port switch 38g. Thus, it can be confirmed that all the game balls that have flowed into the upper flow path 38j have been discharged. Furthermore, by matching the number of game balls detected by the specific area switch 38d and the passage switch 38g with the number of game balls detected by the discharge confirmation switch 38e, all the game balls that flowed into the lower flow path 38k are discharged. You can confirm that it was done. In addition, when the number of inflowing game balls detected by the upper special winning opening switch 38a and the number of game balls detected by the discharge confirmation switch 38e match, the number of game balls flowing into the first special variable winning device 38 You can confirm that everything has been discharged.

In the gaming machine 10 of this modified example, the area on the left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32 where the game balls flow down is the left side area, and the area on the right side of the center case 40 is the right side area. ing. Then, the player adjusts the shooting force and shoots the game ball to the left game area (
By hitting the so-called left), you can aim for winning the normal figure start gate 34, the start winning opening 36 and the second special variable winning device 39, and by launching the game ball to the right side game area (so-called right hitting) It is designed to be able to aim at winning the normal figure start gate 34, the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39.

In addition, outside the game area 32 (here, the lower right part of the game board 30), there are the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game that form the special figure fluctuation display game, and the normal figure start gate 34. A collective display device 50 is provided for displaying a general pattern variation display game triggered by winning a prize and for displaying various types of information.

FIG. 67(a) shows the specifications of the gaming machine of this embodiment. The jackpot probability is 1/300 in common between the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game. Also, the small hit occurs only in the second special figure variation display game, and is 298/300. In the lottery for the big win and the small win, the big win and the small win are not won in duplicate.
That is, the probability of the first special result (jackpot) is the same value in both the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game, and is always a constant value, and in the special figure 2 variation display game , the probability of losing, the probability of being a big hit, and the probability of being the second special result (minor win). In addition, in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the deviation result may not be derived.

The big hit is a special result (first special result) accompanied by the operation of the conditional device, and the small win is a special result (second special result) not accompanied by the operation of the conditional device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit pattern). 2 It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the special variable winning device 39 is set (the character product continuous operating device is operated). The fact that the conditional device does not operate means that the aforementioned flag is not set as in the case of, for example, winning a small prize lottery.

The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on and off. In addition, "conditional device" is a term commonly used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of electric accessories, and the same applies in this specification. It is used as a term with a meaning. From the above, the special result includes the first special result (jackpot) that can generate the first special game state (special game state) and the game value that can be given to the player from the first special game state. Low second special game state (
A second special result (small hit) that can generate a small hit game state) is included.

There are two types of jackpot types: 10R electric sapo and no 10R electric sapo. With 10R electric support, the number of rounds is 10 rounds, and after the end of the special game state, either the special figure 1 variable display game is performed 10 times or the special figure 2 variable display game is performed once. It is a big hit that will be in the state of general electricity support. The 10R no electric support means a jackpot in which the number of rounds is 10 and the general electric support state does not occur after the end of the special game state. The distribution probability of the jackpot types in the case of a jackpot is the same for the first special figure fluctuation display game, the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the V prize that is the prize to the specific area 38h, but they are different. can be In addition, the normal pattern probability, which is the probability of winning the normal pattern fluctuation display game, is 1/251 in the low probability state (not in the normal electric support state), and 250/250 in the high probability state (normal electric support state). 251. It should be noted that the normal pattern probability may be set to 0/251 in a state that is not in the normal electric support state.

The general electricity support improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable prize winning device 37 to facilitate prize winning. In the general electric support of the present embodiment, the probability of winning the general pattern is higher than in the state without the general electric support, and the normal pattern fluctuation time is shortened. By lengthening the open time, the open time per unit time of the normal variable prize winning device 37 is improved to facilitate winning. Of course, other techniques may be used to improve the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning.

In addition, the upper limit of the number of starting memories is 4 for the first starting memory, which is the starting memory for the special figure 1 variation display game, and 1 for the second starting memory, which is the starting memory for the special figure 2 variation display game. It's becoming
Also, the second starting memory is digested prior to the first starting memory.
Note that the upper limit can be arbitrarily set, and the upper limit of the number of second start memories that can be stored should be smaller than the upper limit of the number of first start memories that can be stored.

In FIGS. 67(b) and (c), the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39
showed the open mode.
When the first special variable winning device 38 is opened in the case of a small hit, the opening mode of opening A shown in FIG. 67(b) is adopted. In this opening A, with the start of the small hit, the first special variable winning device 3
8 is opened (t31), and when the opening time of 100 ms elapses, the first special variable winning device 38 is once closed (t32). After that, when the closing time of 2000ms elapses, the first special variable winning device 38 is opened again (t33), and either the openable time of 1600ms elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins. is established, the first special variable winning device 38 is closed and the round is ended (t36).

Also, in opening A, the lever solenoid 38 is
f is turned on, and the specific area switch 38d is enabled. Lever solenoid 38f
is OFF, the lever member 38i covers the specific area 38h and game balls cannot enter, and when the lever solenoid 38f is ON, the lever member 38i retreats from the specific area 38h and game balls can enter. state. Further, the state in which the specific area switch 38d is effective is a state in which detection of game balls by the specific area switch 38d is treated as effective. On the other hand, the state in which the specific area switch 38d is invalid is a state in which even if a game ball is detected by the specific area switch 38d, it is treated as invalid.

The lever solenoid 38f is kept ON even after the first special variable winning device 38 is closed, and is turned OFF 100 ms before the end of the remaining ball processing time (t34). Then, when 100 ms have elapsed since the lever solenoid 38f was turned off, the specific area switch 38d is disabled (t35). That is, almost all game balls that have won the first special variable winning device 38 flow into the specific area 38h.

When the game ball flows into the specific area 38h, when the remaining ball processing time ends, the special game state is entered (t35). In this case, the jackpot type selected is the 10R jackpot, but since the opening of the first special variable winning device 38 in the opening A is the first round, the second special variable winning device 3
A release of 9 is 9 rounds. The opening of the second special variable winning device 39 is performed at opening B. On the other hand, when the game ball does not flow into the specific area 38h, the normal game state is entered after the remaining ball processing time ends.

Thus, in the opening A in the case of a small hit, by first opening for a short time (t31 to t32), it is possible to make the player aware of the special variable winning device that is opened by the operation, and the first special It is possible to make the player aware that the variable winning device 38 should be aimed at. again,
By temporarily closing after the initial opening, it is possible to provide a grace period for the player to hit to the right after recognizing that the player should aim at the first special variable winning device 38.例文帳に追加

In other words, if the first special variable winning device 38 is only opened for a certain period of time from the start of the small win, there is a risk that the openable time will be consumed until it is recognized that the first special variable winning device 38 should be aimed. There is However, the player can aim to win a prize by performing a short opening first, and then performing a second opening after the grace period has passed.

A game nail (not shown) is arranged on the game board 30 so as to guide the game ball to the first special variable winning device 38. If the game ball is hit to the right, it will almost certainly go to the first special variable winning device 38. Game balls are designed to win, and almost all the game balls that have flowed in flow into the specific area 38h. That is, when the first special variable prize winning device 38 is opened, the game ball almost certainly flows into the specific area 38h to generate a special game state. First special variable winning device 38
It can be said that the probability that the game ball will enter the specific area 38h is higher than the probability that the game ball will not enter the specific area 38h.

Also, when the second special variable winning device 39 is opened, the opening mode of opening B shown in FIG. 67(c) is adopted. In this opening B, the second special variable winning device 39 is opened (t11) with the start of the round, and either the opening possible time of 25000 ms elapses or a predetermined number (for example, 9) of game balls wins. is satisfied, the second special variable winning device 39 is closed and the round ends (t12). After that, the interval time starts (t12), and when the interval time ends, the next round starts (t13). In the case of the final round, the remaining ball processing time is set at the end of the round, and then the ending time is set.

FIG. 68 shows the transition of game states in the gaming machine of this embodiment. The game state includes a normal game state ST1, a special game state ST2, a specific game state ST3 and a small winning game state ST4. In each game state, presence/absence of general electric support controlled by the game control device 100, an effect mode for determining the effect mode controlled by the effect control device 300, and a shooting direction of the game ball are determined. In the gaming machine 10 of this modified example, it is possible to aim to win a prize in the starting prize-winning port 36 by hitting left, and mainly to aim to win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37 by hitting right. In other words, it is possible to select the target starting area according to the player's will.

The normal game state ST1 is a state in which it is impossible or difficult to win a prize to the normal variable prize winning device 37 because there is no electric power support for improving the opening time per unit time of the normal variable prize winning device 37 to facilitate prize winning. In addition, the production mode that defines the production mode is the normal mode when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is executed, and the second chance mode when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed. In addition, the shooting direction is left-handed, and the game is played aiming at the start winning opening 36. - 特許庁When a big win, which is the first special result, is derived in this normal game state ST1, the game moves to a special game state ST2. Further, when a small hit as a second special result is derived in the normal game state ST1, the game moves to a small win game state ST4.

When the special figure 2 variable display game is executed in the normal game state ST1, mainly the specific game state S
This is due to the second starting memory that existed when transitioning from T3. When the special figure 1 variation display game is executed, most of the results are lost, but when the special figure 2 variation display game is executed, most of them are big wins or small wins, and the special game state ST2 occurs with a high probability. For this reason, the production mode is different from when the special figure 1 variable display game is executed.

The special game state ST2 is a state in which there is no general electric support that improves the open time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning. Moreover, the production mode that defines the production mode is a special game mode. In this special game state ST2, the second special variable winning device 39
is released, the player is instructed to aim for winning the second special variable winning device 39 by right-handed hitting, but it is also possible to aim for winning the second special variable winning device 39 even for left-handed hitting.

When the special game state ST2 is reached based on the jackpot without electric support (here, 10R without electric support), the special game state ends and the game shifts to the normal game state ST1. When the special game state ST2 is reached based on the jackpot with electric support (here, with 10R electric support), the special game state ST3 is entered upon completion of the special game state.

The specific game state ST3 is a state in which there is an electric power support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable prize winning device 37 to facilitate winning, and the winning of the normal variable prize winning device 37 is possible or easy. Although the variation time of the normal figure variation display game is shortened compared to the normal game state ST1, the execution time of the special figure variation display game is not shortened. A production mode that defines a production mode is a specific game mode. The shooting direction is right-handed, and the game is played aiming at the normal variable winning device 37. - 特許庁

The average value of the execution time of the special figure 2 variation display game in this specific game state ST3 is longer than the average value of the execution time of the special figure 1 variation display game in the normal game state ST1.
Most of the special figure 2 variable display games result in a big win or a small win and a special game state ST2 occurs, but if the interval at which the special game state ST2 occurs is too close, a large amount of prize balls can be obtained in a short time and the gambling property is high. It becomes too much. Therefore, the period of staying in the specific game state ST3 is lengthened to prevent the gambling property from becoming too high. In addition, the time required for generating the second start memory is ensured to ensure that the next special game state ST2 will be generated.
The average value of the execution time of the special figure 1 variation display game may be the same as the average value of the execution time of the special figure 1 variation display game in the normal game state ST1, or the special figure 1 in the normal game state ST1.
It may be longer than the average execution time of the variable display game.

When a big hit as the first special result is derived in this specific game state ST3 and the special figure variation display game ends, the game moves to a special game state ST2. Further, in the specific game state ST3, when the small win as the second special result is derived and the special figure variation display game ends, the small win game state ST4.
transition to In addition, when a special result is not derived in the specific game state ST3 and the termination condition of the electric support is satisfied, the game state shifts to the normal game state ST1. The termination condition of the electric support is that either the special figure 1 variation display game is performed 10 times or the special figure 2 variation display game is performed once.

The small winning game state ST4 is a state in which there is no general electric support that improves the opening time per unit time of the normal variable winning device 37 to facilitate winning. Also, the performance mode that defines the performance mode is a small hit mode. In this small hitting game state ST4, the first special variable winning device 3
8 is released, the player is instructed to aim for a prize in the first special variable prize winning device 38 by hitting to the right.

When there is a winning (V winning) to the specific area 38h in the small winning game state ST4, the special game state ST2 is entered upon completion of the small winning game state ST4. Further, when there is no winning (V winning) to the specific area 38h in the small hitting game state ST4, the small hitting game state S
With the end of T4, it shifts to the normal game state ST1.
In addition, as described above, if the ball is hit to the right, it almost certainly flows into the specific area 38h.

FIG. 69 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of this embodiment.
Although it is basically the same as the gaming machine of the above-described embodiment, the proximity I/Fs 121a and 121b include a specific area switch 38d provided in a specific area in the first special variable winning device 38, a first
A discharge confirmation switch 38e for detecting game balls discharged from the special variable winning device 38, and a passage switch 38 for detecting game balls staying above a specific area in the first special variable winning device 38
g is connected.

In addition, the second output port is an upper large winning opening solenoid 38b that opens the first special variable winning device 38, a lower large winning opening solenoid 39b that opens the second special variable winning device 39, and a normal variable winning device 37 that opens. Operation data of the electric solenoid 37c and the lever solenoid 38f for operating the lever member in the first special variable winning device 38 are output.
Furthermore, the first driver (driving circuit) 138a includes an upper special winning opening solenoid 38b and a lower special winning opening solenoid 39b output from the second output port 134, a general electric solenoid 37c for opening the normal variable winning device 37, a first special Upon receiving an operation data signal of a lever solenoid 38f for operating a lever member in the variable winning device 38, a solenoid drive signal is generated and output.

[Special game processing]
Also, instead of the above-described special figure game processing (see FIG. 11), special figure game processing shown in FIG. 70 is performed. In this special game process, a specific area switch monitoring process for monitoring detection of a game ball in the specific area 38h is performed (step A31).

Further, the processing from step S32 to step S35 is performed as the processing relating to the small hit. At step A7, if the special game processing number is "7", the opening time and opening pattern of the big winning opening when a small win occurs are set, the fanfare command is set, and processing during the small win is performed. Processing (step A32) during a small winning fanfare for setting necessary information and the like is performed.
At step A7, if the special game processing number is "8", the small hit middle processing (step A
33).

In step A7, if the special game processing number is "9", a process of setting a time for discharging the remaining balls that have won a prize in the big winning opening during the small winning middle process, or a small winning ending process. A small hit remaining ball process (step A34) for setting information necessary for performing is performed.
At step A7, if the special figure game processing number is "10", small winning end processing (step A35) for setting information necessary for carrying out special figure normal processing, etc. is performed.
Also, a lever solenoid control process (step A36) for controlling the operation of the lever solenoid 38f is performed.

[Specific area switch monitoring process]
FIG. 71 shows specific area switch monitoring processing (step A3) in the special game processing described above.
1) was shown. In this specific area switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not a small hit is in progress (step A41). During the small hit here is a period during which the small hit medium processing and the small hit remaining ball processing are performed. If the small hit is not in progress (step A41; N), the specific area switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the specific area switch 38d is valid only during the small hit medium processing and the small hit remaining ball processing. Moreover, when it is during a small hit (step A41; Y), it is determined whether the condition device is operating (step A42).

If the condition device is in operation (step A42; Y), the specific area switch monitoring process is terminated. If the condition device is not in operation (step A42; N), it is determined whether there is an input to the specific area switch (step A43). If there is no input to the specific area switch (step A43; N), the specific area switch monitoring process is terminated. If there is an input to the specific area switch (step A43; Y), the specific area passage flag is set (step A44), and the specific area switch monitoring process ends. Afterwards, processing for generating a special game state is performed based on the presence of this specific area passing flag.

[Small hit remaining ball processing]
FIG. 72 shows the small hit remaining ball processing (step A34) in the special game processing described above. In this small hit remaining ball processing, first, it is determined whether or not a remaining ball error is occurring (step A801). If a remaining ball error is occurring (step A801; Y), the process proceeds to step A803. Also, if the residual ball error is not occurring (step A801;
N) determines whether the remaining ball counter is 0 (step A802). If the remaining ball counter is not 0 (step A802; N), the small hit remaining ball processing is terminated. Further, when the remaining ball counter is 0 (step A802; Y), the processing for ending the small hits after step A803 is performed.

That is, after all the remaining balls in the first special variable winning device 38 are discharged, the process for ending the small win is performed. However, at the end, the game ball is the first special variable winning device 38
If there is a residual ball error in which the discharge cannot be confirmed even after a predetermined time has passed since it entered the ball, it is assumed that the time required for discharge has passed sufficiently, and the process to end the small hit is performed. ing. Of course, when the remaining ball error is in progress, the processing for ending the small hit may not be performed. Therefore, the process of step A801 may not be performed.

In the processing for ending the small hit, first, it is determined whether or not the specific area has passed (step A803). When the game ball flows into and passes through the specific area 38h, the specific area switch 3
8d is detected and a specific area passing flag is set. Here, it is determined whether or not there is a specific area passage based on the presence or absence of the specific area passage flag. If there is passage through the specific area (step A803; Y), the process proceeds to step A811 to perform processing for generating a special game state. Moreover, when there is no specific area passage (step A803; N), it transfers to step A804, finishes a small hit game state, and performs the process for making a special figure fluctuation display game executable.

In the processing for terminating the small-hit game state after step A804 and making it possible to execute the special figure variation display game, 10 for the small-hit end processing is set as the processing number (step A8
04), the process number is saved in the special game process number area (step A805). next,
Save the small hit ending time in the special game processing timer area (step A806),
The fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper grand winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A8
07). Then, the big winning hole count area is cleared (step A808), the small hit middle control pointer area is cleared (step A809), and the small hit remaining ball processing is finished.

On the other hand, there is a specific area passing (step A803; Y), when performing the process of generating a special game state after step A810, prepare by loading the command from the decoration special figure command area (step A810), production command Setting processing is performed (step A811). Next, a V jackpot fanfare command is prepared (step A812), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A813).

After that, save it in the signal external information output data area regarding the start of the jackpot (V jackpot) (
Step A814), the test signal output data area for the start of the jackpot (V jackpot) (e.g., condition device operating signal ON, character continuous operating device operating signal ON, special pattern 2 winning signal ON) (step A815).

Then, the number of the jackpot is saved in the game state display number area (step A816), the round number upper limit table is set (step A817), and the round number upper limit value (this embodiment In case 10) is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit area (step A818). Furthermore, the round LED corresponding to the round number upper limit information
A pointer is obtained and saved in the round LED pointer area (step A819), and an initial value (here, 1) is saved in the round number area (step A820). 10 rounds is set as the upper limit of the number of rounds, but since the small winning action corresponds to the first round,
By setting 1 as the initial value of the number of rounds, 9 rounds are released in the special game state.

After that, set 3 for fanfare/interval processing as the processing number (step A821) and save in the special figure game processing number area (step A822). moreover,
V jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special game processing timer area (step A823
), perform fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing (step A824),
Move to step A808.

With the configuration as described above, the following characteristic game progression is possible.
When the special figure 1 variable display game is executed in the normal game state ST1 and a jackpot with an electric sapo is achieved, the special game state ST3 is entered through the special game state ST2 (first jackpot). Specific game state S
Since the normal variable winning device 37 is opened at T3, the special figure 2 variable display game is executed based on the winning to the normal variable winning device 37. In addition, since the second starting memory number becomes 0 by executing this special figure 2 variable display game, if there is a prize to the normal variable winning device 37, the second starting memory becomes 1
occur. Since the execution time of the special figure 2 variation display game in the specific game state ST3 is ensured to be sufficiently long, the second start memory is almost certainly generated.

The special figure 2 variation display game is almost a big win or a small win, and when a big win is made, the game shifts to the special game state ST2. In addition, when it becomes a small hit, the small hit game state ST
Go to 4. The first special variable winning device 38, which is opened in the small winning game state ST4,
When the game ball flows in, it almost certainly flows into the specific area 38h (V win), and if it flows into the specific area 38h, it will shift to the special game state ST2, so the first special variable winning. Interest can be created for winning the device 38 . That is, when the special figure 2 variation display game is executed, the special figure 2 variation display game is almost certainly in the special game state ST2 (second big hit), so the special figure 2 variation display game is a very interesting special figure variation display game. Become.

If the jackpot derived by the V prize in the jackpot or small win in the special figure 2 variable display game executed in the specific game state ST3 is a jackpot without an electric sapo, the normal game state ST1 is entered after the special game state ST2 ends. Transition. In this case, since one second start memory is stored in the specific game state ST3, the special figure 2 variation display game is executed in the normal game state ST1. Since this special figure 2 variation display game almost certainly results in a big win or a small win as described above, the special game state ST2 occurs again (third big win). Therefore, when the special figure 2 variation display game is executed in the normal game state ST1, the effect mode is set to the second chance mode to indicate that the possibility of shifting to the specific game state ST3 is very high.
In other words, if a big hit with an electric sapo occurs in the normal game state ST1, at least two more big wins are almost guaranteed, and the game can be very interesting.

In addition, when the jackpot derived by the V prize in the jackpot or small win in the special figure 2 variable display game executed in the specific game state ST3 is the jackpot with electric support, the special game state S
After the end of T2, the state shifts to the specific game state ST3, so that two more big wins are almost guaranteed.

It should be noted that here, the end condition of the specific game state ST3 includes performing the special figure 1 variation display game 10 times, but this condition is the first start memory that remained when the specific game state ST3 was entered. This is to prevent the specific game state ST3 from ending even if the special figure 1 variation display game is executed, thereby not being disadvantageous to the player.
Therefore, the number of executions of the special figure 1 variable display game as the termination condition of the specific game state ST3 may be any number of times such that such a disadvantageous event does not occur, and at least four times, which is the upper limit number of the first start memory. Even if the special figure 1 variable display game is executed, the specific game state ST3 may not end. Therefore, when the special figure 1 variable display game is executed five or more times, the specific game state ST3 may be ended.
Of course, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is executed a predetermined number of times less than 4 times, the specific game state ST
3 may be ended, and in this way, the game can be made to have a feature that if the second start memory is not quickly generated, the right to win a big win is lost.

In addition, the average value of the execution time of the 10th special figure 1 variation display game in which the condition for ending the specific game state ST3 is satisfied is You may make it longer than the average value of execution time.
By doing so, it is possible to provide a time margin for generating the second start memory, and prevent the end of the specific game state ST3 without being able to generate the second start memory. can.
Furthermore, the average execution time of the special figure 2 variation display game in the normal game state ST1 may be longer than the average execution time of the special figure 1 variation display game in the normal game state ST1.
By doing so, it is possible to lengthen the interval between successive special game states ST2, and prevent gambling from becoming too high.

Further, the end timing of the specific game state ST3 may be when the tenth special figure 1 variation display game is completed or when the first special figure 2 variation display game is completed, or when the tenth special figure 1 variation is completed. It may be when the variable display ends in the display game or when the variable display ends in the first special figure 2 variable display game.
That is, the end timing may be either the start time or the end time of the stop time.

Also, when the special figure 1 variation display game is being executed in the specific game state ST3, the second start memory is not generated, which is a disadvantageous state for the player. (possibility becomes low) may be notified.
In particular, only during execution of the 10th special figure 1 variation display game in which the condition for ending the specific game state ST3 is established, the second starting memory does not occur and the player is in a disadvantageous state. You may make it report|report about.
Also, in the 10th special figure 1 variable display game in which the condition for ending the specific game state ST3 is satisfied, when the variable display ends without the second start memory occurring, the specific game at the stop time An end notice, which is a notice to the effect that the state ST3 is ended, may be performed.
However, when the second start memory occurs during the stop time, the end notification may be canceled and a transition to the specific game state ST3 may be notified.

In addition, in the first special figure 2 variation display game in which the condition for ending the specific game state ST3 is established, when the second start memory occurs, the special game state ST2 is repeated after the special game state ST2. Renso notification may be performed to notify that there is a possibility that
Also, in the first special figure 2 variation display game in which the condition for ending the specific game state ST3 is satisfied, if the variation time ends without the second start memory occurring, the specific game is played during the stop time An end notice, which is a notice to the effect that the state ST3 is ended, may be performed.
However, if the second start memory occurs during the stop time, the end notification may be canceled and the continuous running notification may be performed.

Further, when shifting to the normal game state ST1 in the state where the second start memory exists in the special game state ST2, the production mode is set to the second chance mode in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game based on the second start memory. However, when the second starting memory occurs in the normal game state ST1, the production mode may be the second chance mode in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game based on the second starting memory, or the normal mode may be left as it is. .
Also, regarding the selection of the variation pattern, when the special game state ST2 moves to the normal game state ST1 in a state where the second start memory exists, and when the second start memory occurs in the normal game state ST1. The selection mode of the variation pattern for the special figure 2 variation display game based on the 2 start memory may be different.
For example, when transitioning to the normal game state ST1 in the state where the second start memory exists in the special game state ST2, the identification information is provisionally set in the middle of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game as the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. It is possible to select a re-fluctuation display pattern in which fluctuation display is performed again after stopping,
When the second start memory occurs in the normal game state ST1, the re-variation pattern may not be selected.

Also, the result of the special figure 2 variation display game may be set to either a big hit or a small hit so that the result of losing is not selected. In this way, the special figure 2 variation display game can be made to be a more interesting special figure variation display game by reliably shifting to the special game state ST2. Furthermore, the operation of the lever member 38i may be controlled so that the game ball that has flowed into the first special variable winning device 38 always flows into the specific area 38h (V winning). In this way, the special figure 2 variation display game can be made to be a more interesting special figure variation display game by reliably shifting to the special game state ST2.

Also, the first special variable winning device 38 and the second special variable winning device 39 may be configured as an integrated unit. In this case, it may be provided at a position where only right-handed players can win, or may be provided at a position where both right-handed and left-handed players can win.

From the above, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a starting condition and that can generate a special game state that is advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, A first game executing means (game control device 100) capable of executing a first game as a game based on establishment of a first starting condition, and executing a second game as a game based on establishment of a second starting condition among the starting conditions. possible second game executing means (game control device 100), and a first variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38,
A second special variable winning device 39), a first state in which the second start condition cannot be established, and a second state in which the second start condition can be established
a second variable winning device (ordinary variable winning device 37) that can be converted into a state and a state, the special results include a first special result and a second special result, and the first variable winning device includes: There is a third variable winning device (second special variable winning device 39) and a fourth variable winning device (first special variable winning device 38) having a specific area 38h, derivation of the first special result or to the specific area 38h A first special game state in which the third variable winning device can be converted into an operating state based on the inflow of the second special game state, and a second special game state in which the fourth variable winning device can be converted into an operating state based on the derivation of the second special result. , and the probability of obtaining the first special result is always the same value in both the first game and the second game.
Therefore, since the point to be aimed at changes depending on the situation, the amusement of the game can be improved.
In addition, it is possible to make the player more interested in winning the first special variable winning device 38 having the specific area 38h, which is one of the conditions for generating the special game state, and improve the interest in the game.

In addition, in a gaming machine that executes a game based on winning a prize in the starting area and can generate a special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result, a starting winning opening forming the starting area 36, a normal variable winning device 37 that forms a starting region and can be converted into a closed state in which game balls cannot win and an open state in which game balls can win, and the operating state of the normal variable winning device 37 is 1 operating state and a second operating state in which winning is easier than the first operating state; operating state control means (game control device 100) for controlling in either operating state; First game execution means (game control device 10
0), a second game executing means (game control device 100) capable of executing a second game as a game based on the winning of the game ball to the normal variable winning device 37, and the game ball winning based on the derivation of the special result. A special variable prize winning device 38 that can convert from a closed state that cannot be closed to an open state that allows a game ball to win a prize,
39, special results include a first special result and a second special result, and special variable winning devices include a first special variable winning device 38 and a second special variable winning device 39. Equipped with a specific area 38h into which winning game balls of the first special variable winning device 38 can flow, and the second special variable winning device 39 is opened based on the derivation of the first special result or the flow into the specific region 38h. , and based on the derivation of the second special result, it is possible to execute a second special game state capable of converting the first special variable winning device 38 to the open state, The probability of 1 special result is the same value for both the first game and the second game, and is always a constant value.
Based on the type of special result or the lottery result based on the flow into the specific area 38h, it is possible to enter the second operation state after the first special game state ends, and in the second game, the probability of losing is higher than the probability of the second special result, and when the game ball wins the first special variable winning device 38, the probability that it will flow into the specific area 38h is higher than the probability that it will not flow into the specific area 38h. becomes.
Therefore, it is possible to provide the game with unprecedented playability and improve the amusement of the game.

The execution time of the second game in the second action state is longer than the execution time of the first game in the first action state.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

a first start storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit number of first start memories that are the right to execute a first game as a game based on the winning of a game ball into the start prize winning port 36;
Second start storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit number of second start memories that are the right to execute a second game as a game based on the winning of game balls to the normal variable prize winning device 37
, and the upper limit number of the second starting memory that can be stored is smaller than the upper limit number of the first starting memory that can be stored.
Therefore, it is possible to prevent gambling from becoming too high.

<Special figure fluctuation display game and decorative special figure fluctuation display game>
Next, a special figure variation display game on the collective display device 50 and a variation display game (decorative special figure variation display game) on the display device 41 will be described with reference to FIGS.
For example, as shown in FIG. 73(a), in the center of the display area of the display device 41, a first decoration game display section 81 for displaying the first decoration game of the decoration special figure variation display game is provided.
In the first decoration game display section 81, the decoration special figure variation display game is displayed by displaying the identification information variably in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas and then stopping the display.

In the lower right part of the display area of the display device 41, a second decoration game display section 82 for displaying the second decoration game of the decoration special figure variation display game is provided. The second decoration game displayed in the second decoration game display section 82 has identification information in each of the left area, the middle area, and the right area, similarly to the first decoration game displayed in the first decoration game display section 81 . , then stop and display the result. The identification information (small symbols) relatively smaller than the identification information (large symbols) displayed on the first decoration game display portion 81 is displayed on the second decoration game display portion 82 .

In addition, in the central lower part of the display area of the display device 41, there is provided a standby memory display section 83 for displaying the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory.
Decoration special figure fluctuation display game in which the decoration special figure fluctuation display game being displayed on the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 corresponds to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game) , the standby memory display unit 83 displays a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory (first start memory) that is the right to execute the special figure 1 variable display game. in this case,
The decoration special figure start memory display displayed in the standby memory display unit 83 corresponds to the first start memory one-on-one, and the leftmost decoration special figure start memory display corresponds to the first start memory stored first. It is displayed side by side in the order of storage so that it becomes a decorative special figure start memory display, and it is designed to move to the left each time it is digested.

In addition, the decoration special figure fluctuation display game (decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display) corresponding to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is the decoration special figure fluctuation display game being displayed on the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 game), the standby memory display unit 83 displays a decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the start memory (second start memory) that is the right to execute the special figure 2 fluctuation display game. In this case, the decorative special figure starting memory display displayed in the standby memory display unit 83 corresponds one-to-one with the second starting memory, and the leftmost decorative special figure starting memory display is stored first The second start It is displayed side by side in the order of memory so that it becomes a decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to memory, and it is designed to move to the left each time it is digested.
Furthermore, in the standby memory display unit 83, the result of the special figure variation display game based on the starting memory and the result of the prefetch such as the variation pattern can be suggested by the display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display corresponding to the starting memory. It is possible.

On the left side of the standby memory display section 83, there is provided a memory display section 84 during execution for displaying information related to the start memory corresponding to the special figure variation display game currently being executed. At the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, the decoration special figure starting memory display at the left end of the standby memory display portion 83 is shifted to the in-execution memory display portion 84 . Furthermore, in the running memory display unit 84, the result of the special figure variation display game currently running, the variation pattern, etc. are suggested by the display mode of the decoration special figure starting memory display displayed in the running memory display unit 84. It is possible.
In the upper left part of the display area of the display device 41, the first starting memory number display portion 85a that displays the first starting memory number (special figure 1 reservation number) and the second starting memory number (special figure 2 reservation number) A second start memory number display portion 85b for displaying is provided.

73 and 74 show a case where the special figure 1 variation display game is executed after the special figure 1 variation display game in which the result is "big win". FIG. 73 shows an example of display on the display device 41 and the collective display device 50, and FIG. 74 shows an example of a timing chart.
In FIG. 73(a), during the stop display time of the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is "lost", the number of first starting memories is 1 and the number of second starting memories is 0. state. Here, since the game result is "lost", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 on the display device 41 is one of the result modes of "losing". is "123", and in the collective display device 50, the special figure 1 indicator 51
display mode is "miss" result mode (LED lamp A0 is turned on and LED lamp A
1 to A7 are turned off). In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 73 (a), the display mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52 is also the result mode of "missing" (LED lamp B0 is lit and L
ED lamps B1 to B7 are turned off).

Also, here, since it is during the stop display time of the special figure 1 variable display game, the number of first start memories is 1 and the number of second start memories is 0, so in the display device 41, the first The numerical value of the starting memory number display section 85a is "1" and the numerical value of the second starting memory number display section 85b is "0". 0 decoration special figure start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) is displayed. In addition, in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 reservation indicator 53 corresponds to "one special figure reservation" (the LED lamp C0 is turned on and the LED lamp C1 is turned off (
See FIG. 4 (d))), and the display mode of the special figure 2 reservation indicator 54 is "no special figure reservation"
(a mode in which the LED lamps C2 and C3 are turned off (see FIG. 4(d))).

And here, since the game result is "lost", the number of first start memories is 1 and the number of second start memories is 0, when the stop display time ends, the special figure fluctuation display game and decoration After the special figure variation display game ends, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. When the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game starts, FIG.
), in the display device 41, the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is displayed to move to the running memory display unit 84, and the first start memory number display The numerical value of the portion 85a changes. Here, since the first starting memory is digested and becomes 0, the decorative special figure starting memory display (decorating special figure starting memory display corresponding to the first starting memory) of the standby memory display unit 83 becomes 0, The numerical value of the first start memory number display section 85a becomes "0". In addition, in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 reservation indicator 53 changes, and the mode corresponding to "no special figure reservation" (the mode in which the LED lamps C0 and C1 are turned off (Fig. 4 ( d) see)
).

When the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, the display device 41
In , the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game is started, and in the batch display device 50, the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game is started. Specifically, the variable display of the identification information (large symbols) starts in each of the left, middle, and right variable display areas of the first decoration game display section 81, and the left area of the second decoration game display section 82, The variable display of the identification information (small pattern) starts in each of the middle area and the right area. In addition, a variable display on the special figure 1 indicator 51, that is, a mode corresponding to "varying" (the state where the LED lamps A0, A2, A4, A6 are lit and the state where the LED lamps A1, A3, A5, A7 are lit alternately switching mode)
(see FIG. 4(b)) starts. Thus, in this embodiment, when the variable time starts, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game start, but the variation display does not start, and the first predetermined from the start of the variation time When the time elapses, the variable display of the special figure variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game is started.

During execution of the special figure 1 variable display game, when the game ball wins into the start winning opening 36 and the first start memory (first special figure reservation) is generated, as shown in FIG. , the number of decorative special figure start memory display of the standby memory display unit 83 changes, the numerical value of the first start memory number display unit 85a changes, and in the collective display device 50, the special figure 1 reservation display 53 The display mode of changes.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t1
1) As shown in FIGS. 73(d) and 74, in the display device 41, the variable display ends and the game result is displayed on the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82. Along with this, the decoration special figure start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display unit 84 disappears. Further, in the collective display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51. FIG. Here, since the game result is a "jackpot", the display device 41 displays the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 8.
The display mode of 2 is "333" which is one of the result modes of "jackpot",
In the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 display device 51 is one of the result modes of "jackpot".

Also, here, since the game result is "big hit", the number of first starting memories is 1 and the number of second starting memories is 0, when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and the decoration are displayed. When the special figure variation display game ends and the first special game state starts (t12), the first special game state ends when the ending time of the jackpot ends, and the next special figure variation display game is the special figure. The variable time of one variable display game starts (t13). When the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game starts, as shown in FIG. While the display to shift to the part 84 is performed, the numerical value of the first start memory number display part 85a changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 reservation display 53 changes.

In this embodiment, the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82 are hidden at the same time as the special game state is started, and thereafter, the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 81 are hidden at the same time as the variable time is started. The 2 decoration game display section 82 reappears. That is, the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 become invisible at the same time as the special game state starts, and become visible at the same time as the change time starts. Then, the result of the previous special figure variation display game is first displayed in the reappearing first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 . Here, because the result of the previous special figure variation display game is "333" (Fig. 73 (
d)), as shown in FIGS. 73(e) and 74, "333" at the start of the variable time
The first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 appear in a state of statically displaying (t13). Since the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game is started when the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time, the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time (t13 to t14). , the display modes of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 do not change, and the state in which "333" is stopped is maintained.

In addition, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50 is the same display mode as before the start of the special game state even during the special game state (see FIG. 73 (d)) maintained in Then, since the variation display of the special figure variation display game is also started when the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time, as shown in FIG. Until the start of the fluctuation display (t11 to t14), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 does not change.

When the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time (t14), as shown in FIG. ) is performed, and the variation speed gradually increases during this low-speed variation (t14 to t15), and eventually, a high-speed variation (display of variation at a speed that is difficult to identify) as shown in FIG. 73(f) is performed ( t15~
t16). After that, as shown in FIG. 73(g), the high-speed fluctuation ends and the low-speed fluctuation starts (t
16) During this low speed fluctuation, the fluctuation speed gradually decreases (t16 to t17), and eventually a temporary stop state is reached (t17 to t19).

As shown in FIG. 73(g), the identification information of the first decoration game display section 81 starts slow fluctuation in the order of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area. , the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area are temporarily stopped in this order. In the temporary stop state, the identification information is displayed so as to sway, indicating that the vehicle is not completely stopped. As shown in FIG. 73(h), when the same identification information temporarily stops in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, the reach state is entered and the reach fluctuation starts (t18).
For the sake of convenience, FIG. 74 shows only the timing of the identification information displayed in the leftward movement display area as the identification information (large pattern) of the first decoration game display portion 81 . Therefore, in FIG. 74, "t14" is the timing at which the identification information (left pattern) displayed in the left fluctuation display area starts slow fluctuation, and the identification information (right pattern) displayed in the right fluctuation display area and the medium fluctuation display The timing at which the identification information (medium pattern) displayed in the area starts to fluctuate at low speed is between "t14" and "t15". Also, "t16" is the timing at which the left pattern ends high-speed fluctuation (starts low-speed fluctuation), and the timing at which the right and middle patterns end high-speed fluctuation (starts low-speed fluctuation) is "t16
” and “t17”. Further, "t17" is the timing at which the left symbol starts to temporarily stop, "t18" is the timing at which the right symbol starts to temporarily stop, and "t18" and "t19" are the timings at which the middle symbol starts to temporarily stop. is between

On the other hand, in the second decoration game display section 82 of the display device 41, high-speed variation is performed from the beginning to the end. That is, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t14 to t19), the display mode of the identification information (small symbols) on the second decoration game display section 82 is maintained in the high-speed variable display mode. Further, in the collective display device 50, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t1
4 to t19), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 (here, the special figure 1 indicator 51) is maintained in a manner corresponding to "during fluctuation".

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t1
9) As shown in FIGS. 73(i) and 74, in the display device 41, the variable display ends and the game result is displayed on the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82. Along with this, the decoration special figure start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display unit 84 disappears. Further, in the collective display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51. FIG. After that, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game are terminated with the end of the stop display time. Here, the game result is "lost" and there is no starting memory, so the state shifts to the customer waiting state. In addition, if there is a starting memory, the next special figure fluctuation display game will start. Also, if the result is a big hit, it will be in the first special game state, and if it is a small hit, it will be in the second special game state.

Of course, even when the game result is "hit", the game proceeds in the same way as when the game result is "lose". That is, when the game result is "hit", only FIG. 73(i) is different among FIGS. 73(a) to (i). Specifically, if the game result is "
73(i), the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 becomes one of the result modes of "hit", and the special figure is displayed. The display mode of the 1 indicator 51 is one of the result modes of "hit".

As shown in FIGS. 73 and 74, when the special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variation display game whose result is "jackpot", the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next At the start of (t13 to t14), the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 of the display device 41 is the result mode of "big hit", and the special figure 1 of the collective display device 50 The display mode of the display 51 is the result mode of the "jackpot".
Therefore, in this case, the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82
The stop pattern (jackpot pattern) and the stop pattern (jackpot pattern) of the special figure 1 display device 51 are matched, and the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next (special figure 1 display device 51 (variation display in the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82) and the variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next) will be started.

In addition, when the special figure 1 variation display game is executed after the special figure 1 variation display game whose result is "small hit", or when the special figure 1 variation display game is executed after the special figure 1 variation display game whose result is "loss" Similarly, in the case of executing the variable display game, in a state in which the stop symbols of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 1 display device 51 are aligned, the next Special figure 1 to be executed
The variation display of the variation display game and the variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next are started.

That is, when the special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variation display game, the stop symbols of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 and the special figure 1 display device 51
Variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next in a state consistent with the stop pattern of
The variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next is started.
Similarly, when the special figure 2 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variation display game, the stop symbols of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the special figure 2 display device 52
In a state consistent with the stop pattern of, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next,
The variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next will be started.

75 and 76 show the case where the special figure 2 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variation display game in which the result is "big win". FIG. 75 is an example of display on the display device 41 and the batch display device 50, and FIG. 76 is an example of a timing chart. FIGS. 75(a) and (b) are
73(a) and 73(b) show the same state, so description thereof will be omitted.
When the game ball wins the normal variable winning device 37 during execution of the special figure 1 variable display game and the second start memory (second special figure reservation) is generated, as shown in FIG. 75 (c), the display device 41 In, the numerical value of the second starting memory number display portion 85b changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 reservation display 54 changes.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t2
1) As shown in FIGS. 75(d) and 76, in the display device 41, the variable display ends and the game result is displayed on the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82. Along with this, the decoration special figure start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display unit 84 disappears. Further, in the collective display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51. FIG. Here, since the game result is a "jackpot", the display device 41 displays the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 8.
The display mode of 2 is "333" which is one of the result modes of "jackpot",
In the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 display device 51 is one of the result modes of "jackpot".

Also, here, since the game result is "big win", the number of first starting memories is 0 and the number of second starting memories is 1, when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and the decoration are displayed. The special figure variation display game ends and the first special game state starts (t22), and when the ending time for the big hit ends, the first special game state ends and the next special figure variation display game is the special figure. The variable time of the 2-variable display game starts (t23). When the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variation display game starts, the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory is displayed on the standby memory display section 83 on the display device 41, as shown in FIG. 75(e). is displayed, then FIG.
As shown in (f), the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is displayed to move to the memory display unit 84 during execution, and the numerical value of the second start memory number display unit 85b changes. Also, in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 pending display 54 changes.

It should be noted that, in the present embodiment, from the start of the variable time to the transition effect (effect to display to move the decorative special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 to the running memory display unit 84) to the start The time is when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game (
Figures 73 (a), (b), Figures 73 (e), (f), Figures 75 (a), (b)) and special figure 2
When the special figure 2 variation display game is executed next to the variation display game, and when the special figure 2 variation display game is performed next to the special figure 1 variation display game (see FIGS. 75(e) and (f)) , It is the same as when the special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variation display game. In this embodiment, the time from the start of the variable time to the start of the transition effect is set to, for example, a second predetermined time that is shorter than the first predetermined time (the time from the start of the variable time to the start of the variable display).

Further, in the present embodiment, the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the first starting memory has a circular shape, and the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the second starting memory has a hexagonal shape. That is, in this embodiment, by differentiating the shape of the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory and the shape of the decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory, the decoration special figure being displayed It notifies which of the first starting memory and the second starting memory the graphic starting memory display corresponds to. Of course, by changing the display mode (for example, color and size) other than the shape, it is notified whether the decoration special figure start memory display being displayed corresponds to the first start memory or the second start memory. You can make it work.

As described above, in this embodiment, the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 are hidden at the same time as the special game state is started, and thereafter, at the same time as the variable time is started, the first decoration game is displayed. The display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 reappear. Then, the result of the previous special figure variation display game is first displayed in the reappearing first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 . Here, the result of the previous special figure fluctuation display game is "
333" (see FIG. 75(d)), as shown in FIGS. second
A decoration game display section 82 appears (t23). Since the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game is started when the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time, the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time (t23 to t24). , the first decorative game display section 81 and the second
The display mode of the decoration game display section 82 does not change, and the state in which "333" is stopped and displayed is maintained.

In addition, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50 is the same display form as before the start of the special game state even during the special game state (see FIG. 75 (d)) maintained in Then, since the variation display of the special figure variation display game is also started when the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time, as shown in FIG. Until the start of the fluctuation display (t21 to t24), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 does not change.

When the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation time (t24), as shown in FIG. ) is performed, and the variation speed gradually increases during this low-speed variation (t24 to t25), and eventually a high-speed variation (variation display at a speed that is difficult to identify) as shown in FIG. 75(f) is performed ( t25~
t26). After that, as shown in FIG. 75(g), the high-speed fluctuation ends and the low-speed fluctuation starts (t
26), the fluctuation speed gradually decreases during this low speed fluctuation (t26 to t27), and eventually comes to a temporary stop state (t27 to t29). As shown in FIG. 75(h), when the same identification information temporarily stops in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, the reach state is entered and the reach fluctuation starts (t28).
In FIG. 76, for the sake of convenience, only the timing of the identification information displayed in the leftward movement display area is shown as the identification information (large pattern) of the first decorative game display portion 81 .

On the other hand, in the second decoration game display section 82 of the display device 41, high-speed variation is performed from the beginning to the end. That is, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t24-t29), the display mode of the identification information (small symbols) on the second decoration game display section 82 is maintained in the high-speed variable display mode. Further, in the batch display device 50, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t2
4 to t29), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 (here, the special figure 2 indicator 52) is maintained in a manner corresponding to "during fluctuation".

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t2
9) As shown in FIGS. 75(i) and 76, in the display device 41, the variable display ends and the game result is displayed on the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82. Along with this, the decoration special figure start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory) of the running memory display unit 84 disappears. Further, in the collective display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 2 display device 52. After that, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game are terminated with the end of the stop display time. Here, the game result is "lost" and there is no starting memory, so the state shifts to the customer waiting state.

Of course, even when the game result is "hit", the game proceeds in the same way as when the game result is "lose". That is, when the game result is "hit", only FIG. 75(i) is different among FIGS. 75(a) to (i). Specifically, if the game result is "
75(i), the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 becomes one of the result modes of "hit", and the special figure is displayed. The display mode of the second indicator 52 is one of the "win" result modes.

As shown in FIGS. 75 and 76, when the special figure 2 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variation display game whose result is "jackpot", the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next (t23 to t24), the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 of the display device 41 is the result mode of "big win". Also, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next (t23 to t24), the special figure 2 of the collective display device 50
Since the result of the previous special figure 2 fluctuation display game is displayed on the display 52, the previous special figure 2
If the result of the variation display game is "lost", as shown in FIGS. 75 and 76, at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next (t23 to t24), the collective display device 50 The display mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52 is the result mode of "missing".

Therefore, when the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the result mode of "losing", the special figure 1 fluctuation display game whose result is "jackpot" is followed by the special figure 2 When the variable display game is executed, the stop symbols (jackpot symbols) of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols (loss symbols) of the special figure 2 display device 52 are matched. In the state where it is not performed, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next (variation display in the special figure 2 display device 52) and the decoration special figure variation display corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game to be performed next The variable display of the game (variable display in the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82) is started.

In addition, when the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50 is stopped displaying the result mode of "missing", the special figure 1 fluctuation display game whose result is "minor hit" is followed by the special figure Similarly, when the 2-variation display game is executed, the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 8 are displayed.
2 stop pattern (small hit pattern) and the stop pattern (missing pattern) of the special figure 2 display device 52 do not match, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next, and the next The variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed is started.

That is, when the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the result mode of "missing", the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in which the result is "hit" is followed by the special figure 2 When executing the variable display game, the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 are displayed.
The stop pattern (hit pattern) and the stop pattern (lost pattern) of the special figure 2 display device 52 do not match, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game to be executed next, and the next to be executed special figure 2
The variable display of the decoration special figure variable display game corresponding to the variable display game is started.

When the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the result mode of "missing", the special figure 2 variation display is performed next to the special figure 1 variation display game in which the result is "hit". When executing the game, in order to start the variable display in a state in which the stop symbols of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display device 52 are aligned, , At the start of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next (t23 to t24), the result mode of "losing" is displayed on the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 (previous game result(
It is possible to display the result of "hit" before displaying the result of "losing", or it is possible to display the result of "losing" without displaying the result of the previous game. There is Alternatively, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next (t23 to t24), it is necessary to display the result mode of "hit" on the special figure 2 display device 52.

In this case, the player may have the illusion that the special figure fluctuation display game has been executed even though the special figure starting memory has not been digested. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the stop symbols of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display device 52 are inconsistent, the inconsistency In order to start the variable display of the special figure 2 variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game, it is possible to avoid erroneous recognition of the game situation, and the player can It is possible to smoothly progress the variable display game without giving a sense of discomfort.

FIGS. 77 and 78 show the case where the special figure 1 variation display game is executed after the special figure 2 variation display game with the result of "big win". FIG. 77 shows an example of display on the display device 41 and the collective display device 50, and FIG. 78 shows an example of a timing chart.
In FIG. 77(a), during the stop display time of the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is "lost", the number of first starting memories is 0 and the number of second starting memories is 1. state. Here, since the game result is "lost", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 on the display device 41 is one of the result modes of "losing". is "123", and in the collective display device 50, the special figure 2 indicator 52
is the result mode of "mismatch". Further, in the example shown in FIG. 77(a), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 is also the result mode of "off".

And here, since the game result is "lost", the number of first start memories is 0 and the number of second start memories is 1, when the stop display time ends, the special figure fluctuation display game and decoration After the special figure variation display game ends, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. When the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game starts, FIG.
), in the display device 41, the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is displayed to move to the running memory display unit 84, and the second start memory number display The numerical value of the portion 85b changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 pending display 54 changes.

When the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game, the display device 41
In , the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game starts, and in the batch display device 50, the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game starts.
When a game ball wins into the start winning opening 36 during execution of the special figure 2 variable display game and the first start memory (first special figure reservation) is generated, as shown in FIG. is the first
The numerical value of the starting memory number display part 85a changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 reservation display 53 changes.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t3
1) As shown in FIGS. 77(d) and 78, in the display device 41, the variable display ends and the game result is displayed on the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82. Along with this, the decoration special figure start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory) of the running memory display unit 84 disappears. Further, in the collective display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 2 display device 52. Here, since the game result is a "jackpot", the display device 41 displays the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 8.
The display mode of 2 is "333" which is one of the result modes of "jackpot",
In the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52 is one of the result modes of "jackpot".

Also, here, since the game result is "big hit", the number of first starting memories is 1 and the number of second starting memories is 0, when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and the decoration are displayed. The special figure variation display game ends and the first special game state starts (t32), and when the ending time for the big hit ends, the first special game state ends and the next special figure variation display game is played. The variable time of one variable display game starts (t33). When the variable time of the special figure 1 variation display game starts, the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory is displayed on the standby memory display section 83 on the display device 41, as shown in FIG. 77(e). is displayed and then FIG.
As shown in (f), the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is displayed to move to the memory display unit 84 during execution, and the numerical value of the first start memory number display unit 85a changes. Also, in the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 pending display 53 changes.

As described above, in this embodiment, the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 are hidden at the same time as the special game state is started, and thereafter, at the same time as the variable time is started, the first decoration game is displayed. The display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 reappear. Then, the result of the previous special figure variation display game is first displayed in the reappearing first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 . Here, the result of the previous special figure fluctuation display game is "
333" (see FIG. 77(d)), as shown in FIGS. 77(e) and 78, the first decorative game display section 81 and second
A decoration game display section 82 appears (t33). Since the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game is started when the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time, the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time (t33 to t34). , the first decorative game display section 81 and the second
The display mode of the decoration game display section 82 does not change, and the state in which "333" is stopped and displayed is maintained.

In addition, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50 is the same display mode as before the start of the special game state even during the special game state (see FIG. 77 (d)) maintained in Then, since the variation display of the special figure variation display game is also started when the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time, as shown in FIG. Until the start of the fluctuation display (t31 to t34), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 does not change.

When the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation time (t34), as shown in FIG. ) is performed, and the variation speed gradually increases during this low-speed variation (t34 to t35), and eventually, a high-speed variation (display of variation at a speed that is difficult to identify) as shown in FIG. 77(f) is performed ( t35~
t36). After that, as shown in FIG. 77(g), the high-speed fluctuation ends and the low-speed fluctuation starts (t
36), during this low speed fluctuation, the fluctuation speed gradually decreases (t36 to t37), and eventually comes to a temporary stop state (t37 to t39). As shown in FIG. 77(h), when the same identification information temporarily stops in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, the reach state is entered and the reach fluctuation starts (t38).
For the sake of convenience, FIG. 78 shows only the timing of the identification information displayed in the leftward movement display area as the identification information (large pattern) of the first decoration game display portion 81 .

On the other hand, in the second decoration game display section 82 of the display device 41, high-speed variation is performed from the beginning to the end. That is, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t34 to t39), the display mode of the identification information (small symbols) on the second decoration game display section 82 is maintained in the high-speed variable display mode. Further, in the collective display device 50, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t3
4 to t39), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 (here, the special figure 1 indicator 51) is maintained in a manner corresponding to "during fluctuation".

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t3
9) As shown in FIGS. 77(i) and 78, in the display device 41, the variable display ends and the game result is displayed on the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82. Along with this, the decoration special figure start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display unit 84 disappears. Further, in the collective display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51. FIG. After that, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game are terminated with the end of the stop display time. Here, the game result is "lost" and there is no starting memory, so the state shifts to the customer waiting state.

Of course, even when the game result is "hit", the game proceeds in the same way as when the game result is "lose". That is, when the game result is "hit", only FIG. 77(i) is different among FIGS. 77(a) to (i). Specifically, if the game result is "
77(i), the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 becomes one of the result modes of "hit", and the special figure is displayed. The display mode of the 1 indicator 51 is one of the result modes of "hit".

As shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, when the special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variation display game whose result is "jackpot", the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next (t33 to t34), the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 of the display device 41 is the result mode of "big win". Also, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next (t33 to t34), the special figure 1 of the collective display device 50
Since the result of the previous special figure 1 fluctuation display game is displayed on the display 51, the previous special figure 1
When the result of the variation display game is "lost", as shown in FIGS. 77 and 78, at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next (t33 to t34), the collective display device 50 The display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 is the result mode of "missing".

Therefore, when the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the result mode of "losing", the special figure 1 is next to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in which the result is "jackpot". When the variable display game is executed, the stop symbols (jackpot symbols) on the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols (loss symbols) on the special figure 1 display device 51 are matched. In the state where it is not performed, the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next (variation display on the special figure 1 display device 51) and the decoration special figure variation display corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game to be performed next The variable display of the game (variable display in the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82) is started.

In addition, when the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the result mode of "missing", the special figure 2 fluctuation display game whose result is "minor hit" is next to the special figure Similarly, when executing the 1-variation display game, the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 8 are displayed.
2 stop pattern (small winning pattern) and the stop pattern (missing pattern) of the special figure 1 display device 51 do not match, the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next, and the next The variation display of the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed is started.

That is, when the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the result mode of "missing", the special figure 1 is next to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in which the result is "hit". When executing the variable display game, the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 are displayed.
The stop pattern (hit pattern) and the stop pattern (lost pattern) of the special figure 1 display device 51 do not match, and the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed next and the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game to be executed next special figure 1
The variable display of the decoration special figure variable display game corresponding to the variable display game is started.

When the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the result mode of "missing", the special figure 1 variation display is performed next to the special figure 2 variation display game in which the result is "hit". When executing the game, in order to start the variable display in a state in which the stop symbols of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 1 display device 51 are aligned, , At the start of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next (t33 to t34), the result mode of "lost" is displayed on the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 (previous game result(
It is possible to display the result of "hit" before displaying the result of "losing", or it is possible to display the result of "losing" without displaying the result of the previous game. There is Alternatively, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next (t33 to t34), it is necessary to display the result mode of "hit" on the special figure 1 display device 51.

In this case, the player may have the illusion that the special figure fluctuation display game has been executed even though the special figure starting memory has not been digested. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the stop symbols of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 1 display device 51 are inconsistent, the inconsistency In order to start the variable display of the special figure 1 variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game, it is possible to avoid erroneous recognition of the game situation, and the player can It is possible to smoothly progress the variable display game without giving a sense of discomfort.

Next, the case of providing probability control means (game control device 100) for setting the probability state of generating a special result to either a normal probability state or a high probability state higher than the normal probability state will be described. .
A change in the probability state is selected according to the type of special result that triggered the start of the special game state at the end of the special game state. The special results include a normal jackpot that is set to a normal probability state after the special game state is finished, and a probability variable jackpot that is set to a high probability state after the special game state is finished.

FIGS. 79 and 80 show the case where the special figure 2 variation display game is executed after the special figure 1 variation display game with the result of "normal jackpot". FIG. 79 shows an example of display on the display device 41 and the batch display device 50, and FIG. 80 shows an example of a timing chart.
In FIG. 79(a), during the stop display time of the special figure 1 variable display game in which the result is "lost", the number of first starting memories is 1 and the number of second starting memories is 0. state. Here, since the game result is "lost", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 on the display device 41 is one of the result modes of "losing". is "123", and in the collective display device 50, the special figure 1 indicator 51
is the result mode of "mismatch". In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 79(a), the display mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52 is one of the result modes of "probability variation big hit".

And here, since the game result is "lost", the number of first start memories is 1 and the number of second start memories is 0, when the stop display time ends, the special figure fluctuation display game and decoration After the special figure variation display game ends, the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. When the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game starts, FIG.
), in the display device 41, the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is displayed to move to the running memory display unit 84, and the first start memory number display The numerical value of the part 85a changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 pending display 53 changes.

When the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game, the display device 41
In , the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variable display game is started, and in the batch display device 50, the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game is started.
During execution of the special figure 1 variation display game, when the game ball wins the normal variation winning device 37 and the second start memory (second special figure reservation) is generated, as shown in FIG. 79 (c), the display device 41 In, the numerical value of the second starting memory number display portion 85b changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 reservation display 54 changes.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t4
1) As shown in FIGS. 79(d) and 80, in the display device 41, the variable display ends and the game result is displayed on the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82. Along with this, the decoration special figure start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display unit 84 disappears. Further, in the collective display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51. FIG. Here, since the game result is a "normal big win", the display mode of the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82 in the display device 41 is one of the result modes of "normal big win". In the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 is one of the result modes of "normal jackpot".

Also, here, since the game result is "big win", the number of first starting memories is 0 and the number of second starting memories is 1, when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and the decoration are displayed. The special figure variation display game ends and the first special game state starts (t42), and when the ending time for the big hit ends, the first special game state ends and the next special figure variation display game is the special figure. The variable time of the 2-variable display game starts (t43). When the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 variation display game starts, the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory is displayed on the standby memory display section 83 on the display device 41, as shown in FIG. 79(e). is displayed and then FIG.
As shown in (f), the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is displayed to move to the memory display unit 84 during execution, and the numerical value of the second start memory number display unit 85b changes. Also, in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 pending display 54 changes.

As described above, in this embodiment, the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 are hidden at the same time as the special game state is started, and thereafter, at the same time as the variable time is started, the first decoration game is displayed. The display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 reappear. Then, the result of the previous special figure variation display game is first displayed in the reappearing first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 . Here, the result of the previous special figure fluctuation display game is "
222" (see FIG. 79(d)), as shown in FIGS. second
A decoration game display section 82 appears (t43). Since the variable display of the decoration special figure variable display game is started when the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time, the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variable time (t43 to t44). , the first decorative game display section 81 and the second
The display mode of the decoration game display section 82 does not change, and the state in which "222" is stopped and displayed is maintained.

In addition, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50 is the same display form as before the start of the special game state even during the special game state (see FIG. 79 (d)) maintained in Since the variation display of the special figure variation display game is also started when the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time, as shown in FIG. Until the start of the fluctuation display (t41 to t44), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 does not change.

When the first predetermined time has passed since the start of the variation time (t44), as shown in FIG. ) is performed, and the variation speed gradually increases during this low-speed variation (t44 to t45), and eventually, a high-speed variation (variation display at a speed that is difficult to identify) as shown in FIG. 79(f) is performed ( t45~
t46). After that, as shown in FIG. 79(g), the high-speed fluctuation ends and the low-speed fluctuation starts (t
46), the fluctuation speed gradually decreases during this low speed fluctuation (t46 to t47), and eventually a temporary stop state is reached (t47 to t49). As shown in FIG. 79(h), when the same identification information temporarily stops in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, the reach state is entered and the reach fluctuation starts (t48).
For the sake of convenience, FIG. 80 shows only the timing of the identification information displayed in the leftward movement display area as the identification information (large pattern) of the first decoration game display portion 81 .

On the other hand, in the second decoration game display section 82 of the display device 41, high-speed variation is performed from the beginning to the end. That is, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t44-t49), the display mode of the identification information (small symbols) on the second decoration game display section 82 is maintained in the high-speed variable display mode. Further, in the collective display device 50, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t4
4 to t49), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 (here, the special figure 2 indicator 52) is maintained in a manner corresponding to "during fluctuation".

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t4
9) As shown in FIGS. 79(i) and 80, in the display device 41, the variable display ends and the game result is displayed on the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82. Along with this, the decoration special figure start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory) of the running memory display unit 84 disappears. Further, in the collective display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 2 display device 52. After that, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game are terminated with the end of the stop display time. Here, the game result is "lost" and there is no starting memory, so the state shifts to the customer waiting state.

Of course, even when the game result is "hit", the game proceeds in the same way as when the game result is "lose". That is, when the game result is "hit", only FIG. 79(i) is different among FIGS. 79(a) to (i). Specifically, if the game result is "
79(i), the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 becomes one of the result modes of "hit", and the special figure is displayed. The display mode of the second indicator 52 is one of the "win" result modes.

As shown in FIGS. 79 and 80, when the special figure 2 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variation display game whose result is "normal jackpot", the special figure 2 variation display to be executed next At the start of the game (t43 to t44), the display mode of the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82 of the display device 41 is the result mode of "normal big win". Also, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next (t43 to t44), the collective display device 50
Since the result of the previous special figure 2 variation display game is displayed on the special figure 2 display device 52, if the result of the previous special figure 2 variation display game is "probability variation big hit", Figure 79 and As shown in FIG. 80, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next (t43 to t44), the display mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50 is the result mode of "probability variation big hit" is.

Therefore, when the result mode of "probability variation big hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50, the result is "normal big hit" special next to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game When the FIG. 2 variation display game is executed, the stop symbols (normal jackpot symbols) of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display 52 (variable jackpot symbols) ), the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next (variation display on the special figure 2 display device 52) and the decoration corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game to be performed next The variable display of the special figure variable display game (variable display in the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82) is started.

In addition, when the result mode of "normal big hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50, the special figure 1 variable display game whose result is "probability variable big hit" Figure 2
Similarly, when the variable display game is executed, the stop symbols (probability variable jackpot symbols) on the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols (normal jackpot symbols) on the special figure 2 display 52 are displayed. In a state inconsistent, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next and the variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next are started. The Rukoto.

That is, when the result mode of "first big hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50, the result is a "second big hit" different from the first big hit When the special figure 2 variation display game is executed after the variation display game in FIG. Display 5
In a state where the stop pattern (first big hit pattern) of 2 is not consistent, the variation display of the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next and the decoration special figure corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game to be executed next The variable display of the variable display game is started.
Here, one of the "normal jackpot" and "probability variable jackpot" is set as "first jackpot",
Although the other is defined as the "second big hit", it is not limited to this. For example, "10R jackpot", "7
One of the R jackpot and the 2R jackpot is the first jackpot, and the other one is the second jackpot.
Similarly, in the case of "big hit", the variable display of the next game is started in a state in which the stop symbols do not match.
Also, if one of the "jackpot with electric sapo" and "jackpot without electric sapo" is set to "first jackpot" and the other one is set to "second jackpot", the stop pattern is also consistent. In this state, the variable display of the next game is started.

For example, when the result mode of "probability variation big hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50, the result is "normal big hit" special next to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game When executing the FIG. 2 variation display game, the variation display is started in a state in which the stop symbols of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display device 52 are matched. In order to do so, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next (t43 to t44), the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 display the result mode of "variable probability big hit". Display (the result of the previous game (result form of the "normal jackpot") may be displayed before displaying the result form of the "variable jackpot"), or the result of the "variable jackpot" may be displayed without displaying the result of the previous game. You may indicate the mode). Alternatively, at the start of the special figure 2 variable display game to be executed next (t43 to t44), it is necessary to display the result mode of "normal jackpot" on the special figure 2 display device 52.

In this case, the player may have the illusion that the special figure fluctuation display game has been executed even though the special figure starting memory has not been digested. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the stop symbols of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display device 52 are inconsistent, the inconsistency In order to start the variable display of the special figure 2 variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variation display game, it is possible to avoid erroneous recognition of the game situation, and the player can It is possible to smoothly progress the variable display game without giving a sense of discomfort.

81 and 82 show the case where the special figure 1 variation display game is executed after the special figure 2 variation display game with the result of "normal big hit". FIG. 81 is an example of display on the display device 41 and the collective display device 50, and FIG. 82 is an example of a timing chart.
In FIG. 81(a), during the stop display time of the special figure 2 variable display game in which the result is "lost", the number of first starting memories is 0 and the number of second starting memories is 1. state. Here, since the game result is "lost", the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 on the display device 41 is one of the result modes of "losing". is "123", and in the collective display device 50, the special figure 2 indicator 52
is the result mode of "mismatch". In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 81(a), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 is one of the result modes of "probability variable jackpot".

And here, since the game result is "lost", the number of first start memories is 0 and the number of second start memories is 1, when the stop display time ends, the special figure fluctuation display game and decoration After the special figure variation display game ends, the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game, which is the next special figure variation display game, starts. When the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game starts, FIG.
), in the display device 41, the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is displayed to move to the running memory display unit 84, and the second start memory number display The numerical value of the portion 85b changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 pending display 54 changes.

When the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game, the display device 41
In , the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game starts, and in the batch display device 50, the variable display of the special figure 2 variable display game starts.
When a game ball wins into the start winning opening 36 during execution of the special figure 2 variable display game and the first start memory (first special figure reservation) is generated, as shown in FIG. is the first
The numerical value of the starting memory number display part 85a changes, and in the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 reservation display 53 changes.

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 2 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t5
1) As shown in FIGS. 81(d) and 82, in the display device 41, the variable display ends and the game result is displayed on the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82. Along with this, the decoration special figure start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the second start memory) of the running memory display unit 84 disappears. Further, in the collective display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 2 display device 52. Here, since the game result is a "normal big win", the display mode of the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82 in the display device 41 is one of the result modes of "normal big win". In the collective display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 2 indicator 52 is one of the results modes of "normal jackpot".

Also, here, since the game result is "big hit", the number of first starting memories is 1 and the number of second starting memories is 0, when the stop display time ends, the special figure variation display game and the decoration are displayed. When the special figure variation display game ends and the first special game state starts (t52), the first special game state ends when the ending time of the jackpot ends, and the next special figure variation display game is the special figure. The variable time of one variable display game starts (t53). When the variable time of the special figure 1 variation display game starts, the decorative special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory is displayed on the standby memory display unit 83 on the display device 41, as shown in FIG. is displayed and then FIG.
As shown in (f), the decoration special figure start memory display at the left end of the standby memory display unit 83 is displayed to move to the memory display unit 84 during execution, and the numerical value of the first start memory number display unit 85a changes. Also, in the batch display device 50, the display mode of the special figure 1 pending display 53 changes.

As described above, in this embodiment, the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 are hidden at the same time as the special game state is started, and thereafter, at the same time as the variable time is started, the first decoration game is displayed. The display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 reappear. Then, the result of the previous special figure variation display game is first displayed in the reappearing first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 . Here, the result of the previous special figure fluctuation display game is "
222" (see FIG. 81(d)), as shown in FIGS. 81(e) and 82, the first ornament game display section 81 and second
A decoration game display section 82 appears (t53). Since the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game is started when the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable time, the first predetermined time elapses from the start of the variable time (t53 to t54) , the first decorative game display section 81 and the second
The display mode of the decoration game display section 82 does not change, and the state in which "222" is stopped and displayed is maintained.

In addition, the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50 is the same display form as before the start of the special game state even during the special game state (see FIG. 81 (d)) maintained in Then, since the variation display of the special figure variation display game is also started when the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time, as shown in FIG. Until the start of the fluctuation display (t51 to t54), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 and the special figure 2 indicator 52 does not change.

When the first predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the variation time (t54), as shown in FIG. ) is performed, and the variation speed gradually increases during this low-speed variation (t54 to t55), and eventually, a high-speed variation (display of variation at a speed that is difficult to identify) as shown in FIG. 81(f) is performed ( t55~
t56). After that, as shown in FIG. 81(g), the high-speed fluctuation ends and the low-speed fluctuation starts (t
56), the fluctuation speed gradually decreases during this low speed fluctuation (t56 to t57), and eventually a temporary stop state is reached (t57 to t59). As shown in FIG. 81(h), when the same identification information temporarily stops in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, the reach state is entered and the reach fluctuation starts (t58).
For the sake of convenience, FIG. 82 shows only the timing of the identification information displayed in the leftward movement display area as the identification information (large pattern) of the first decoration game display portion 81 .

On the other hand, in the second decoration game display section 82 of the display device 41, high-speed variation is performed from the beginning to the end. That is, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t54 to t59), the display mode of the identification information (small symbols) on the second decoration game display section 82 is maintained in the high-speed variable display mode. Further, in the collective display device 50, from the start of the variable display to the end of the variable time (t5
4 to t59), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 or the special figure 2 indicator 52 (here special figure 1 indicator 51) is maintained in a manner corresponding to "during fluctuation".

Then, when the variable time of the special figure 1 variable display game ends and the stop display time starts (t5
9) As shown in FIGS. 81(i) and 82, in the display device 41, the variable display ends and the game result is displayed on the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82. Along with this, the decoration special figure start memory display (decoration special figure start memory display corresponding to the first start memory) of the running memory display unit 84 disappears. Further, in the batch display device 50, the variable display is finished and the game result is displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51. FIG. After that, the special figure variation display game and the decorative special figure variation display game are terminated with the end of the stop display time. Here, the game result is "lost", and since there is no starting memory, the state shifts to the customer waiting state.

Of course, even when the game result is "hit", the game proceeds in the same way as when the game result is "lose". That is, when the game result is "hit", only FIG. 81(i) is different among FIGS. 81(a) to (i). Specifically, if the game result is "
81(i), the display mode of the first decoration game display section 81 and the second decoration game display section 82 becomes one of the result modes of "hit", and the special figure is displayed. The display mode of the 1 indicator 51 is one of the result modes of "hit".

As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, when the special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variation display game whose result is "normal jackpot", the special figure 1 variation display to be executed next At the start of the game (t53 to t54), the display mode of the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82 of the display device 41 is the result mode of "normal big win". Also, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next (t53 to t54), the collective display device 50
Since the result of the previous special figure 1 variation display game is displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51, if the result of the previous special figure 1 variation display game is "probable variation big hit", Figure 81 and As shown in FIG. 82, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next (t53 to t54), the display mode of the special figure 1 indicator 51 of the collective display device 50 is the result mode of "probability variation big hit" is.

Therefore, when the result mode of "probability variation big hit" is stopped on the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50, the result is "normal big hit" special next to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game When the FIG. 1 variable display game is executed, the stop symbols (normal jackpot symbols) on the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop symbols on the special figure 1 display 51 (variable jackpot symbols) ), the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next (variation display on the special figure 1 display device 51) and the decoration corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next The variable display of the special figure variable display game (variable display in the first decorative game display section 81 and the second decorative game display section 82) is started.

In addition, when the result mode of "normal big hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50, the result is "probability variable big hit" special next to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game Figure 1
Similarly, when the variable display game is executed, the stop symbols (probability variable jackpot symbols) on the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols (normal jackpot symbols) on the special figure 1 display 51 are displayed. is not consistent, the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next and the variation display of the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next are started. The Rukoto.

That is, when the result mode of "first big hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50, the result is a "second big hit" different from the first big hit. When the special figure 1 variation display game is executed after the variation display game in FIG. Display 5
In a state where the 1 stop pattern (first jackpot pattern) does not match, the variation display of the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next and the decoration special figure corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game to be executed next The variable display of the variable display game is started.
Here, one of the "probable variable jackpot" and the "normal jackpot" is set as the "first jackpot",
Although the other is defined as the "second big hit", it is not limited to this. For example, "10R jackpot", "7
One of the R jackpot and the 2R jackpot is the first jackpot, and the other one is the second jackpot.
Similarly, in the case of "big hit", the variable display of the next game is started in a state in which the stop symbols do not match.
Also, if one of the "jackpot with electric sapo" and "jackpot without electric sapo" is set to "first jackpot" and the other one is set to "second jackpot", the stop pattern is also consistent. In this state, the variable display of the next game is started.

For example, when the result mode of "probability variation big hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50, the result is "normal big hit" special next to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game When executing the FIG. 1 variable display game, the variable display is started in a state in which the stop symbols of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 1 display device 51 are matched. In order to do so, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next (t53 to t54), the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 display the result mode of "variable probability big hit". Display (the result of the previous game (the result of the "normal jackpot") may be displayed before displaying the result of the "variable jackpot"), or the result of the "variable jackpot" may be displayed without displaying the result of the previous game. You may indicate the mode). Alternatively, at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game to be executed next (t53 to t54), it is necessary to display the result mode of "normal jackpot" on the special figure 1 display device 51.

In this case, the player may have the illusion that the special figure fluctuation display game has been executed even though the special figure starting memory has not been digested. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the stop symbols of the first decoration game display portion 81 and the second decoration game display portion 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 1 display device 51 are inconsistent, the inconsistency In order to start the variable display of the special figure 1 variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game, it is possible to avoid erroneous recognition of the game situation, and the player can It is possible to smoothly progress the variable display game without giving a sense of discomfort.

Thus, in the present embodiment, at the start of the special figure 1 variation display game (between the start of the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game and the start of the variation display), the first The stop symbols of the decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82, and the special figure 1 of the collective display device 50
When the stop pattern of the display device 51 is consistent, the special figure 1 variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game remain in the matching state. Start the display, and if it is not consistent, start the variable display of the special figure 1 variation display game and the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 variation display game in the inconsistent state Therefore, the progress of the game can be smoothly performed.

Also, at the start of the special figure 2 variation display game (between the start of the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game and the start of the variation display), the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second display device 41 2
When the stop pattern of the decoration game display unit 82 and the stop pattern of the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50 are consistent, the special figure 2 fluctuation display game and the Start the variable display of the decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure 2 variable display game, and if it is not consistent, the special figure 2 variable display game and the special figure will remain in the inconsistent state Since the variable display of the decoration special figure variable display game corresponding to the 2 variable display game is started, the progress of the game can be smoothly performed.

Hereinafter, when the stop pattern of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop pattern of the special figure 1 display device 51 are consistent at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, and the special figure The case where the stop symbols of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display device 52 are matched at the start of the 2-variation display game is simply referred to as "matching If there is
Also, when the stop pattern of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop pattern of the special figure 1 display device 51 are not consistent at the start of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the special figure 2
The case where the stop symbols of the first decoration game display unit 81 and the second decoration game display unit 82 and the stop symbols of the special figure 2 display device 52 do not match at the start of the variable display game is simply referred to as "not matching. case”.

In the above description, as an example of "if consistent", when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game, and when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is followed by the special figure 2 fluctuation Although the case where the display game is executed has been mentioned, the "matching case" is not limited to these cases. For example, when the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50 stops displaying the result mode of "big hit", the special figure 1 variable display game with the result of "big hit" is followed by the special figure 2. When executing a variable display game, or when the result mode of "missing" is stopped on the special figure 2 display device 52 of the collective display device 50, the special figure 1 variable display in which the result is "missing" Also when executing the special figure 2 fluctuation display game next to the game, it is "matched".

Also, in the above description, as an example of "not matching", the result mode of "missing" is stopped on the special figure 2 indicator 52 of the collective display device 50, and the result is "hit If the special figure 2 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 1 variation display game (see FIGS. 75 and 76), and the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50 is "missed" result mode is stopped and the result is "hit" Special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to special figure 2 variation display game (see FIGS. 77 and 78), and collective display device 50 When the result mode of "first big hit" is stopped and displayed on the special figure 2 display device 52, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in which the result is "second big hit" is followed by the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed (see FIGS. 79 and 80), and when the result mode of "first big hit" is stopped on the special figure 1 display device 51 of the collective display device 50 and the result is "second big hit "When the special figure 1 variation display game is executed next to the special figure 2 variation display game (see FIGS. 81 and 82), but "if not consistent" is limited to these cases. not. For example, the special figure 2 of the collective display device 50
When the special figure 1 variation display game is executed after the special figure 1 variation display game in which the result mode of "hit" is stopped and displayed on the display device 52 and the result is "loss", or when the special figure 2 variation display game is executed, or collective display Special figure 2 display 52 of the device 50 when the result mode of "either one of the big hit or the small hit" is stopped and the result is "either the other of the big hit or the small hit" Figure 1
Even when executing the special figure 2 variable display game next to the variable display game, "if not consistent"
becomes.

Here, the identification information (large pattern) of the first decoration game display section 81 starts slow fluctuation (starts fluctuation display) in the order of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area, and then the left fluctuation display area. The high-speed fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area start high-speed fluctuation (the low-speed fluctuation ends) at the same time. End (start slow variation).
As shown in FIGS. 74, 76, 78, 80, and 82, the effect control device 300 is the first
In order to display the desired result mode (here, "424") on the decoration game display unit 81,
The identification information (large pattern) of the first decorative game display section 81 is set at the start of the high-speed fluctuation (t15, t25).
, t35, t45, t55) and at the end of the high-speed fluctuation (t16, t26, t36, t46,
t56).

For example, in the examples shown in FIGS. 74, 76, and 78, the result of the previous special figure variation display game is "
333”, the variable display starting from “333” starts (t14, t24, t3
4). Then, the effect control device 300, at the start of the large pattern high-speed fluctuation (t15, t25, t
35), a variable display starting with "333" is displayed in a predetermined fixed result mode (e.g. "
123”) is executed to replace with variable display. Also, at the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the large symbols (t16, t26, t36), the fluctuation display starting from the fixed result mode,
Second replacement to replace with a variable display that starts with the result mode calculated backward based on the game result, the remaining variable time (t16-t19, t26-t29, t36-t39), and the variable pattern (whether or not the reach state occurs, etc.) Execute the process.

In addition, in the example shown in FIGS. 80 and 82, since the result of the last special figure variation display game is "222", the variation display starting from "222" is started (t44, t54). Then, the effect control device 300 changes the variable display starting from "222" to the variable display starting from a predetermined fixed result mode (for example, "123") at the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the large pattern (t45, t55). A first replacement process is performed to replace the . Also, at the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the large pattern (t46, t
56), the game result and the remaining variable time (t46
~ t49, t56 ~ t59) and fluctuation patterns (whether or not a reach state has occurred, etc.) and the like, and a second replacement process is executed to replace with the variable display starting from the result mode calculated backward.
Execution of these replacement processes is reserved, for example, in the variable command process (step C236 in FIG. 32).

In order to stop display a desired result mode on the first decorative game display section 81, it is also possible to replace the large symbols during low speed fluctuation or temporary stop display. However, in that case, the player may notice that the large pattern has been replaced, and the interest in the game may be reduced. On the other hand, by replacing the large symbols during high-speed fluctuation as in the present embodiment, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice that the large symbols have been replaced.

It should be noted that the timing for replacing the large symbols can be appropriately changed as long as the large symbols are changing at high speed.
Also, the number of times the large pattern is replaced is not limited to two times and can be changed as appropriate. For example, the number of times that the large pattern is replaced may be one time.
It is better to execute only replacement processing. Specifically, for example, at the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the large pattern (or after the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the large pattern and before the end of the high-speed fluctuation, the large pattern (may be at the end of the high-speed fluctuation), the fluctuation display starting from the result mode of the previous special figure fluctuation display game is replaced with the fluctuation display starting from the result mode calculated backward based on the game result etc. Second replacement It is better to process. Moreover, when the number of times of replacing the large pattern is plural times, it is preferable that the last replacement process is the second replacement process.

Further, in the first decorative game display section 81, the reach variation may be performed directly from the high speed variation without going through the low speed variation instead of performing the reach variation from the high speed variation via the low speed variation. If the low-speed variation is not passed, for example, when the high-speed variation of the large symbols ends, the large symbols (for example, the left symbol and the right symbol) that are temporarily stopped and displayed on the first decoration game display section 81 are displayed in a desired reach mode (desired You may perform a replacement process to replace with a reach pattern).

On the other hand, the identification information (small symbols) of the second decorative game display section 82 starts to fluctuate at high speed (starts fluctuating display) at the same time in the left area, right area, and middle area. At the same time as the region, the high-speed fluctuation ends (finishes the fluctuation display).
As shown in FIGS. 74, 76, 78, 80, and 82, the effect control device 300 has a second
In order to stop display the desired result mode (here, "424") on the decoration game display unit 82,
The identification information (small symbols) of the second decoration game display section 82 is displayed at the end of the high-speed fluctuation (t19, t29).
, t39, t49, t59). Specifically, at the end of the high-speed fluctuation of small symbols,
It is configured to perform a third replacement process of replacing the small symbols stopped and displayed on the second decoration game display section 82 with a desired result mode.
Execution of the third replacement process is reserved, for example, in the variable command process (step C236 in FIG. 32).

It should be noted that the timing of replacing the small symbols can be appropriately changed as long as the small symbols are changing at high speed. In the case of replacing the small symbols at a timing other than the end of the high-speed variation of the small symbols, a first replacement process may be executed to replace the variable display starting from a predetermined fixed result mode. A second replacement process may be executed to replace the variable display with a variable display starting from the result mode calculated backward based on the remaining variable time, the variable pattern, and the like.
When executing the second replacement process for replacing the small symbols, the third replacement process need not be performed when the high-speed fluctuation of the small symbols ends.
Further, when executing the first replacement process for replacing the small symbols, either the second replacement process for replacing the small symbols is performed after the first replacement processing, or the small symbols are replaced at high speed. It is preferable to execute the third replacement process at the end of the fluctuation.

Also, the number of times that the small pattern is replaced may be one time, or may be multiple times. If the number of times the small symbols are replaced is one, it is preferable to perform only the second replacement process without performing the first replacement process, or to perform only the third replacement process. Further, when the number of times of replacing the small symbols is plural times, it is preferable that the last replacement process is the second replacement process or the third replacement process.

In this embodiment, the time from the start of the variable time to the start of the variable display is "matched" (eg, t13 to t14) and "not matched" (eg, t23 to t
24, t33-t34, t43-t44, t53-t54).
In addition, the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the large pattern is "matched" (eg, t14 to t15) and "not matched" (eg, t24 to t25,
t34-t35, t44-t45, t54-t55) are the same.
In addition, the time from the start of the high-speed fluctuation of the large pattern to the end of the high-speed fluctuation of the large pattern is "matched" (eg, t15 to t16) and "not matched" (eg, t25 to t16).
t26, t35-t36, t45-t46, t55-t56).

In addition, the time from the start of the large pattern low speed fluctuation to the end of the large pattern low speed fluctuation is "matched" (for example, t16 to t17) and "not matched" (for example, t26 to
t27, t36-t37, t46-t47, t56-t57).
In addition, the time from the start of the temporary stop display of the large pattern to the start of the reach fluctuation of the large pattern is "matched" (eg, t17 to t18) and "not matched" (eg, t2
7 to t28, t37 to t38, t47 to t48, t57 to t58).
In addition, the time from the start of the reach fluctuation of the large pattern to the end of the fluctuation time is "matched" (eg, t18 to t19) and "not matched" (eg, t28 to t29
, t38-t39, t48-t49, t58-t59).

Thus, the time from the start of the fluctuation time to the start of the fluctuation display, the time from the start of the fluctuation display to the start of the large pattern high-speed fluctuation, and the time from the start of the large pattern high-speed fluctuation to the end of the large pattern high-speed fluctuation the time from the start of the large pattern low speed fluctuation to the end of the large pattern low speed fluctuation, the time from the start of the large pattern temporary stop display to the start of the large pattern reach fluctuation, and the large pattern reach By making the time from the start of the fluctuation to the end of the fluctuation time the same for "if it is consistent" and "if it is not consistent", start the fluctuation display in an inconsistent state It is possible to set the variation time for the case of the display to be the same as the variation time for the case where the variation display is started in the matching state. That is, there is no need to determine whether or not there is a match when determining the fluctuation time (variation pattern).
It should be noted that at least one of these times may be different between "when matching" and "when not matching". If they are made different, it is necessary to determine whether or not they match when determining the variation time (variation pattern), so the processing load increases accordingly.

From the above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment executes a variable display game (special figure variable display game) that variably displays the identification information based on the establishment of the starting condition, and the result mode of the variable display game is a special result. A gaming machine that generates a special game state when the state is set, and is a first variable display game based on satisfaction of a first start condition (a prize in a start winning port 36) among the start conditions as a variable display game. First variable display means (special figure 1 display device 51) capable of displaying (special figure 1 variation display game), and establishment of the second start condition among the start conditions as a variation display game (to normal variation winning device 37 Control the second variable display means (special figure 2 display device 52) capable of displaying the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) based on the winning), the first variable display means and the second variable display means Corresponding to the game control means (game control device 100) and the variable display game, the identification pattern (
A performance display means capable of displaying a first decoration game for variably displaying a large pattern) and a second decoration game for variably displaying an identification pattern (small pattern) corresponding to the variable display game and smaller than the first decoration game. (Display device 41) and production control means (production control device 300) that controls the production display means
and, when executing the second variable display game after the first variable display game, the second variable display game
At the start of the variable display game, the result mode statically displayed on the second variable display means and the result mode of the first decorative game (and/or the second decorative game) statically displayed on the effect display means are different. There are cases where they do not match, and in that case, the game control means starts variable display of the identification information in the second variable display game without performing processing to make these result modes match. The effect control means is configured to start the variable display of the identification symbols in the first decorative game (and/or the second decorative game) corresponding to the second variable display game (FIGS. 75 and 79). reference).

Therefore, at the start of the second variation display game (between the start of the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game and the start of the variation display), the stop pattern of the effect display means (display device 41),
When the stop symbol of the second variable display means (special figure 2 display device 52) does not match, it corresponds to the second variable display game and the second variable display game in the state of not matching. Since the variable display of the first decoration game (and/or the second decoration game) is started, the game can be progressed smoothly and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The first variation display game may be the special figure 2 variation display game, and the second variation display game may be the special figure 1 variation display game (see FIGS. 77 and 81).
In this case, at the start of the second variation display game (between the start of the variation time of the special figure 1 variation display game and the start of the variation display), the stop pattern of the effect display means (display device 41), When the stop symbol of the second variable display means (special figure 1 display device 51) does not match, the second variable display game and the second variable display game are performed in the mismatched state. Since the variable display of the first decoration game (and/or the second decoration game) is started, the game can be progressed smoothly and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, if the match is not made, the result mode of the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) becomes a special result mode ("hit" result mode). At the end of the special game state that occurred, the result mode stopped and displayed on the second variable display means (special figure 2 display device 52) is a result mode other than the special result mode ("loss" result mode) And, the number of starting memories (first starting memory) that is the right to execute the first fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game) is 0, and the second fluctuation display game (special figure 2 fluctuation display game) The number of starting memory (second starting memory) to be the execution right is one or more, in which case the game control means (game control device 100), after the end of the special game state, the second From a state in which result modes other than the special result mode are stopped and displayed in the second variable display means, variable display of the identification information in the second variable display game is started, and the effect control means (effect control device 300)
After the end of the special game state, the variable display starting from the special result mode is started as the variable display of the identification symbols in the first decorative game (and/or the second decorative game) corresponding to the second variable display game. (See FIGS. 75 and 79).

By configuring in this way, at the start of the second variation display game (between the start of the variation time of the special figure 2 variation display game and the start of the variation display), the effect display means (display device 41)
is a winning pattern, and the stopped pattern of the second variation display means (special figure 2 display device 52) is a lost pattern, the second variation display game and the second variation display remain in that state. Since the variable display of the first decorative game (and/or the second decorative game) corresponding to the game can be started, the progress of the game can be smoothly performed, and the interest in the game can be enhanced. .

The first variation display game may be the special figure 2 variation display game, and the second variation display game may be the special figure 1 variation display game (see FIGS. 77 and 81).
In this case, at the start of the second variable display game (between the start of the variable display of the special figure 1 variable display game and the start of the variable display), the stop pattern of the effect display means (display device 41) hits. pattern, and when the stop pattern of the second variation display means (special figure 1 display device 51) is a lost pattern, the second variation display game and the second variation display game corresponding to the second variation display game remain in that state. Since the variable display of the first decoration game (and/or the second decoration game) can be started, the game can be smoothly progressed, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

Further, the special result mode at the time when the special game state in which the result mode of the first variable display game is the special result mode is ended is not limited to the "win" result mode. That is, the special result mode may be only the result mode of "big win" among the result modes of "hit", or only the result mode of "minor win" among the result modes of "hit". It may be only the result mode of "probability variable big win" among the result modes of "hit", or only the result mode of "normal jackpot" among the result modes of "hit". Alternatively, only the result mode of the "10R jackpot" among the result modes of the "hit" may be used.
It may be only the result mode of "7R hit", or "2R hit" among the result modes of "hit".
It may be only the result mode of "winning", it may be only the result mode of "big hit with electric sapo" among the result modes of "hit", or "no electric sapo" among the result modes of "hit" Only the result mode of "jackpot" may be used.

In this embodiment, the special figure 2 variation display game is preferentially executed over the special figure 1 variation display game. That is, the game control means (game control device 300), in a state in which the starting memory as the execution right of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the start memory as the execution right of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are stored, It is configured to execute the 2-variation display game with priority over the special figure 1-variation display game.

Therefore, in this embodiment, in order to execute the special figure 2 variation display game next to the special figure 1 variation display game, the special game that occurred with the result mode of the special figure 1 variation display game as a special result mode At the end of the state, if the second starting memory number is 1 or greater, the first starting memory number is 0.
It does not have to be 1 (that is, the number of first starting memories may be 1 or more).
That is, in a gaming machine in which the special figure 2 variation display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variation display game, the first variation display game is the special figure 1 variation display game, and the second variation display game is the special figure 2 variation. In order to execute the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) next to the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) when making it a display game, the first variation display game ( At the end of the special game state in which the result mode of the special figure 1 variable display game) has become the special result mode, the starting memory that becomes the right to execute the second variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) (
The number of the second starting memory) is 1 or more", but the starting memory (first starting memory) that is the right to execute the first variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) number is 0
It is not necessary to meet the condition of being an individual.

On the other hand, in the present embodiment, in order to execute the special figure 1 variation display game next to the special figure 2 variation display game, the special game that occurred with the result mode of the special figure 2 variation display game as a special result mode At the end of the state, the first starting memory number must be greater than or equal to one and the second starting memory number must be zero.
That is, in a gaming machine in which the special figure 2 variation display game is executed with priority over the special figure 1 variation display game, the first variation display game is the special figure 2 variation display game, and the second variation display game is the special figure 1 variation. In order to execute the second variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) next to the first variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) when making it a display game, the first variation display game ( At the end of the special game state in which the result mode of the special figure 2 variable display game) has become the special result mode, the "starting memory that becomes the right to execute the first variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) (
The number of second starting memories) is 0" and "the number of starting memories (first starting memories) that is the right to execute the second variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) is 1 or more. It is necessary to satisfy both the condition that

In addition, the gaming machine 10 may be a gaming machine in which the special figure 1 variation display game is preferentially executed over the special figure 2 variation display game.
In this case, in order to execute the special figure 2 variation display game next to the special figure 1 variation display game, the special game state that occurred when the result mode of the special figure 1 variation display game became the special result mode is terminated. Sometimes, the second starting memory number should be greater than or equal to one and the first starting memory number should be zero.
That is, in a gaming machine in which the special figure 1 variation display game is executed with priority over the special figure 2 variation display game, the first variation display game is the special figure 1 variation display game, and the second variation display game is the special figure 2 variation. In order to execute the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) next to the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) when making it a display game, the first variation display game ( At the end of the special game state in which the result mode of the special figure 1 variation display game) has become the special result mode, the "starting memory that becomes the right to execute the first variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) (
The number of first starting memories) is 0" and "the number of starting memories (second starting memories) that is the right to execute the second variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) is 1 or more It is necessary to satisfy both the condition that

On the other hand, in this case, in order to execute the special figure 1 variation display game next to the special figure 2 variation display game, the special game state in which the result mode of the special figure 2 variation display game becomes the special result mode At the end of , if the number of first start memories is one or more, the number of second start memories does not have to be zero (that is, the number of second start memories may be one or more).
That is, in a gaming machine in which the special figure 1 variation display game is executed with priority over the special figure 2 variation display game, the first variation display game is the special figure 2 variation display game, and the second variation display game is the special figure 1 variation. In order to execute the second variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) next to the first variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) when making it a display game, the first variation display game ( At the end of the special game state in which the result mode of the special figure 2 variable display game) has become the special result mode, the "starting memory that becomes the right to execute the second variable display game (special figure 1 variable display game) (
The number of the first starting memory) is 1 or more", but the starting memory (second starting memory) that is the right to execute the first variable display game (special figure 2 variable display game) number is 0
It is not necessary to meet the condition of being an individual.

In addition, the gaming machine 10 includes a first variation display game (one of a special figure 1 variation display game and a special figure 2 variation display game) and a second variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game and special figure 2 variation display (the other of the games) may be executed in order of winning.
In this case, in order to execute the second variable display game after the first variable display game, at the end of the special game state in which the result mode of the first variable display game is the special result mode, " Both the condition that "the number of starting memories that give the right to execute the first variable display game is 0" and the condition that "the number of starting memories that give the right to execute the second variable display game is 1 or more". or "the earliest starting memory among the starting memory that is the right to execute the first variable display game and the right to execute the second variable display game is the right to execute the second variable display game. It is necessary to satisfy the condition that it is a starting memory that is

That is, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the game control means (game control device 100) stores a start memory that is the right to execute the first variable display game and a start memory that is the right to execute the second variable display game. It is possible to configure so that the variation display game (special figure variation display game) is executed in the order in which it is stored.
And, when configured in this way, if the above is not matched,
At the end of the special game state generated when the result mode of the first variable display game is the special result mode, the result mode stopped and displayed on the second variable display means is a result mode other than the special result mode. and the number of starting memories serving as the right to execute the first variable display game is 0 and the number of starting memories serving as the right to execute the second variable display game is 1 or more;
At the end of the special game state generated when the result mode of the first variable display game is the special result mode, the result mode stopped and displayed on the second variable display means is a result mode other than the special result mode. and the number of starting memories serving as the right to execute the first variable display game is one or more, and the number of starting memories serving as the right to execute the second variable display game is one or more. and the case where the starting memory stored first is the starting memory that becomes the execution right of the second variable display game, and in those cases,
After the end of the special game state, the game control means changes the display of the identification information in the second variable display game from the state in which the second variable display means stops displaying the result modes other than the special result mode. and start
After the end of the special game state, the effect control means starts from the special result mode as the variable display of the identification symbols in the first decoration game (and/or the second decoration game) corresponding to the second variation display game. It can be configured to initiate a floating display.

With this configuration, at the start of the second variable display game (between the start of the variable time and the start of the variable display), the stop symbol on the effect display means (display device 41) is the winning symbol. If the stopped symbol on the second variable display means is a lost symbol, the second variable display game and the first decorative game (and/or the second decorative game) corresponding to the second variable display game remain in that state. Since the variable display of the game can be started, the progress of the game can be smoothly performed, and the interest in the game can be enhanced.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control means (the effect control device 300) changes the display mode of the identification pattern to the A low-speed fluctuation display mode in which the identification symbols are identifiable and a high-speed fluctuation display mode in which the identification symbols are difficult to identify are convertible, and the variation display of the identification symbols in the first decoration game corresponding to the second variation display game is possible. The time from the start to the start of the low-speed variation display mode through the high-speed variation display mode is the result mode stopped and displayed on the second variation display means at the start of the second variation display game and the effect display. If the result mode of the first decoration game stopped and displayed on the means is consistent (t14 to t16), and if not consistent (t24 to t26, t3
4 to t36, t44 to t46, and t54 to 56).
By configuring in this way, it is possible to set the fluctuation time to the same time when the variable display is started in an inconsistent state and in the case where the variable display is started in a consistent state. Compared to a configuration in which the time from the start of the fluctuation display of information (large pattern) to the start of low-speed fluctuation through high-speed fluctuation is different between "when matching" and "when not matching". , the processing load can be reduced.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control means (effect control device 300) changes the display mode of the identification pattern to the The identification pattern can be converted into a difficult-to-identify high-speed change display mode, and after the start of the change display of the identification pattern in the second decoration game corresponding to the second change-display game, the change display is performed through the high-speed change display mode. Time until completion (t14-t19, t24-t29, t
34 to t39, t44 to t49, t54 to 59) are the result mode stopped and displayed on the second variable display means and the second variable displayed on the effect display means at the start of the second variable display game. The result mode of the decoration game is configured to be the same between when (t14 to t19) is consistent and when it is not (t24 to t29, t34 to t39, t44 to t49, t54 to 59). be able to.
By configuring in this way, it is possible to set the fluctuation time to the same time when the variable display is started in an inconsistent state and in the case where the variable display is started in a consistent state. Compared to a configuration in which the time from the start of the variable display of information (small symbols) to the stop of the variable display through high-speed fluctuation is different between "when matching" and "when not matching". , the processing load can be reduced.

In this embodiment, both the first decoration game and the second decoration game are displayed, but only one of the first decoration game and the second decoration game may be displayed. Specifically, for example, a mode in which the first decoration game and the second decoration game are displayed, a mode in which the first decoration game is displayed and the second decoration game is not displayed, and a mode in which the second decoration game is displayed and the first decoration game is displayed are displayed. There may be a mode in which decoration games are not displayed.

In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine shown in the above-described embodiment as a gaming machine. can be applied to all gaming machines that use game balls. It is also possible to apply the present invention to slot machines. The slot machines are not limited to slot machines using medals, but include all slot machines such as slot machines using game balls. In addition, the configurations of the modifications described above can be appropriately combined and applied.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered as examples in all respects and not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is indicated by the scope of the claims rather than the above description, and is intended to include all modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the scope of the claims.

10 gaming machine 41 display device 87a character portion 87b character portion (number portion)
87c decoration unit 300 production control device (production control means)

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1,
A gaming machine capable of executing a variable display game that variably displays identification information based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, and generating a special game state when the result mode of the variable display game becomes a special result mode ,
a first variable display means capable of displaying a first variable display game as the variable display game;
a second variable display means capable of displaying a second variable display game as the variable display game;
game control means for controlling the first variable display means and the second variable display means;
display means for displaying information about games;
an effect control means for controlling the display of the display means, and displaying on the display means a decoration game that variably displays a plurality of identification symbols corresponding to the variable display game ;
After the first variable display game, the second variable display game is executed, and at the start of the second variable display game, the result mode stopped and displayed on the second variable display means and the effect display means are displayed. If the result mode of the decorative game that is stopped and displayed does not match, without performing processing to make these result modes match,
The game control means starts variable display of the identification information in the second variable display game,
The effect control means starts variable display of identification symbols in a decoration game corresponding to the second variable display game,
Furthermore, the production control means
when the specific effect is not being executed, the decoration game is displayed in a display mode in which each of the identification symbols includes a number portion and a decoration portion attached to the number portion;
When the specific effect is being executed, it is configured to perform an effect display using each of the identification symbols ,
During execution of the first specific effect of the specific effects, the identification pattern in the effect display is displayed by the number part and the decoration part,
During execution of a second specific effect out of the specific effects, the identification pattern in the effect display is displayed by the number portion.

Claims (2)

A gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined condition and generating a state advantageous to a player when the result of the game is a special result,
display means for displaying information about games;
and a production control means for controlling the display of the display means,
The production control means is
configured to display, on the display means, a decoration game that variably displays a plurality of pieces of identification information corresponding to the game;
when the specific effect is not being executed, the decoration game is displayed in a display mode in which each of the identification information includes a number portion and a decoration portion attached to the number portion;
When the specific effect is being executed, the effect display is performed using each of the identification information,
During execution of a first specific effect of the specific effects, the identification information in the effect display is displayed by the number part and the decoration part,
A gaming machine characterized in that the identification information in the effect display is displayed by the number part during execution of a second specific effect out of the specific effects. 2. The game machine according to claim 1, wherein when the specific effect is not being executed, the identification information further includes a character portion.

Images